JP7369928B2 - pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, which are currently the most popular, are called "special symbols" (or main game symbols) on the 7-segment display when a game ball enters the starting hole (start chucker). When the symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the special symbol is in a specific form (for example, "7"), the special gaming state is a state where the profit state is higher for the player than the normal gaming state {the grand prize opening which is normally closed This is a type of machine (so-called ``first-class Pachinko game machine'') in which the player (the so-called attacker) moves to a game that is opened under predetermined conditions. Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of special symbols that are directly connected to the player's profits, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbols," we call them "decorative symbols" that are used for presentation to increase the interest of the game. The symbols to be displayed are displayed in a changing manner on a display such as a liquid crystal display having a larger size than the display section in synchronization with the fluctuation of the special symbols. When the special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol also starts to fluctuate accordingly, and when the special symbol stops in a specific manner (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol also changes in a predetermined manner (for example, "7"). It will stop at "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been finalized because the decorative symbols have stopped in a predetermined manner.

This mechanism is common to this type of pachinko machine, so in order to differentiate it from other types of pachinko machines, we need to devise ways to create a high level of interest in the overall performance, including the variation of the symbols. The focus is on whether to grant it. For example, you can temporarily stop a fluctuating "decorative pattern" and then restart it, or hide a fluctuating "decorative pattern" and display a highly interesting moving image instead. One such method is to improve the interest of the game through presentation methods such as the following.

JP2014-014494 JP2014-014576 JP2014-039745 JP2014-079281

However, since such presentation techniques have been widely used in the past, there is a problem in that the control method requires further improvement in order to improve the entertainment level.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect is
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
A variable prize opening that can be opened and closed,
a first identification information display section capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, a validity determination is performed based on the acquired first random number, and based on the result of the validity determination, the stop display mode of the first identification information and the first identification information are determined. a first game content determining means for determining a variable display mode;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display section to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information in accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a validity determination is performed based on the acquired second random number, and based on the result of the validity determination, the stop display mode of the second identification information and the second identification information are determined. a second game content determining means for determining a variable display mode;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determining means;
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
With respect to the first performance symbol that is displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the first performance symbol is configured to be displayable within the one performance period. and after the specific display mode is displayed, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed,
Regarding the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
The predetermined preview effect has a plurality of display modes, and the specific display mode is displayed depending on which of the plurality of display modes the predetermined preview effect is displayed. It is structured so that the probabilities are different,
The display mode of the second effect symbol immediately before the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the final display mode of the second effect symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display, The display mode of the second presentation symbol after the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is regardless of the final display mode of the second presentation symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display. After displaying a specific type of specified display mode among the plurality of predetermined types of display modes, the display mode can be switched to a predetermined type of specified display mode that is different from the specific type of specified display mode. It is configured,
The number of types of the plurality of prescribed display modes is configured to be smaller than the number of types of final display modes of the first presentation symbol,
The final display mode of the first production symbol when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, and the first identification information or the second identification information in the stop display mode This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the final display mode of the first presentation symbol after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it was stopped and displayed can be displayed in a different mode.
<Additional notes>
Note that other aspects different from this aspect are listed below, but it is possible to implement the present invention without being limited to these in any way.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
In normal gaming mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is changed to the first pending image immediately before the start of the variable display. It is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image when the image display mode is the second display mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is the first pending image immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is more likely to become the specific display mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is changed to the first pending display mode immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is easier to become a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image changes to the first pending number immediately before the start of the variable display. It is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved number image when the image is in a specific display mode,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the specific display mode will be used as the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image is determined by the variable display. It is the same as the probability that the specific display mode will be the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the special display mode will be used as the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image is determined by the variable display. It is the same as the probability that the special display mode will be used as the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first performance symbols in the normal gaming state is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the second performance symbols in the normal gaming state. It's a pachinko machine.

According to the Pachinko game machine according to this aspect, it is possible to improve the method of controlling image display corresponding to the game situation.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of electric accessory drive determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is an example of a decorative pattern production table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an example of a decorative pattern presentation table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an example of a decorative pattern presentation table on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an example of a decorative pattern production table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the determination of loading and stopping symbols on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is an image diagram of the display mode of decorative symbols on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is an example of a decorative pattern production table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an example of a decorative pattern production table on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the first decorative pattern display control process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram related to the configuration of the effect display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to modification example 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is an image diagram of transparent effect execution in the pachinko gaming machine according to modification example 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the second main game winning time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the pre-read pending content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol reservation content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the advance notice production/drawing stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of decorative pattern display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the first main game preview performance/drawing stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the second main game preview performance/drawing stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the hold display mode change control process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is an image diagram of a pending change in a specific notice performance on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the pending consumption transmission image display process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is an image diagram illustrating a change in the holding and digesting transmission image on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the first drawing content determination process during time saving on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the time-saving decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of right hit instruction display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image diagram of the display mode and display position of decorative symbols in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area in the Pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is an image diagram of the variable display period of decorative symbols in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an image diagram of decorative patterns used in the Pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is an image diagram of a stop display mode of decorative symbols in the Pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an example of display priorities in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an image diagram of priorities in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 87 is an image diagram of changes in the hold display in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 88 is an image diagram of the hold display for each gaming state in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an image diagram of erasing the hold display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a front view of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an operational view of the distribution member unit of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of symbol standby display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of a decorative pattern display mode in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of reservation change display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 101 is an image diagram of a hold occurrence display in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of the pending and extinguished display in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 103 is an image diagram of a hold passing route in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the second main game winning time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of performance content determination processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a first decorative symbol presentation content determination table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a second decorative pattern presentation content determination table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of a pre-reading display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the first decorative pattern display control process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the second decorative pattern display control process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of the stop symbol display at the time of jackpot in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 116 is an image diagram of interrupt performance execution in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of accessory drive control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern content determination process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a first decorative symbol presentation content determination table on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a screen display during fluctuation standby in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a screen display for volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a screen display during normal fluctuation in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a screen display during SP reach in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing the transition of updating the hold display in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect (hold change effect) and the probability that the first decorative pattern will be in a predetermined display mode in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of reservations and the probability that the first decorative pattern will be in a predetermined display mode in the Pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the final display mode in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the playing warning display (left-handed hitting warning display, right-handed hitting warning display) in the Pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability that a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the relationship between the probability that a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed during a look-ahead effect display and the probability that a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed during a trigger fluctuation, in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between a power outage (RAM is not cleared) and decorative symbols after power outage recovery in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the relationship between the power off (RAM clear) and the decorative symbols after the power off and recovery in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the relationship between the reach voice and the probability that a pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in a full rotation performance in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing how the decorative symbols change for each stage in the Pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the display contents of decorative symbols during fluctuation in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern when re-variation is executed in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a specific symbol is displayed to create a super reach effect in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 145 is an image diagram illustrating a display transition when development symbols are displayed in accordance with the preview type and a super reach effect is achieved in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 146 is an image diagram illustrating a display transition when a super reach effect occurs when different display modes of the same notice type are performed in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a different look-ahead effect is performed and a super reach effect is achieved in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition when different display modes of the same pre-read effect type are performed to become a super reach effect in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the same super reach effect develops through different displays in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment progresses to the super reach effect via the button effect. FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super reach performance is performed in a different performance stage in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing a display transition when re-variation is executed in a different performance stage in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a pseudo consecutive symbol and a specific symbol are displayed and a super reach effect is executed in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 154 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a pseudo consecutive symbol and a specific symbol are displayed and a super reach effect is executed in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the first decorative patterns are displayed in an overlapping manner in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation speed of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.

Form for implementation

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be explained. "Entering a ball" includes not only entering a prize where a prize ball is paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" where a prize ball is not paid out. "Open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" mean, for example, in the configuration of a general big winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It becomes an easy state. In addition, for example, a state in which it protrudes from the game board (on the player's side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the advancing state) and a state in which it retracts into the game board (on the side opposite to the player's side) (hereinafter referred to as the retracted state) In a configuration (so-called vero type attacker) in which the player can take the above-mentioned configuration, the advancing state = the winning state is easy, and the withdrawal state = the winning state is not easy. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (electronic computer lottery) to determine some kind of game content in pachinko gaming machines, and includes not only random numbers in a narrow sense but also pseudo-random numbers (for example, as a random number, a hard Random numbers, pseudo-random numbers (soft random numbers). For example, it determines the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically the "winning random number (random number for win/fail lottery)" related to the transition to the special game, and the fluctuation mode (or fluctuation time) of the identification symbol. ``Fluctuating pattern determining random number'' to determine the stopping pattern, ``symbol determining random number'' to determine the stopping pattern, and ``winning pattern determining random number'' to determine whether to move to a specific game (for example, a probability variable game) after the special game. be able to. Note that when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the confirmed identification information, etc., it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers, and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Furthermore, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be expressed as a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once the number of random numbers is displayed in the form of a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, it is The random number obtained by the ball entering is called one random number (that is, in the above example, the bundle of random numbers of winning random number + fluctuation mode determining random number + symbol determining random number... is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another type of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). "Game state" refers to, for example, a special game state in which the big prize opening can be in an open state, a non-probability fluctuating game state in which the lottery probability of transition to the special game state is a predetermined value, and a transition to the special game state. A variable probability game state where the lottery probability is high, and an auxiliary game state where there is assistance for winning at the starting port that triggers the transition to a special game (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port) In some cases, the variable member opening period is long, the variable member opening winning probability is high, the variable member opening lottery result notification time is short, etc., or any combination of one or more of the following. "Fluctuating display suspension time" is the time for which identification information is held in a stopped state when the fluctuating display of identification information is stopped.If there is a hold remaining after the fluctuating display stops, this fluctuating display suspension time is After the period has elapsed, the fluctuation related to the remaining suspension is started (the fluctuation start condition and the validity judgment permission condition are satisfied). The "design for performance" is a type of display image called a so-called decorative design or decorative design, and is typically an image object such as a card type with numbers, symbols, etc. written on it. Then, by finally stopping and displaying the image objects with the same combination of numbers and symbols on the active line, it is announced that a jackpot has occurred. The "first performance design" and the "second performance design" are both "designs for performance", but each is configured to be able to independently notify the occurrence of a jackpot. corresponds to (for example, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a jackpot when the "first presentation symbol" becomes "777", and it is possible to notify the occurrence of a jackpot when the "second presentation symbol" becomes "777") ). "Variation mode" includes, for example, the variation time (including the variation time of special symbols, the variation time of production symbols, and the variation time of normal symbols), the scrolling display of decorative symbols, and the fact that decorative symbols are displayed on the spot. This includes rotating (these are sometimes referred to as "switching display modes"). "Temporarily stopping (or temporarily stopping) the production design/not" is synonymous with "temporarily stopping → changing again" as one set, and performing/not performing this one set. be. "Re-fluctuation" refers to situations such as "temporarily stopping the production design → re-fluctuation", situations such as "starting fluctuation → temporarily stopping the production design", and situations such as "starting re-fluctuation → production design It is a term that includes situations such as "temporarily stopping the performance symbol (temporary stop from the second time onwards)", and includes situations such as "pseudo fluctuation in a pseudo continuous performance" and "resurrection fluctuation in a resurrection performance (temporarily stopping the performance symbol at a losing symbol"). After that, the winning symbol is displayed and the game stops). It is also synonymous with excluding the final stop display timing (typically, after that, the stop display is definitively performed together with the stop display of a so-called special symbol) to notify whether or not a jackpot has occurred. In addition, the "design for production" is based on the first element (for example, numbers), and the second element (for example, color) and third element (presence/content of additional information such as characters and "SUPER"), etc. It may also be configured as an accessory. Moreover, when the production mode is different, the "design for production" may be configured such that the first element is the same, but the second element and/or the third element are different. In addition, due to the difference in the second and/or third elements, the expectation that the reach fluctuation will be a jackpot, and the expectation that the symbol fluctuation related to the look-ahead effect will be a jackpot when a specific symbol combination is stopped when executing a look-ahead effect. It may be configured such that the profit rate for the player is different depending on the number of rounds when a jackpot is achieved or the gaming state after the jackpot ends. In addition, in such a configuration, the second element and/or the third element is more difficult for the player to play in the probability-changing gaming state, the time-reducing gaming state, etc. than in the normal gaming state. It may be configured so that it becomes an advantageous element for. In addition, the "information display section" is something that displays information including preview performances, etc., and is, for example, a performance display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and may indicate each of these alone. However, it may also indicate a combination (the entire unit) of a plurality of display media such as an effect display device + 7 segment LED + LED lamp. In addition, the "effect display section" is for displaying effects including preview effects, etc., and is, for example, a effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and may indicate each of these alone. However, it may also indicate a combination (the entire unit) of a plurality of display media such as a production display device + 7 segment LED + LED lamp.

The following embodiment is a model (first type, first type multifunction machine) in which two conventional first type pachinko game machines are mixed together. However, this is not limited to this in any way, and applications to other gaming machines (for example, conventional 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and general pachinko machines) are also within the scope. . Note that this embodiment is just an example, and regarding the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off flags, the name of the means responsible for processing each step, etc. The present invention is not limited to the following embodiments. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be construed as being applied to specific things, and may be combined in any manner. For example, modifications of one embodiment should be understood as modifications of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that combinations of one variation with another variation are also described. Further, in this embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table among the various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table, or vice versa.

Here, prior to detailed description of the present invention, a brief configuration according to the present invention will be explained.

In the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, two types of decorative patterns, a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern, are provided, and when the first decorative pattern is hidden or difficult to see, the second decorative pattern is displayed. A configuration for displaying symbols (variable display) will be described in detail in this embodiment.

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (the present embodiment), special symbols and specific numbers (numbers consisting only of numbers) are displayed at the temporary stop timing of the middle row when pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed. A configuration modified to allow temporary stop will be described in detail in (Example 1 of modification from this embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (the present embodiment), at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the later the temporary stop timing becomes {or the number of pseudo continuous changes within the fluctuation (Modification Example 2 from the Present Embodiment) will be described in detail in (Modification Example 2 from the Present Embodiment), which is modified so that the number of stopping modes in which temporary stopping increases (the number of temporary stops in the middle row) increases.

The pachinko game machine according to the present invention is configured to be able to execute a transparent effect in which the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG becomes transparent and the role objects in the effect display device SG are visible, and during the execution of the transparent effect. A configuration in which the effect display on the second decorative pattern display device is executed even when the first decorative pattern is hidden will be described in detail in (modification example 3 from the present embodiment).

The pachinko game machine according to the present invention has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern as decorative patterns, and is configured to be able to perform a pre-reading effect, and the special symbol is a final change of the pre-reading effect (trigger pending). A configuration that can be stopped as a fixed stop symbol of a variation related to the variation) and a pseudo continuous symbol of a pseudo continuous variation will be described in detail in (second embodiment).

In the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, from the configuration of the second embodiment, when a hold change performance (a performance in which the hold display form changes) based on a win in the pre-read lottery is executed, the hold display mode changes to a specific hold display mode. A configuration modified to provide a preview effect that is executed only when the user agrees to the event will be described in detail in (Modification Example 1 from the Second Embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the (second embodiment), the appearance rate of special symbols (pre-read lottery winning rate and angel zone A configuration in which the transition lottery winning rate) is changed to be different will be described in detail in (Example 2 of modification from the second embodiment).

In the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, in the time reduction game state, one variation time of the first decorative symbol can become a time value equivalent to multiple variation times of the second decorative symbol (or main game symbol). The configuration will be explained in detail in (third embodiment).

Various configurations regarding the display mode, display position, display area, priority, etc. of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern that can be applied to the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail in (Fourth Embodiment). explain.

The Pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention has a configuration in which displays corresponding to two holds, a first hold display and a second hold display, are displayed on the effect display device (Modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment). ) will be explained in detail.

Among the Pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, it is possible to execute a parallel lottery, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuations in the first main game symbol are used as the first decorative symbols, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuations in the second main game symbol are used as the decorative symbols. A configuration with two decorative patterns will be described in detail in (fifth embodiment).

Among the Pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, a configuration in which the configuration regarding the area where the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed is changed from the configuration of the (fifth embodiment) is changed from the configuration of the (fifth embodiment). This will be explained in detail in Example 1).

A configuration applicable to the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained in detail in (Sixth Embodiment).

(This embodiment)

Here, before explaining each component, the characteristics (outline) of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines mainly consist of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. These will be explained in order below.

First, the gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball tray D20, a lower ball tray D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at the position where it is to be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing game balls, a mechanism for removably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like, and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, feeding the game balls to the firing rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, and sound effects corresponding to the gaming status are outputted.

Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In the gaming area D30, in addition to mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning holes, there are a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, an auxiliary game starting port H10, 1st big winning hole C10, 2nd big winning hole C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H
20, a center decoration D38 and an outlet D36 are installed. Each element will be explained in detail below.

Next, the first main game starting opening A10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting port A10 includes a first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game starting port A10, and indicates the entry of the ball when the ball enters the first main game starting port. Generate ball entry information.

Next, the second main game starting opening B10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting opening B10 includes a second main game starting opening ball entry detection device B11s and a second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game starting port entry ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second main game starting port B10, and indicates the entry of the ball when the ball enters the second main game starting port B11s. Generate ball entry information. Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is variable between a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second main game starting port B10 and an open state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the second main game starting port B10 than in the normal state.

Here, in this embodiment, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged to overlap, and due to the existence of the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10 is The upper part of the game starting port B10 is closed. Furthermore, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are connected to the first main game starting port A10. and is configured to be guided to the second main game starting port B10.

In this embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game starting port B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory may be provided on the first main game starting port A10 side. It's okay. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged to overlap vertically, but the invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 may be arranged apart from each other. In such a configuration, a member may be provided to close the upper part of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. In addition, while the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10, The game ball flowing down on the right side (with reference to the center of the gaming area) may be configured so that it is difficult to be guided to the first main game starting port A10, but is easily guided to the second main game starting port B10. It should be noted that "easy to be guided" and "hard to be guided" are determined, for example, by the size of the number of balls that enter the ball when 10,000 game balls are fired to the right and left sides respectively.

Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 includes an auxiliary game starting port entrance ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game starting port entry ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10, and generates auxiliary game starting port entry ball information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters the auxiliary game starting port H10. do. In addition, the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 becomes an opportunity for a lottery to expand the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game starting port H10 is such that a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided, and a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is easily guided. It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided. (However, it is not limited to this, and it is configured so that the game ball flowing down the left side of the gaming area D30 (based on the center of the gaming area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10. (For example, auxiliary game starting ports H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30, respectively)}.

Next, on the upper right side of the out port D36, a first big winning hole C10 and a second big winning hole C20 are arranged so as to overlap, and flow down the right side of the gaming area D30 (based on the center of the gaming area). The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20 are arranged before reaching the out hole D36.

Next, the first big winning hole C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that becomes open when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at a jackpot symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located at the upper right side of the out opening D36 and below the second big winning opening C20. As a specific configuration, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize winning opening detection device C11s) and a mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first big winning hole winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole C10, and the first big winning hole entering ball information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters the first big winning hole C11s. generate. The first big winning hole electric accessory C11d changes the first big winning hole C10 between a normal state in which it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first big winning hole C10 and an open state in which it is easy for game balls to win. 1st prize opening solenoid C13 is excited and variable). In addition, in this embodiment, the aspect of the big prize opening is made into a horizontal rectangular shape and is made to be variable between a normal state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to win. is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which the rod-shaped member provided in the grand prize opening can take an advanced state in which it protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted from the player side (so-called It is also possible to use a tongue type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning hole C20 has a horizontal rectangular shape that becomes open when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at a jackpot symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located on the upper right side of the opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize winning opening detection device C21s) and a mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second grand prize opening C20, and the second grand prize opening ball entry information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters the second grand prize opening C20. generate. The game ball that enters the second big winning hole C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning hole winning detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d operates the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening C20 and in an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the prize. Make it variable. In addition, in this embodiment, the aspect of the big prize opening is made into a horizontal rectangular shape and is made to be variable between a normal state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to win. is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which the rod-shaped member provided in the grand prize opening can take an advanced state in which it protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted from the player side (so-called It is also possible to use a tongue type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is connected to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). This is a device that executes the displayed information, etc. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) has a first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g), and a first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g). It includes a symbol retention display section A21h (second main game symbol retention display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol reservation display section A21h (second main game symbol reservation display section B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lit lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". '' and ``-'' to indicate a loss. It is preferable to display the information using a symbol or the like. In addition, the display of the number of pending items is not limited to four lamps, but can display a maximum of four pending items (for example, if the number of pending items is composed of one lamp, Number 1: On, number 2 on hold: Flashing at low speed, Number on hold 3: Flashing at medium speed, Number 4 on hold: Flashing at high speed.

In addition, since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a performance role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) The size of the image is set to an inconspicuous level. However, a method is adopted in which the first main game pattern (second main game pattern) itself has a dramatic role and the decorative pattern on the first main game side (decorative pattern on the second main game side) is not displayed. In this case, the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as an effect display device SG to be described later.

Next, the performance display device SG displays a performance image including decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols) that fluctuate and stop in conjunction with the first and second main game symbols. It is a device that does Here, as a specific configuration, the performance display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which a performance including a fluctuating display of decorative symbols and the like is executed. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first reservation display section SG12 (and a second reservation display section SG13) that displays main game reservation information, and a plurality of rows of decorative patterns (first decorations) imitating slot machine games, for example. It has a decorative pattern display area SG11 that displays a moving image of variation (design and second decorative pattern). Although the effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in this embodiment, it may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first reservation display section SG12 (and the second reservation display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the reservation lamp of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that performs display regarding auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display section H21g and an auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lit lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations suspended (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a passage for the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays the role of effect by blinking or the like.

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine, and in particular controls the overall game operation (i.e., the lottery when a ball enters the first main game start port A10 (second main game start port B10)). a main control board M that performs control directly related to the interests of players), and a performance control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control related to various performances on the performance display device SG that adds interest to game content. SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly executes the performance display, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and an upper ball tray D20 for supplying game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT in response to winnings to each prize opening. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 etc., a prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (storage ball) in the upper ball tray D20. A firing device D42 that fires balls one by one into the area D30, a firing control board D40 that controls the firing operation of the firing device D42, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the Pachinko gaming machine, and a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the Pachinko gaming machine. A power switch Ea, which is an on/off switch, is provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the gaming side).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 3. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, and a payout of game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH and the main control board M to be controlled, the effect display device SG changes or stops the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern). A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are integrated into one board (located above) and a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including these control boards. Here, the sub-control board S controls various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation and stop of decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols), sounds from the speaker D24, and lighting of the game effect lamp D26. , a sub-main control unit SM that controls error notification, and a display process such as a variable display, a stop display, a hold display, a notice display, etc. of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) on the performance display device SG. It is provided with two control units, a sub-sub control unit SS for execution. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various calculation processes, a ROM that stores in advance a program that specifies the calculation processes of the CPU, and a CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores data handled by the game (various data generated during gaming, computer programs read from ROM, etc.). Although not particularly shown in the drawings, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so that no unused area is provided in order to prevent programs, etc. that have been modified by unauthorized acts from being written. This is suitable (for example, filling unused areas with all 0s, writing used areas to smaller addresses, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent data that is not normally referenced from being referenced due to noise or fraudulent activity, unused data (for example, data that is referenced in gaming machines with different specifications, or data that is used only for testing during the development stage) It is preferable to configure the system so that no data is provided. Similarly, when using the RAM area, it is preferable to use the area at a lower address and to avoid creating an unused program area. The schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection between each board and device will be outlined below.

First, the main control board M includes the winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game starting opening ball entering detection device A11s, second main game starting opening ball entering detection device B11s, auxiliary game starting opening ball entering detection device H11s, 1st prize opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device (not shown, but a general winning opening is an opening where there is a prize ball but no symbol lottery is performed) )}, drive solenoids (not shown) (the first big winning hole solenoid C13, second big winning hole solenoid C23, etc. mentioned above), information display LED (not shown), etc., input/output that are essential for the progress of the game. It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub-control board S (sub-main control unit SM/sub-sub control unit SS), and controls the prize ball payout based on the progress of the game. It is configured to be able to transmit information (commands) regarding the prize ball payout control board KH, etc., and information (commands) regarding the performance/game progress, etc. to the sub-control board S, respectively. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC etc. via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC through the external connection terminal. The system is configured so that game-related information can be output from the player to an external device.

In addition, in this embodiment, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used as the communication method). Note that communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a request for loaning game balls and sends the prize ball payout control board KH to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R that transmits the information. Although not shown in the drawings, in this embodiment, a control circuit for the firing device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the firing device (launching handle, firing motor, ball feeding device) etc.) are also connected. In this embodiment, the game ball lending device R is provided as a separate device adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. Control and management control of recording media for lending electronic money etc. may be performed in an integrated manner.

Next, the sub-control board S includes the performance display device SG for displaying decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) etc. as described above, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other performance devices. It is connected to a drive device (not shown). In this embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control board S has a sub-main control section SM and a sub-sub-control section SS, and the sub-main control section SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( The lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and the display control (substantive display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is composed of In this embodiment, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub control section SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (they may be configured as separate boards). (However, by configuring it in an integrated manner, there are advantages such as space advantage and the ability to reduce the situation where noise gets mixed in with wiring, etc.). Further, the division of work between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, by having the sub-sub control unit SS perform audio control (suitable when a VDP with an integrated audio control circuit is adopted). Moreover, electronic value may be provided as the prize ball without providing a physical prize ball.

Next, various functions of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 4. First, the main control board M includes game peripherals related to games (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the production is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M, so that information can be transmitted. ing. In addition, the sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control section SS (effect display means SS) that executes image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, etc. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE that includes a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. In addition, the main control board M, sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM), sub-sub control section SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It is composed of elements such as ROM and RAM used for processing, and a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In addition, each means included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in peripheral equipment (for example, gaming peripheral equipment) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each of the above means (devices) will be explained below.

First, the main control board M includes a game information control means MJ that controls the acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN that determines the content of the game, and a game progress such as a special game or a specific game. the current and past game states [for example, states related to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability fluctuation game state, time reduction game state), special game state], and states related to the auxiliary game. (easy release state, non-easy release state), stop symbols and fluctuation mode information related to main game symbols and auxiliary game symbols, on/off status of various flags, game status during special games (for example, number of rounds and number of winnings information) ] etc., a game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing
Various game information {for example, stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol {for example, 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss}, information regarding fluctuation mode (for example, fluctuation time), start of special game on the game peripheral device side an information transmission control means MT (and a command transmission buffer MT10 for accumulating unsent commands) for transmitting signals, status information, end signals, pending information, etc.; The prize ball payout determining means MH controls the prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out the prize balls.

Here, the game information control means MJ includes a ball entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls into each ball entry port (starting port, etc.), and determines whether or not each random number can be obtained, and determines the determination result. A random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and a holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing balls entering each starting port during a variable display as held balls within the upper limit number. are doing. In addition, the game proceeding means MP directly controls the display control means MP10 for controlling the variation and stop display of each symbol, and the opening/closing decision of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10. A second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, a special game control means MP30 for controlling special games that are more advantageous to the player than normal games, and a first main Concerning the game, the second main game, and the auxiliary game, it has a specific game control means MP50 for determining to which game state the current game state should be transferred, and for performing processing for transferring the game state based on the determination. are doing. Each means will be explained in detail below.

First, the ball entry determining means MJ10 includes a first main game starting port entering ball determining means MJ11-A that determines whether a game ball has entered the first main game starting port A10, and a second main game starting port A10. A second main game starting port entry determining means MJ11-B that determines whether a game ball has entered B10, and an auxiliary game starting port that determines whether a game ball has entered the auxiliary game starting port H10. Ball entry determination means MJ11-H, first grand prize opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10, which determines whether a game ball has entered the first grand prize opening C10, and second grand prize opening C20. It has a second grand prize opening ball entry determining means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered.

Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game starting port A10, and also A first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A that obtains random numbers (for example, a first winning random number, a first variation pattern determining random number, a first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and a second main game starting port B10. It is determined whether or not to obtain the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main game side random number, etc.) is determined according to the judgment result. a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B that acquires a random number for game design determination, etc.; and an auxiliary game that determines whether or not a selected random number can be acquired on the auxiliary game side and acquires the random number based on the determination result. It has random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H.

Here, "random numbers" in the claims and this specification, including the above, are, for example, "0" to "65535" or " This value is randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "0" to "255." Further, the random number does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudorandom number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method for each value in a random number is one in which values are expressed sequentially along the sequence of random numbers (plus-one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed. ) is determined by a random value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like. By obtaining random numbers in this manner, it is possible to generate non-periodic random numbers that are difficult for players to predict. On the contrary, for example, in the case of a method of generating the next random number using the random numbers used in a certain lottery, it becomes easy to predict the next random number. Therefore, when generating random numbers, it is preferable to generate new random numbers without using the random numbers used in the previous lottery.

Next, the suspension control means MJ30 connects the suspension expulsion control means MJ31, which controls processing related to suspension expiration and fluctuation start, and the first main game side random number obtained in the situation where the first main game symbol fluctuation permission has not been granted. A first main game symbol retention means MJ32 for determining whether or not to temporarily store the random number, and retaining the random number in the first main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until symbol variation permission is granted based on the determination result. -A and determines whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number obtained in a situation where permission to change the second main game symbol has not been granted, and based on the determination result, permission to change the symbol is granted for the random number. The second main game pattern holding means MJ32-B for holding the second main game pattern holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the second main game pattern holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game side random number obtained in the situation where the permission for changing the auxiliary game symbols has not been granted are temporarily stored. auxiliary game symbol retention means MJ32-H for determining whether to store or not and retaining the random number in the auxiliary game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until symbol variation permission is granted based on the determination result; have.

Here, the hold/extinguish control means MJ31 has a fluctuation start condition sufficiency determination means MJ31j that determines whether or not the conditions for starting fluctuation are satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol retention means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol retention means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol retention means MJ32-H combine the random numbers, which can be stored up to four, with the retention order. A first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, a second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and an auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporarily storing the information in the form have.

Next, the game content determining means MN includes a winning/failure drawing means MN10 which draws a drawing to determine whether the special game is correct or not and whether or not the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d can be opened. special game transition determining means MN20 for determining the transition (for example, turning on the winning flag internally), symbol content determining means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number. It has a variation mode determining means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol based on the above. Here, the win/fail lottery means MN10 includes a first main game win/fail lottery means MN11-A which performs a win/fail lottery regarding the first main game symbol, and a second main game win/fail lottery means which performs a win/fail lottery regarding the second main game symbol. It has an MN11-B and an auxiliary game winning/failure lottery means MN11-H for performing a winning/failure lottery regarding auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game win/fail lottery means MN11-A, the second main game win/fail lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game win/fail lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing the win/fail lottery regarding the first main game symbols. the first main game lottery table MN11ta-A, the second main game lottery table MN11ta-B that is referred to when performing the lottery for the second main game symbols, and the lottery table for the auxiliary game symbols. Each of the games has a winning/failing lottery table MN11ta-H for auxiliary games that is referred to when performing the game. Note that an example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

Here, when executing a win/fail lottery based on the main game random number, the win/fail lottery means MN10 determines whether the main game random number is the same value as any of all the winning random numbers, or If some or all of the random numbers are consecutive numbers, a win/fail judgment is performed by determining whether the main game random number is less than or equal to the upper limit of the winning random number and greater than or equal to the lower limit. . By performing such a validity determination, accurate determination processing can be performed. Conversely, when performing a win/fail judgment by comparing only the upper limit of the winning random number range or comparing only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, if the random number range is 0 to 1023, 0 or 1023) as a random value, it becomes vulnerable to fraud (for example, a fraudulent act of flowing current to the main control board M, which tends to cause all bits in the storage area to become 0 or 1). There is a risk of it getting lost. In addition, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery. {If multiple random numbers are used for one lottery (so-called two-stage lottery) Because it is necessary to prevent the synchronization of

Next, the symbol content determining means MN40 includes a first main game symbol determining means MN41-A that determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determining random number (first main game random number); The second main game symbol determining means MN41-B determines the stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the game content determining random number (second main game random number) obtained, and the auxiliary game symbol is determined based on the obtained auxiliary game symbol winning random number. and auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stopping symbols.

Here, the first main game symbol determining means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determining lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining the stop symbols related to the first main game symbol. The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning/failure results and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game for normal game state). Lottery table, probability variable game → first main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). In addition, the second main game symbol determining means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining the stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning/failure result and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game state lottery table, probability variable game → second main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). Note that an example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol. The table MN41ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variable game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the variation mode determining means MN50 is a first main game variation mode determining means that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determining random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, and a second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determining random number (second main game random number); It has an auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbols based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random numbers.

Here, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode is equipped with various lottery tables that differ depending on the win/fail result and the gaming state (for example, regarding the gaming state, normal game → first main game normal Lottery table for game state, probability variable game → first main game, lottery table for probability variable game state, time reduction game → lottery table for first main game time reduction game state). Further, the second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. , the second main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-B is equipped with various lottery tables that differ depending on the win/fail result and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game state lottery table, probability variable game → second main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). Note that an example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H has a lottery table MN51ta-H for auxiliary game variation mode determination, which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode is The deciding lottery table MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variable game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the display control means MP10 displays the images on the first main game symbol display section A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display section B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined period of time. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, which performs control to stop and display the first main game symbol after changing it, and the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 provide assistance for a predetermined time. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H that performs control to stop and display the game symbols after changing them.

Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C have first and second main game symbol variation management timers MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H that can measure time.

Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B determines whether the conditions for opening and closing the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d are satisfied. the second main game starting opening electric accessory opening/closing condition determining means MP21-B, and the second main game starting opening electric accessory opening timer MP22t that measures the drive (opening) time of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d. -B.

Next, the special game control means MP30 includes a condition determining means MP31 that determines whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the special game are satisfied, and if the conditions for transitioning to the special game are satisfied, the contents of the special game. (Specifically, a special game content determining means MP32 that determines the big prize opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) and sets it in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big prize. A special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (jackpot) in which the opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is opened under predetermined conditions, and time management for various processing related to the special game (for example, the first big winning opening C10 and the opening/closing time of the second big prize opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 includes first and second big prize opening electric accessory opening/closing control means MP33-C that opens and closes the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d. , has a winning ball counter MP33c that measures winning balls into the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t that manages round time. Further, the special game content determining means MP32 further includes a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. (details not shown).

Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether the end conditions of the probability variable game state are satisfied or not, and the probability variable game end condition determination means MP51 which determines whether the end conditions of the time reduction game state are satisfied or not. It has a time-saving game end condition determining means MP52 for determining. Here, the time saving game end condition determining means MP52 includes a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the number of time saving times. Here, the term "specific game" refers to, for example, a probability variable game where the lottery probability for a special game is higher than in a normal game, or a time-reduced game in which the main game symbol variation time is relatively shorter than in a normal game. Point.

Here, in this embodiment, during the time reduction game, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction function). Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbols is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in this embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times (a probability fluctuation game with no limit on the number of time reductions). except for). That is, the time saving number is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol change (stop). In addition, the above-mentioned probability variable game ending condition determining means MP51 and time-saving game ending condition determining means MP52, for example, determine the transition lottery from a specific game (for example, a probability-changing game or a time-saving game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time a symbol changes. (in the case of a so-called pachinko gaming machine having a falling lottery function). In addition, the time reduction gaming state according to this example may be that the main game time reduction flag is on, or may be that the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, that is, the time reduction gaming state. may indicate that the opening time extension function is activated, and a non-time reduction gaming state may indicate that the opening time extension function is not activated. Incidentally, the time reduction gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time reduction gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Further, the probability variable gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability varying gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB stores the first main game (a game from the fluctuation of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the fluctuation of the second main game symbol to the stop). first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game); and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. H, and special game related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game status in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, on/off of various flags related to the special game, etc.) MB20b, and a specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current game status of the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time savers, on/off of various flags related to the specific game, etc.). .

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C stores the stop related to the first or second main game symbol that is currently fluctuating (the first or second main game symbol for which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H is a auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage for temporarily storing information such as stop symbols related to the auxiliary game symbols that are currently changing (auxiliary game symbols for which the fluctuation start condition has been satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

Next, gaming peripherals will be explained. Note that since the detailed configurations of some of the peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly explained. First, the game peripherals include a first main game peripheral device A, which is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B, which is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a second main game peripheral device B, which is a peripheral device on the second main game side. and a first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, an auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, a sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, and a sub-sub control unit. SS (and effect display device SG), etc. Here, the performance controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is a decorative pattern (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) that is temporally synchronized with fluctuations in the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern. This relates to displaying only information that does not affect the outcome of the game, including changes in symbols (symbols). Below, these peripheral devices will be explained in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game starting port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can stop and display the first main game symbol. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B includes a second main game starting port B10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display the second main game symbols in a static and variable manner. It has .

Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is the first big prize opening C10 which is in a closed state during a normal game and is opened under predetermined conditions during a special game (jackpot). and a second grand prize opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H operates the auxiliary game starting port H10, which is the trigger for opening the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10, and the stop display and variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 that is capable of.

Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM includes a display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, and a process of determining the effect contents and display control processing related to the effect display. and an information transmission/reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission and reception with the sub-sub control section SS side. Each of the above means will be explained in detail below.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information regarding the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

Next, the performance display control means SM20 is connected to a decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the variation mode of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the determination process of the stop symbol, and the display control process; 1 decorative pattern and 2nd decorative pattern), a drawing reservation information display control means SM22 that manages the number of reservations and a reservation display process, a background effect display control means SM23 that manages a background image determination process and a display control process, and a preview effect. It has a preview effect display control means SM24 that controls content determination processing and display control processing, and a ready-to-win effect display control means SM25 that controls ready-to-win effect content determination processing and display control processing.

Here, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 displays a decorative pattern (in this embodiment, two types of decorative patterns (hereinafter referred to as a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern) based on information from the main control board M side). ), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are each independent, and the game is played by combining three numerical patterns of the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern. The drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbols and variation modes of } that can notify the results, and various information (variation modes) related to the symbol variations of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). a drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing information, stop pattern information, various flags, etc.); It has a diagrammatic variation time management timer SM21t-1. Here, the design display content determining means SM21n is a lottery (reference) table for determining the design variation content that is referred to when determining the stop symbols and variation modes of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). SM21ta (details of the table are not shown) and decorations that are referenced when determining (or setting) the production contents, display update timing, and display update contents of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). It further includes a symbol presentation table SM21ta-2. It should be noted that both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are each independently controlled to be displayed on the effect display control means (sub-main control section) SM side based on information from the main control board M side. By making good use of these two types of decorative patterns, the game is designed to increase the interest of the performance and make it easier to understand the progress of the game, but this point will be discussed later. do.

Next, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 has a drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information regarding reservations related to decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols). .

Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores information related to the background effect display and a background effect display content determining means SM23n that determines the display contents of the background effect based on information from the main control board M side. background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b.

Next, the preview effect display control means SM24 includes a preview effect display content determining means SM24n that determines the display contents and display timing of the preview effect based on information from the main control board M side, and information related to the preview effect display. It has a preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b for temporarily storing the information.

Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 includes a reach effect display content determining means SM25n that determines the display content and display timing of the reach effect based on information from the main control board M side, and information related to the reach effect display. It has a ready-to-reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing.

In addition, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS includes a sub-information transmission/reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission and reception with the sub-main control unit SM side, and an image display that displays images in the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. It has a control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control section SM side and information regarding various image displays.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control section) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays images related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control section) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying images.

Here, the display area SG10 includes a decorative pattern display area SG11 for variably displaying decorative patterns (a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern), and a first hold display area SG12 (and a first hold display area SG12 for displaying main game hold information). 2 pending display section SG13).

In addition, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so that information can be transmitted, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control section ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control section) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control device. It means that it is controlled by means (sub-main control section) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

From here, an example of a general process flow in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be explained using a flowchart. Flowcharts are mainly composed of processing steps (represented by rectangles), judgments (represented by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals indicating start, end, return, etc. (represented by rounded rectangles). . In addition, when the details of a processing step are illustrated in another flowchart, those that refer to the other flowchart are illustrated as subroutines (illustrated by a rectangle with double lines on the left and right). . At the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are sometimes developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( The configuration is such that no subroutines (subroutines that are not normally used) are left behind, and processes related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed are prevented from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the gaming machine is powered on, the process shown in FIG. 2(a) is executed. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine and performing initial settings (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M loads the RAM.
Check the input port of the clear button and check whether the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E has been operated or not. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side (for example, information in the gaming state temporary storage means MB, etc.). Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM (even if it is not transmitted at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted in a control command transmission process to be described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power outage and the contents saved in the RAM area). comparison with the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether the contents of the RAM are not normal (whether information at the time of power outage is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process moves to step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M saves the data stored (backed up) in the RAM in the main control board M in the event of a power outage. Information commands are acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (they may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or the commands may be set at the relevant timing and the control commands described later) (It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), the process moves to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M receives a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt approximately every 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side as shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is assumed to be T) {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the process shown in FIG. . Note that after step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment process) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

In addition, it is preferable to configure the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM, etc.) mounted on the main control board M so that it does not become the value at which the special game is executed (immediately after the start of the program processing, noise or fraudulent activity may occur). (This is to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed in the event that the process for determining the execution of the special game is executed.)

Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. The main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 3(b) based on an interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the regular interrupt period T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt approximately every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessory drive determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes main game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process to be described later. Next, in step 1500, the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process that will be described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process to be described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (particularly the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning hole in which the game ball has won. (processing, etc. for causing the payout control board KH to execute and managing the results, etc.). Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes external signal output processing (information output to the external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (sends the command set in each of the above processes to the sub-main control unit side), and executes the control command transmission process immediately before executing the main interrupt process. Return to the previous process. Note that in the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received on the sub-main control unit SM side is important (for example, the process is executed normally by receiving one command and then another command). Therefore, the commands are configured to be transmitted in the order in which the main control board M side decides to transmit the commands (in the order in which the commands are set).

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be explained. As mentioned above, the main control board M is configured so that the power-off signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the power to the gaming machine is turned off, the process shown in FIG. be done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power-off information (eg, checksum) based on information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process related to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game starting opening ball entry determining means MJ11-H determines whether a game ball has entered (inflow, in the case of a gate, passing through) the auxiliary game starting opening H10. If Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and determines whether the number of reserved balls is not at the upper limit (for example, 4). Determine whether In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires the auxiliary game content determining random number (for example, the auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the held ball in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information as to how many pieces are on hold. is incremented by 1, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1200). Note that if the answer is No in step 1102 or step 1104, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1200).

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and determines that the electric accessory opening flag is off. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation flag is off. do. If Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and determines whether there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. . If Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines the game state on the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time shortening flag). At the same time, with reference to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H, a stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time shortening flag When is on, a winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sets the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the gaming state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time shortening flag). A predetermined time related to the variable time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H subtracts 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol, and then updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C and determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols has been reached. do. If Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and also acquires the acquired auxiliary symbol. The stop symbols of the game symbols are definitively displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a "win". If Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B controls the second main game starting port based on the game state of the auxiliary game (flag state of the auxiliary game time saving flag). The starting port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B is set to a predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, and 0.5 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off). seconds). Next, in step 1234, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game starting opening electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game starting opening electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, and determines the opening time of the electric accessory. It is determined whether the predetermined time has been reached. If Yes in step 1238, in steps 1240 and 1242, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, and temporarily enters the auxiliary game state. The electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1300).

Note that if the answer is No in step 1202, the process moves to step 1238, if the answer is No in step 1204, the process moves to step 1224, and if the answer is No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, or step 1238, the process proceeds to step 1238. The process moves to (processing in step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, the process moves to the next step immediately after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, but the process is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixing time of about 500 ms (for example, this process can be performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). achievable).

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process related to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game starting opening ball entering determination means MJ11-A receives the first main game starting opening ball entering ball information from the first main game starting opening ball entering detection device A11s of the first main game starting opening A10. is received. If Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the side) is not at the upper limit (for example, 4 balls). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A obtains the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determining random number, a winning/failure lottery random number for determining the win/fail, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning,
Three random numbers are obtained as fluctuation mode lottery random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means with different update cycles and random number ranges, and are successively acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol reservation means MJ32-A temporarily stores (reserves) the obtained first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the suspension control unit MJ30 stores a command transmission buffer for transmitting information indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired (first main game suspension generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. The command is set to MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to step 1312. Incidentally, if the result in step 1302 or step 1304 is No, the process also moves to step 1312.

Next, in step 1312, the second main game starting opening ball entering determination means MJ11-B detects the second main game starting opening ball entering ball detecting device B11s of the second main game starting opening B10. Determine whether information has been received. If Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the side) is not at the upper limit (for example, 4 balls). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the second main game content determining random number, three random numbers are acquired, which are a win/fail lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variable mode lottery random number, similarly to the first main game content determining means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning lottery random number for the first main game and the winning lottery random number for the second main game) acquisition range) are set to the same value. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol reservation means MJ32-B temporarily stores (reserves) the obtained second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1320, the suspension control means MJ30 uses a command transmission buffer for transmitting information indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired (second main game suspension generation command) to the sub-main control section SM. The control command is set to MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400). Note that even in the case of No in step 1312 or step 1314, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400).

In this embodiment, the information to the effect that a random number has been acquired is sent to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1310 and 1320, but the information on the random number and the main game symbol The pending number may also be transmitted, and these pieces of information can also be used as information indicating that a random number has been obtained.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the reservation extinguishment control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and confirms whether or not the second main game symbol is reserved. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400(1), the game content determining means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1500).

In this way, in this embodiment, if there is a reserved ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the existence of a reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game symbol) (even if the second main game symbol comes first), the second main game symbol is executed with priority, but is not limited to this (such as pending redemption based on the order of winnings, or simultaneous execution of both main game symbols). (It may also be configured to perform a parallel lottery in which the lottery is drawn simultaneously).

Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) related to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. In addition, this process is approximately the same process for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, so the first main game symbol side will be mainly explained, and the process for the second main game symbol side will be explained below. It is written in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the hold/extinguish control unit MJ31 determines whether a fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbols are not in fluctuation, and the main game symbols are on hold. Although not shown in this example, if a fixed variation time (time during which the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed after the main game symbol is displayed) is provided, during the fixed variation time, the variation start condition for the next variation is set. It may be configured so that it does not satisfy.

If Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the reservation extinguishment control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (the second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The temporarily stored first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation is read out, and the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game content determination random number) is read out. The symbol retention information is deleted from the temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and the remaining temporarily stored information is shifted (retention extinguishing process). Next, in step 1410-1, the win/fail lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, and Based on the first main game content determining random number (second main game content determining random number) (particularly the winning lottery random number), a main game symbol validity lottery is executed.

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the variable probability gaming state is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the jackpot in the non-probability varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this in any way. Further, in this embodiment, although a hit that cannot change the gaming state (a so-called small win) is not illustrated, it may be configured so that a small win occurs (a small win is won). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, for example, (1) the winning probability of the small winning is different between the first main game side and the second main game side, and the probability of winning the small winning is different on the first main game side than on the second main game side. (2) If you win a small win, the gaming state after the small win ends is the same as the gaming state before the start of the small win. (If you win a jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot ends may be different from the gaming state before the jackpot starts.) (3) The jackpot will be played between the first main game side and the second main game side. The probability of winning is the same for both, and the probability of winning increases by entering the probability variable gaming state, whereas the probability of winning for a small win is different between the first main game and the second main game. (4) As a stop symbol of the decorative symbol of the symbol variation won in the small hit, a "special symbol" (for example, ★ such as "2★2" and "3★9" (corresponding to "special symbols") can be stopped. A specific number that is a combination of numbers that are not aligned and has a certain regularity (for example, a regular number such as ``234'', a reverse number such as ``432'', or an odd number such as ``357'') (6) From the player's perspective, the jackpot (2R or more, the number of rounds is different) that is the same (or similar) opening mode (visibility) of the jackpot opening as (or similar) to the small jackpot. appears to be the same opening mode from the player's perspective (a small win is only one round, the big winning hole is opened multiple times in that one round, and a jackpot is the same number of openings as the multiple times) (Executed within a round)} (In such a configuration, it is preferable to stop displaying a combination of decorative symbols that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between a small hit and a jackpot.) 8) In the second decorative pattern, the "special pattern" dedicated to small wins does not stop (or sometimes does not stop); (9) A combination of decorative patterns that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a small hit or a jackpot. Even in a configuration where the player is stopped and displayed, the percentage of a small hit or a jackpot will vary depending on the type of combination of decorative symbols that are difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, if three are aligned, the probability of a jackpot after the jackpot is If a decorative pattern that is almost certain to shift to a variable gaming state is included in the stop symbols, the probability of a jackpot is higher than if it is not included.

Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determining means MN41-A (second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) selects the first main game symbol determining lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determining means MN41-B). With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), regarding the main game symbols based on the main game symbol validity lottery results and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, the symbol lottery random number). The symbols to be stopped are determined and temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is won, one of the main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A, 5A, 7A" and "4B, 5B, 7B") is selected. It is configured such that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbols is 4R for 4A and 5A, 8R for 4B and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. Furthermore, the types of random numbers and stop symbols are just examples, and are not limited to these {for example, the losing symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, but may be configured to have multiple types of symbols. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the main game symbol changes to a state where the type of variation and/or selection rate is different from before the specific symbol was stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). }.

Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game fluctuation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game fluctuation mode determining means MN51-B) selects the first main game fluctuation mode determining lottery corresponding to each gaming state. With reference to table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), main game symbol winning/failure lottery results and first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially fluctuation The variation mode of the main game symbols is determined based on the mode lottery random number), and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process moves to step 1414.

Here, FIGS. 12 and 13 (main game table 3) are an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, on both the first main game side and the second main game side, based on the winning/failure lottery results of the main game symbols, the state of the main game time saving flag, and the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation, It is configured such that the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbols is determined. In other words, when the main game symbol winning/failure lottery result is a win, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game time saving flag is on (time saving gaming state), the variation mode is relatively long. A variation mode in which the variation time is short is likely to be determined, and a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short when the number of pending items is 2 to 3 compared to when the number of pending items is 0 to 1. is configured so that it is easy to determine (only in case of a loss). It should be noted that this example is just an example, and there is no limitation to the type of stopped symbols, selection rate, etc. Further, it may be configured such that the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time reduction gaming state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) is relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side When the system is configured such that it is advantageous for the player to execute, the second main game side is likely to be held by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency on the first main game side (which is advantageous for the player). Since the purpose is to create a situation in which the game is played, it is particularly effective in cases where it is not possible to distinguish between the starting opening on the first main game side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side. In addition, an example of the performance executed when each variation mode is selected is shown in "Production mode executed on the sub side".
In addition, as a performance mode executed on the sub side, a pseudo-continuous variation (a production in which it appears as if symbol fluctuations are occurring multiple times during the display of one fluctuation of the main game symbol), which will be described later, is performed. A "pseudo consecutive failure performance" may be provided, which is a performance that informs the player that the pseudo continuous fluctuation will not be executed after inciting the player whether the In the game state, the random number distribution (execution frequency) of "Pseudo consecutive failure effect → stop of losing rolls" is higher when the number of pendings is 0 to 1 than when the number of pending is 2 to 3. (It may be configured in this way in both the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state).In addition, when the "pseudo continuous success performance" is executed, the pseudo continuous success effect described below It may be configured such that after the player is informed as to whether or not the fluctuation will be executed, the player is notified that the pseudo continuous fluctuation will be executed. In addition, the "pseudo consecutive failure performance" and the "pseudo consecutive success performance" are performances using "special symbols" or specific numbers described later. For example, when the "pseudo consecutive failure performance" is executed, the "pseudo consecutive failure performance" is After asking the player whether or not the "special symbol" will temporarily stop in the middle row, the decorative symbol one frame after the "special symbol" will stop (temporarily stop) in the middle row, and the "pseudo consecutive success effect" will occur. When executed, the player is asked whether or not the "special symbol" should temporarily stop in the middle row, and then the "special symbol" stops (temporarily stops) in the middle row. There is. In addition, in order to cause the second main game to be suspended during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state, which is an irregular symbol variation, the first main game symbol related to the loss in the time reduction gaming state is The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured such that short-time variation modes are not selected regardless of the number of reservations (for example, all variation times are 5 seconds or more). Note that the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the number of reservations is the first main game reservation. This is the number of games pending, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, in step 1414, the game content determining means MN issues a symbol fluctuation display start instruction command (stopped symbol information, stopped symbol attribute information, , information related to the determined main game symbols such as fluctuation mode information, commands related to the current gaming state, etc.) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999). (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set a predetermined time related to the main game symbol variation time in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C control the first main game symbol display section A21g (of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) On the second main game symbol display section B21g), a variable display of the main game symbols is started according to the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, The process moves to step 1420.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag areas of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and change the Determine whether the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process moves to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1500).

Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not a predetermined time period related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol finalization display instruction command) to the sub-main control section SM to the effect that symbol variation is finished. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423,
The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C control the first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) Stops the variable display of the main game symbols on the screen, and controls the display of the stopped symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C as fixed stopped symbols. Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

Next, in step 1430, the game content determining means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stopped symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

Next, in step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1500). Note that even in the case of No in step 1420, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1500).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process related to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1470, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1470, in step 1472, the specific game control means MP50 subtracts (decrements) the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1474, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value (remaining time saving number) is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1474, in steps 1476 and 1478, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time saving flag and the auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and next The process moves to step 1500 (processing of step 1500). Note that even in the case of No in step 1452, step 1470, or step 1474, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1500).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing related to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the condition determining means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device activation flag is on. If Yes in step 1502, in step 1514, the special game control means MP30 selects the specific game flags (main game probability change flag, main game time shortening flag, auxiliary game time shortening flag, etc.) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. flag). Next, in step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1520, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game transfer permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1522, the special game control means MP30 turns off the conditional device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1600). Note that if the answer is No in step 1502, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether the special game transition permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1602, in steps 1604 and 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transfer permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and also turns off the special game execution flag. Turn on. Next, in step 1607, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game execution means MP33 sets information to start a special game (special game start display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In the control command transmission process in step 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM), and the process moves to step 1612.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1602, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1610, the process moves to step 1612. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 determines that permission for the special game is not granted, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997).

Next, in step 1612, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine whether it exists or not. If Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, special game execution means MP33 sets an opening pattern in special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1616, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1620, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first big winning hole electric accessory C11d (or the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d) of the first big winning hole C10 to win the first big prize. The opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big prize opening is open, the process moves to step 1622 without performing the processes in steps 1614 to 1620.

Next, in step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game status command related to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It is sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command sending process in step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, the special game execution means MP33 puts a predetermined number of balls (for example, It is determined whether there is a winning ball (ball). If YES in step 1624, the process moves to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) and determines the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to opening the big winning opening. Determine whether the time has elapsed. If YES in step 1626, the process also moves to step 1628. Note that in the case of No in step 1626, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the special game execution means MP33 selects the first big winning hole electric accessory C11d of the first big winning hole C10 (or the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d of the second big winning hole C20).
to close the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20). Next, in step 1630, the special game execution means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). It is determined whether the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game execution means MP33 sets information to end the special game (special game end display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It is sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command sending process in step 1999). Then, at step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997). Note that even in the case of No in step 1634, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether the stopped symbols are probability-variable jackpot symbols (probability-variable game state after the execution of the special game is completed). It is determined whether or not it is a transitional jackpot symbol (in this example, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and moves to step 1658. On the other hand, if No in step 1652, that is, if the stopped symbol is a non-probability variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that does not shift to the probability variable game state after the execution of the special game, in this example, 4A/4B), step 1656 Then, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), and moves to step 1658.

Next, in step 1658 and step 1660, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time saving flag and the auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next process (step 1997 processing).

Next, the control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be explained with reference to FIGS. 18 to 26. First, FIG. 18 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly the sub-main control unit SM side) in the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. Here, the process shown in FIG. 4A is a process executed by the sub-main control unit SM after a reset such as when the gaming machine is powered on. That is, when the gaming machine is powered on, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes initial processing based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, clears RAM clear information). When receiving → Initializes the RAM on the sub side; When receiving various information commands → Resets information related to production at the time of power outage to the RAM on the sub side). Next, in step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM restores the number of reservations (for example, the drawing reservation counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). Note that the current performance will not be restored, and the "Preparing" screen will be displayed until the next change starts. Thereafter, the process shifts to a loop process in which the sub-main control unit SM repeatedly executes the repeat process routine (b). Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. Execute. Next, in step 2200, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process to be described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a first decorative symbol display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2350, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a second decorative symbol display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes special game-related display control processing to be described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a background effect control process to be described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes display command transmission control processing (sends the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control section SS side), and End the repeat processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a configuration in which the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2999) is loop-processed after being reset. Further, the process shown in FIG. 2(c) is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M mentioned above is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub-main control unit SM uses the command input port ( Check the input port of the data signal line mentioned above. Then, in step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM (for example, main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. is temporarily stored and returns to the process that was being executed immediately before this interrupt process.

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and sends a command related to the occurrence of a new reservation (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not pending information related to game symbols has been received. If Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing holding information display control means SM22 displays drawing holding counters (in this example, up to 4 pieces for the first main game) in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b. For the second main game, add "1" to the maximum of 4 pieces. Next, in step 2106, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22, based on the reservation generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, displays reservation information (particularly, random numbers related to the main game symbol lottery and reservation pre-reading group information). ) is temporarily stored in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process moves to step 2118.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2111, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2111, in step 2112, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing pending counter in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2114, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the reservation information related to the symbol variation (in particular, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) from the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. , shift the remaining pending information. Next, in step 2116, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2118. Note that even if the answer in step 2111 is No, the process moves to step 2118.

Next, in step 2118, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS to display on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first pending display section SG12, the second pending display section SG1).
In step 3), the same number of pending images as the drawing pending counter value in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2200).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the drawing display content determining means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2206, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n, the ready-to-reach effect display content determining means SM25n) selects the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b ( The first decorative symbol (as described above, is displayed based on the information from the main control board M side) with reference to the stop symbols and variation modes related to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of variation in the design. The stop symbol is a so-called decorative symbol that is controlled, and its display size and operation details will be described later). For example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, If it is a losing symbol, a number zero (win) such as 7, a number 1, 3, 5, etc.} and the variation pattern {for example, the variation pattern related to the main game symbol is short-term. If it is a fluctuation, it is non-reach, and if it is a long-term fluctuation, it is normal reach, super reach, etc.), and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, the reach performance) The relevant information is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in this embodiment, the first decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and is an effective line (a line where three numerical symbols are lined up to notify the result of success or failure). ) is one line, and if the same number symbols are aligned on the active line, it means a jackpot (on the contrary, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the active line, it is a loss). In addition, in the left column, middle column, and right column (or only in the middle column), in addition to the number symbols, there are "special symbols" (if displayed on the active line, it does not mean a jackpot, but after that it will be a jackpot. This is a symbol that foretells that this may occur, and the display size and operation contents will be described in detail later) can be stopped (temporarily stopped), and the numerical symbols are also configured so that they can be temporarily stopped during the symbol change. has been done. In addition, temporary stop means to temporarily stop display the decorative symbols in all rows during the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the main game symbols to the stop display, and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols , refers to a state in which it is possible to start variable display again during the relevant period (hereinafter used with the same meaning). Although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation can be temporarily stopped (temporary stop), does not make a definite stop, and is not included in the stop mode that notifies the jackpot. The "special symbol" at the time of execution of the look-ahead effect is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped (temporary stop), it can be fixedly stopped, and it is not included in the stopping mode that notifies the jackpot. .

Next, in step 2208, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n, the ready-to-reach effect display content determining means SM25n) selects the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b ( The display is controlled based on the information from the main control board M side, with reference to the stop symbols/variation modes related to the main game symbols) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of variation in the design. (Details on its display size and operation content will be described later) (For example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol is a so-called decorative symbol, and the details of its display size and operation content will be described later). '', etc., if the symbol is a loss, the number is 1, 3, 5, etc.) and the variation pattern {for example, the variation pattern related to the main game pattern fluctuates in a short period of time. In the case of non-reach, and in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.) is determined and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, the reach performance related information The information is temporarily stored in the information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in this embodiment, the second decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and there is one valid line (a line in which the same number symbols are valid). If the same number symbols are aligned on the active line, it means a jackpot (on the contrary, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the active line, it is a loss). In addition, only the numerical symbols can stop in the left, middle, and right columns ("special symbols" do not stop like the first decorative symbol), and are configured so that they do not temporarily stop during symbol fluctuations. . In this way, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured to independently determine the display content for notifying the validity of the main game pattern. The basic property of both decorative symbols is that they can independently notify the success or failure results of the main game symbols.

Next, in step 2216, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the validity result of the main game symbol and the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Based on the variation mode, determine the decorative pattern presentation content by referring to the decorative pattern presentation table SM21ta-2 (for example, decorative pattern presentation table 1 to decorative pattern presentation table 2) in the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, The display update timing and display update contents are set and temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2218, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and starts the next process (the process of step 2300). Transition. Note that even in the case of No in step 2202, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2300).

In the above explanation, the main game symbols whose display is controlled on the main control board M side are those on the first main game side (first main game symbols) or those on the second main game side ( Although there is no mention of whether it is a second main game symbol), basically, the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be determined in correspondence with the first main game symbol. Alternatively, the display contents of both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be determined in correspondence with the second main game pattern, that is, the variable display of the first main game pattern and the variable display of the second main game pattern. Regardless of which variable display is performed, the variable display of both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be made executable in conjunction with the variable display. However, this does not apply in the time reduction gaming state (a state accompanied by the so-called electric support state). For example, in the time reduction gaming state, the first main game symbol fluctuates and the second main game symbol fluctuates. For example, regardless of which display is performed, only one of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can be displayed in a variable manner in conjunction with the display.

Here, FIGS. 21 and 22 (decorative pattern presentation table 1, decorative pattern presentation table 2) are decorative pattern presentation table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern presentation table 1, especially a part when the result is a loss, This is an example of the decorative symbol production table 2, especially a part when the result is a jackpot. In addition, in the figures, the first decorative pattern may be simply described as the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern may be described as the second decorative pattern (the same applies hereinafter). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the result of winning or failing the main game symbol (shown in the leftmost column; in this example, "loss" or "jackpot") and the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative pattern) (illustrated in the second row on the left; in this example, only in the case of "pseudo consecutive failure (total production time 30 seconds)" and "super reach (total production time 60 seconds)" Based on the obtained random number value (a random number value obtained on the sub-main board SM side, a part of which is shown in the third column on the left), the decorative pattern presentation content (in the fourth column on the left) In this example, it is configured to be able to determine "Main appearance A-1 (Lose) Pseudo series 1", "Main appearance B-1 (Jackpot) No pseudo series", etc. When the decorative pattern performance content is determined, the "display update timing" and "display update content" can be uniquely determined. For example, if the decorative pattern presentation content = "A-1 (losing) pseudo-run 1", the "display update timing" = "at the start of variation (0 seconds later)" and the "display update content" = "decoration". Figure fluctuation start (all rows of first and second decorative symbols)" is determined, and "display update timing" = "12 seconds after fluctuation start", "display update content" = "first
"Drawing temporary stop display (left column), second drawing not displayed" is determined. Then, as described later, the "display update content" that has reached the "display update timing" is changed to the first decorative pattern according to the elapsed time related to the variation time of the decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern). This will be executed sequentially for each of the second decorative symbols. That is, when "A-1 (losing) pseudo-row 1" is determined, after all columns of the first decorative symbol and all columns of the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner, "display update timing" = "variation start". 12 seconds later, if the display is controlled so that all rows of the first decorative pattern are hidden (even the state of fluctuating display is not displayed), the second decorative pattern is , the display is controlled so that all columns are displayed in a variable manner (the state of the variable display becomes visible), and when the "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of variation" is reached, the first decorative pattern is Regarding the second decorative pattern, the display is controlled so that only the left column is stopped, while the display is controlled so that the entire column is hidden (even the state of fluctuating display is not displayed). . In this way, the basic operation in this example is that when the first decorative pattern is visible (easily visible) to the player, the second decorative pattern is visible to the player. If the first decorative pattern is invisible (hard to see) to the player, and the second decorative pattern is invisible (hard to see) to the player, then the second decorative pattern is invisible (hard to see) to the player. In other words, in order to ensure that the player is informed that the symbols are changing (easily visible), the second decorative symbols are displayed in a complementary manner. In addition, the production pattern (a series of display contents) defined by "A-1 (Loss) Pseudo-Run 1" is different from the production pattern defined by the name of other decorative design production contents (that is, the display contents are different). ) I would like to add that it is a thing. In addition, the range of random numbers is "0 to 1023" for all variation modes, and this figure extracts a part of the random number range for the drawing variation mode (therefore, it corresponds to a certain drawing variation mode). The random number range of the obtained random number value corresponding to the drawing variation mode different from the certain drawing variation mode are different from each other, but both range from "0 to 1023". range).

Here, the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute so-called pseudo-continuous variation, and specifically, the decorative pattern presentation contents in this example are "A-1 (losing) pseudo-continuation 1", "A-2 (Loss) Pseudo-Run 2" and "B-2 (Jackpot) Pseudo-Run 2." For example, in the decorative pattern production content "A-2 (losing) pseudo-run 2", "display update timing" = "variation start time (0 seconds later)" and "display update content" = "design variation start (after 0 seconds)". 1 decorative pattern and all rows of the 2nd decorative pattern)" is executed, "Display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of variation", "13 seconds after the start of variation", "14 seconds after the start of variation" is executed. "Display update content" = "1st design temporary stop display (left column)" (left column of the 1st decorative pattern is a stop display), "1st design temporary stop display (right column)" (1st decorative pattern temporary stop display (right column)) The right column is a stop display), and the "first drawing special symbol temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decorative symbols is a stop display at the above-mentioned "special symbol") are sequentially executed. Then, when "display update timing" = "15 seconds after start of variation", "display update content" = "start of 1st design variation (all columns)" (all columns of only the 1st decorative pattern are displayed variable again) After execution, "Display update timing" = "26 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "27 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "28 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "Display update content" = "1st drawing temporary stop display ( (left column) (the left column of the 1st decorative pattern is a stop display), ``1st drawing temporary stop display (right column)'' (the right column of the 1st decorative pattern is a stop display), ``1st drawing special design By sequentially executing the "temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed when the above-mentioned "special symbol" is displayed), the player can enjoy the For one decorative pattern, it appears as if the pattern changes occur multiple times. ).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first decorative pattern is not displayed (a state in which the state of static display or fluctuating display is not displayed), and when the middle row of the first decorative pattern is the above-mentioned "special pattern", When the second decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and in other cases, the second decorative pattern is hidden. That is, if the player can visually recognize the first decorative pattern or can determine which pattern is stopped as the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is hidden (the first decorative pattern is If the player is unable to visually recognize the first decorative symbol, or it is impossible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol {for example, When the "special symbols" are stopped and the numbers in the middle row (or all rows) are indistinguishable, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, allowing the player to always select one of the numbers. The decorative pattern (either the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern) can be visually recognized, and the progress of the game can be easily grasped. In the present embodiment, the second decorative pattern is configured so that the "special pattern" does not temporarily stop, but this makes it difficult to grasp the progress of the game with respect to the first decorative pattern, while increasing the interest of the performance. Since the main purpose is to increase the game progress, the second decorative pattern, which is provided to ensure that the progress of the game can be easily understood, is a "special symbol" (i.e., if it is displayed on the active line, it will be a jackpot. This is because the system is configured not to display symbols that may make it difficult to understand the progress of the game, such as symbols that foretell that a jackpot may occur in the future, even though they do not mean anything. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned "non-display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), a state in which the display is fluctuated at high speed (a fluctuating state in which an afterimage is visible) may be included, and the above-mentioned In the case of a "display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the display is displayed in a slowly fluctuating manner (in the case of a display mode that fluctuates from top to bottom, it is displayed slowly from the top to the bottom). and (temporarily) a fluctuating state toward the scheduled stop position).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second decorative pattern is configured not to temporarily stop (and the "special pattern" does not stop) during the movement, but the second decorative pattern is not limited to this. As with the first decorative pattern, it may be configured so that it can be temporarily stopped during the fluctuation (or a pseudo fluctuation may occur). That is, in the case of such a configuration, all the rows of the first decorative pattern and all the rows of the second decorative pattern have substantially the same operation contents of the fluctuating display and the stop display (including temporary stop), and are not displayed in a stopped state. This means that the types of symbols used will be different.

Further, regarding the second decorative symbols, it is not necessary to display them all the time during the variable display of the main game symbols, and the display conditions and display mode of the second decorative symbols may be changed as appropriate. For example, (1) while a specific effect is occurring (instead of making the first decorative pattern invisible, a movie video is played using the entire display area on the effect display device SG, or a so-called effect) (2) At the time of a specific ready-to-reach performance (2) displaying a second decorative pattern in a state in which a movable accessory for a game advances to a state where it covers the display area on the performance display device SG) 1 Instead of making the decorative symbols invisible, it is possible to forcibly pause the display content of the performance that was being performed on the performance display device SG during the execution of a reach effect where the expectation of a jackpot increases significantly. The second decorative pattern is displayed only when executing a so-called freeze reach effect), and is hidden during other reach effects (especially when executing a reach effect with low expectation of jackpot). 3) Varying the appearance position of the second decorative pattern on the performance display device SG according to the performance pattern (for example, the above-mentioned movable accessory for the performance advances to a state where it covers the display area on the performance display device SG) (4) The first decorative pattern can be moved, reduced, or enlarged. On the other hand, for the second decorative pattern, it is impossible to move, reduce, or enlarge the display, or the probability of moving, reducing, or enlarging the display, the movement width, the reduction rate, the enlargement rate, etc. is different from that of the first decorative pattern. It may be lower than, etc.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative pattern display control process related to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, step 2
At 306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2309, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 starts the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2310. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2302, the process moves to step 2310.

Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2310, in step 2312 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 checks the timer value of the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2314, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 controls the first decoration based on the first illustration variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether the symbol fluctuation start timing has been reached. If Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a variable display command for the first decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). ) and moves to step 2330.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2314, in step 2318, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the variation mode temporarily stored in the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on this, it is determined whether the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the first decorative pattern has been reached. If Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether it is the timing to stop the above-mentioned "special symbol" ( In this example, the "special symbol" is configured to temporarily stop only on the middle symbol.) If Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 selects an angel zone flag (for notifying that the jackpot expectation level is increased) in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. The flag that triggers the display of the background image is turned on and the process moves to step 2324. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2320, the process moves to step 2324. Next, in step 2324, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the first decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). ) and moves to step 2330. In this embodiment, when the angel zone flag is turned on, the "angel zone background" is displayed as a background effect, but the timing at which the angel zone flag is turned on is, for example, , (1) during symbol fluctuations with relatively high jackpot expectations (for example, symbol fluctuations that result in reach), (2) when symbol fluctuations related to suspension of consumption schedule stop prior to symbol fluctuations with high jackpot expectations, etc. Also, although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" that triggers the angel zone flag to turn on may be temporarily stopped in the case of (1) mentioned above, or in the case of (2) mentioned above. It may be stopped permanently.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2318, in step 2326, the preview performance display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-reach performance display control means SM25) stores the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. (and the variation mode temporarily stored in the ready-to-reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-reach image has arrived. If Yes in step 2326, in step 2328, the preview effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the preview image or ready-to-reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). (is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process moves to step 2330. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2326, the process moves to step 2330.

Next, in step 2330, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines that the first decorative pattern is normally displayed (as described above, when the player visually recognizes the first decorative pattern). (or if it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is hidden). If Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets the second pattern display flag (with respect to the second decorative pattern) in the flag area of the installation display related information temporary storage device SM21b to a non-display state. The flag for switching whether the display state is set to OFF or the display state is set to ON is turned off, and the process moves to step 2336. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2330, in step 2334, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 turns on the second pattern display flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2336. .

Next, in step 2336, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether information indicating that the main game symbols will be stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2336, in step 2338, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (determined display command) for the first decorative pattern (on the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999) ). Next, in step 2340, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the first drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2342, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2350). do. Note that even in the case of No in step 2310 or step 2336, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2350).

In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM manages the timing related to the variable display of the first decorative pattern, the execution timing of the background effect, etc. using the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1. However, the management method of the timing related to the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern, the execution timing of the background effect, etc. is not limited to this. The timing, preview image/ready-to-reach image display timing, background effect display timing (background effect display switching timing), etc. are all determined and sent to the sub-sub control unit SS, and the sub-sub control unit SS processes them according to the received content. The display may be configured to be executed (displayed) at any given timing (the same applies to the second decorative pattern).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the second decorative pattern display control process related to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the first symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the second symbol display flag is on. . If Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a variable display execution command for the second decorative pattern (command for variable displaying the second decorative pattern) (sends the display command in step 2999). (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and the process moves to step 2360. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2354, in step 2358, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a variable display deletion command for the second decorative pattern (a command for hiding the second decorative pattern) (in step 2999). (The display command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process), and the process moves to step 2360.

Next, in step 2360, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether information indicating that the main game symbols will be stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2360, in step 2362, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (determined display command) for the second decorative pattern (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 ). Next, in step 2364, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and starts the next process (the process of step 2400). Transition. Note that even in the case of No in step 2352 or step 2360, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2400).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area. As shown in the figure, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the reservation display (the reservation regarding the first main game symbol and the reservation regarding the second main game symbol may be displayed at the same time) are the effect display device. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the SG, and in this embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the final display timing (the timing at which the main game symbol is stopped and displayed). Since the first decorative pattern is the main decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern has higher visibility than the second decorative pattern (the displayed area is assumed to be larger). Moreover, in this embodiment, the variation start timing and variation end timing (determined display timing) of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are the same timing.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2404, in steps 2406 and 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game in progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and also turns on the effect display device. A jackpot start display is performed on the SG (an appropriate display is performed based on the type of jackpot), and the process moves to step 2412. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2402, the process moves to step 2412.

Next, in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of prizes on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (the number of rounds and the number of prizes won are (It may be executed as necessary based on the type, etc.)

Next, in step 2413, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display the effect related to the special game that is being executed based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot that is currently being executed and the jackpot symbol that is being stopped. In the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the display command is sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side. A performance that the player cannot recognize is executed). Next, in step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 displays a jackpot end display on the effect display device SG (performs an appropriate display based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2500). . Note that even in the case of No in step 2404 or step 2414, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of background effect control processing related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 18. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the angel zone flag is on. If Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "angel zone background" (background effect that can be displayed when the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped) as the background effect, and in step 2506 to move to. Next, in step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether the fluctuation (a part of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) that triggered the transition to the "angel zone" has ended. Determine whether If Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the angel zone flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2509, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined background effect (for example, sets the background effect that was set before the "angel zone background" was set), and proceeds to step 2520. do.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main side. . If Yes in step 2512, in step 2514, a stage transition lottery is executed to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/20) (the stage transition lottery will be executed at the start of each fluctuation) . Next, in step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result in step 2514 and determines whether or not the stage transition lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a transition to a predetermined stage transition pattern (for example, to loop each stage in the order of flatland stage → space stage → volcano stage → flatland stage). Based on the following), the background effect is set, and the process moves to step 2520. Note that the process also moves to step 2520 in the case of No in step 2506, step 2512, or step 2516.

Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display the set background effect on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display the set background effect on the effect display device SG) 2999) and moves on to the next process (the process of step 2999).

With the above configuration, in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, two types of decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are provided, and the first decorative pattern is hidden (stopped). By configuring the second decorative pattern to be displayed (fluctuating display) in a state where the displayed state is not displayed or in a situation where it is difficult to see, the player can always see one of the decorative patterns. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is possible to visually recognize and accurately determine which symbols are stopped and whether or not jackpot symbols are stopped.

(Example 1 of modification from this embodiment)
Here, in this embodiment, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed, the "special symbol" always stops as the temporary stop symbol in the middle row, and the "special symbol" always stops while the first decorative symbol is fluctuating. Although the second decorative pattern is configured to be hidden, the display control method of the decorative pattern is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as modification example 1 from this embodiment, and only the changes from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIGS. 27 and 28 (decorative pattern presentation table 3, decorative pattern presentation table 4) are decorative pattern presentation table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern presentation table 3, especially a part when the result is a loss, and This is an example of the decorative symbol production table 4 (particularly when the winning/failing result is a jackpot). First, changes from this embodiment will be described in detail regarding the first decorative pattern. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is configured to be displayed even during fluctuation. Also, for example, when executing a pseudo continuous fluctuation such as "A-6 (loss) pseudo series 2 (specific outcome)", the specific outcome other than the "special symbol" will stop at the temporary stop timing of the middle symbol. It is configured so that it can be done. Here, a specific roll is a roll that differs from a "special pattern" in that all rows (left row, middle row, right row) stop at numbers, but the stopping pattern follows certain rules. (for example, a number such as "345"), and is configured to notify the player that a pseudo continuous variation is being executed when the specific number is stopped. In addition, in modification example 1 from the present embodiment, when executing a pseudo continuous fluctuation, in the case of a loss, the specific number is more likely to stop than the "special symbol" at the temporary stop timing of the middle row. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, the "special symbol" is easier to stop than the specific roll, that is, the "special symbol" is easier to stop than the specific roll. The expectation of hitting the jackpot is higher when the game stops. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is no problem in configuring the system so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the specific number stops than when the "special symbols" stop. In addition, when a pseudo fluctuation is executed in a pseudo continuous fluctuation, all the symbols will fluctuate again, that is, after the three symbols have temporarily stopped, the three symbols will fluctuate again, but in such a case, , If a "special symbol" temporarily stops in the middle row, and then the middle row changes again, the decorative symbol in the middle row at the time of the start of the re-change is no longer a "special symbol" {for example, "6★7" ” (★ = special symbol), it will change again in the state of “667” (the middle symbol is preferably a symbol that is “±1” of the right symbol or the left symbol)} It may be configured as follows.

Next, changes from this embodiment will be explained in detail regarding the second decorative pattern. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is always displayed while the main game symbol is changing. In addition, in the case of a reach, the second decorative pattern is also temporarily stopped at the timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern is also fixedly displayed at the same time as the fixed display timing of the first decorative pattern. (The same pattern will be stopped and displayed as the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern). The variable display mode of the second decorative pattern is not limited to this, for example, the first decorative pattern is visible and the player can easily grasp the game progress by visually recognizing the first decorative pattern. In this case, the second decorative pattern is hidden, that is, the specific appearance is stopped during the fluctuating display of the first decorative pattern, during the temporary stop of the left and right columns, and at the timing of the temporary stop of the middle row. If the middle row is in the middle row, the second decorative pattern is hidden, while if the "special symbol" is stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (or temporarily displayed). (stop display). Further, the second decorative pattern may be all stopped and temporarily stopped in accordance with the stopping and temporary stopping of the first decorative pattern. Further, the second decorative pattern may be always displayed in a variable manner regardless of the fluctuation status of the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern may also be fixed and stopped only when the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the present embodiment, by configuring so that a specific number of outcomes can be temporarily stopped at the timing of temporarily stopping the middle row, pseudo-continuous fluctuation can be achieved. It is possible to provide multiple types of stopping modes at the time of temporary stopping during execution, and by varying the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the stopping mode, the player can focus on which stopping mode is the one in question. This increases the interest of the game.

In the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and during execution of a specific effect such as a reach effect, the first decorative pattern may be may be configured not to be displayed in a variable manner (hidden), or may be configured such that only a specific column (for example, the middle column) is not displayed.

In addition, in modification example 1 from the present embodiment, the configuration is such that a specific number (or "special symbol") can be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, but the specific number (or "special symbol") ) may be displayed in the left column and right column.For example, (1) the left column and right column are the same number, and the middle column is the same number ±1 (for example, "4, 5, 4" or a "special symbol" is placed at the 5 position in the middle row), (2) in the same stopping manner as a losing number that is not a specific number. (3) Temporarily stop all rows at the same time, (4) Temporarily stop when the numbers in the left and/or right column are in the middle row. (5) If the decorative patterns in the left and right columns are numbers that are separated by 2 or more, the decorative patterns in the middle row are numbers that are separated by 2 or more from the left and/or right column. If you temporarily stop due to a loss, it may be possible to do so. In addition, the conditions for the appearance of a specific number may also be changed. For example, if the temporary stop symbols (numbers) in the left and right columns are the same, it will likely appear (or it will appear only if they are the same). etc., it may be configured to be different from the appearance condition of the "special symbol". In addition, when a “special symbol” (or specific outcome) appears after reach, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a “special symbol” (or specific outcome) appears when it is not reach, or After that, there is a high possibility that the "special symbol" will temporarily stop again during the symbol change {For example, "7★7" has a higher jackpot expectation than "7★8" (★ = special symbol), Alternatively, the configuration may be such that there is a high possibility of temporary stopping again.

(Example 2 of modification from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment and the first modification from the present embodiment, the configuration of the display mode of the first decorative pattern during pseudo-continuous variation has been mentioned, but the configuration of the display mode of the first decorative pattern during pseudo-continuous variation other than the above configuration New gameplay can be created by configuring the display mode. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as Modification Example 2 from this embodiment, and only the changes with respect to Modification Example 1 from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIGS. 29 and 30 (decorative pattern presentation table 5, decorative pattern presentation table 6) are a part of the decorative pattern presentation table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern presentation table 5, especially when the result is a loss, and , is an example of the decorative pattern production table 6 (particularly when the winning/failing result is a jackpot). The changes from the present embodiment to Modification Example 1 will first be described in detail regarding the first decorative pattern. In modification example 2 from this embodiment, the first decorative pattern is displayed during fluctuation, and the "special symbol" that can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in pseudo continuous fluctuation is "special symbol A" and " There are two types: "Special Design B". Here, the "special symbol A" is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the first temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo-continuous variation (even after that timing), while the "special symbol B" is It is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the second middle row temporary stop timing in the fluctuation. Further, the specific number is configured such that it can be temporarily stopped from the first temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (even after that timing). That is, at the first temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the "special symbol A" and two types of specific outcomes can be temporarily stopped as the stop mode, while the second middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation can be temporarily stopped. At the temporary stopping timing, the stopping mode is configured so that three types of specific outcomes, ``special symbol A'' and ``special symbol B'', can be temporarily stopped, and the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation is There are more types of stop modes that can be stopped at the second middle row temporary stop timing in the pseudo-continuous variation than at the temporary stop timing. In this way, the temporary stop timing in the middle row of pseudo-continuous fluctuations may be configured such that the later the temporary stop timing is, the more types of stopping manners there are. It may be configured such that the number of times is reduced. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stopping modes increases as the temporary stopping timing approaches the latter half, the stopping mode with a high degree of expectation that the fluctuation will be a jackpot is selected as the type of selection candidate every time a pseudo fluctuation is executed. It may be configured such that a new change is added, and by such a configuration, the player will pay attention to each pseudo change every time it is executed. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes decreases as the temporary stop timing approaches the latter half, each time a pseudo fluctuation is executed, a stop mode with a low expectation that the fluctuation will be a jackpot is selected as a selection candidate type. It may be configured so that it is deleted, and by configuring it in this way, it is possible to guarantee the degree of expectation that the pseudo fluctuation will be a jackpot every time the pseudo fluctuation is executed. Note that the second decorative pattern has the same configuration as Modification Example 1 from the present embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the second modification example from the present embodiment, the later the temporary stop timing is in the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the more the temporary stop can be made. By configuring the game so that the number of stopping modes is increased, the player pays attention to the number of times the middle row temporarily stops and the stopping mode at the time of temporary stopping, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

(Example 3 of modification from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, two types of decorative patterns are provided as the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, and the first decorative pattern is not displayed (stop display/fluctuating display is not displayed). Although the second decorative pattern is displayed (fluctuatingly displayed) in a situation where the second decorative pattern is hard to be seen) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize the second decorative pattern, the configuration using the second decorative pattern is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as modification example 3 from this embodiment, and only the changes from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in modification example 3 of the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 2232 (variation 3) to step 2236 (variation 3), step 2900 (variation 3), step 2246 (variation 3), and step 2248 (variation 3), that is, step 2204 After turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2232 (variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines that the current gaming state is a probability-changing gaming state. Determine whether or not. If Yes in Step 2232 (Variation 3), in Step 2234 (Variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n changes the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern to a variable probability display mode (during probability variable game state). The display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed is determined, and the process moves to step 2900 (variation 3). On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2232 (Variation 3), in Step 2236 (Variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n changes the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern to an indeterminate variable display mode ( The display mode of decorative symbols to be displayed during the non-probability variable gaming state is determined, and the process moves to step 2900 (variation 3). In this way, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the display manners of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured to differ depending on whether or not the probability variation game state is in effect, and the first decorative pattern is When the display mode of the symbols changes (for example, when transitioning from a non-probability variable gaming state to a probability variable gaming state), the display mode of the second decorative symbol also changes in accordance with the change. Note that the display modes of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are not limited to a configuration in which they differ only depending on whether or not the probability fluctuation game state is in effect; It may be configured to differ depending on which production (production stage) it is, etc.

Next, in step 2900 (variation 3), the drawing display content determining means SM21n executes a drawing stop symbol determining process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2246 (variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2248 (variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbol based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbol, and proceeds to step 2216.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the drawing stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2900 (variation 3) in FIG. 31 in modification example 3 of the present embodiment. First, in step 2902, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the symbol variation is a jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether the number of rounds to be executed in the special game related to the jackpot symbol is the maximum round number ( In this example, it is determined whether or not 16R). If Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the drawing display content determining means SM21n sets the stop symbols of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern to three "white" symbols (for example, "777") and Decide on one of a set of three "black" symbols (for example, "444") (a set of three "white" symbols will be selected) and a set of three "black" symbols. is selected (the total distribution ratio is 1:1), and the process moves to the next process {the process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2904, in step 2908, the design display content determining means SM21n sets the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol to three "black" symbols (for example, "444"). One of these is determined, and the process moves to the next process {the process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. In this way, in the third modification from the present embodiment, a set of three "white" symbols (for example, "777") is a special game that has the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example). In other words, when a set of three white symbols stops, it is almost certain that a special game with the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example) will be executed. (This may be a relatively higher profit for the player than a set of three "black" symbols).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2902, in step 2910, the design display content determining means SM1n determines the stop symbols of the first decorative symbols based on the information regarding the stop symbols of the main game symbols. Next, in step 2912, the drawing display content determining means SM21n changes the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern to a predetermined losing pattern (in this example, "345", and the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern is only one pattern). ), and the process moves to the next process {the process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. The number of types of stop symbols of the second decorative pattern may not be limited to one pattern, but it is desirable that the number of types of stop symbols is smaller than that of the first decorative pattern. In addition, the stop symbol when the second decorative pattern is a loss is a predetermined loss symbol (in this example, "345"), whereas the stop symbol when the first decorative symbol is a loss is selected from a plurality of candidates. (for example, randomly selected from 300 types of stop symbol candidates), the frequency with which the predetermined losing symbol stops at the time of a loss is higher for the second decorative symbol than for the first decorative symbol ( (It may be configured such that a predetermined losing pattern does not stop as the stopping pattern of the first decorative pattern). In addition, for all losing symbols that can stop the second decorative symbol (for example, only one pattern of "375" is acceptable), if three of the same symbols are aligned, it is the highest prize for the player in any gaming state. It may be configured such that one or more profitable symbols (for example, "7" symbol) are always included (for example, "375" and "276" may stop).

Next, FIG. 33 is an image diagram of the display mode of decorative patterns in the third modification from the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are The display mode (in this example, display colors, display attributes such as color scheme, shape, size, etc.) can be different. Specifically, in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state, only the "7" symbol is displayed as "white" along with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and all symbols other than "7" are displayed as " On the other hand, in the probability variable game state, the "3" symbol and "7" are displayed together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The symbols are displayed in "white" and all symbols other than the "3" symbol and "7" are displayed in "black". That is, together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the "3" symbol is configured so that the display mode can vary depending on the game state (the display mode may vary in probability). The conditions under which the display formats differ are not limited to whether or not the probability fluctuation game state is in effect, but may also be whether or not the time reduction game state is in effect, and may differ depending on which background performance (direction stage) is being executed. It may be configured so that it can be done. In addition, in modification example 3 from the present embodiment, the symbol whose display attribute can change depending on whether or not it is in a probability variable gaming state is the "3" symbol, but the "3" symbol is the same as described above. It is included in the combination of predetermined losing symbols (in this example, "345") that will cause the second decorative symbol to stop in the event of a loss (it becomes the stopping symbol in the left column), and in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state. In the case of a loss, all the stop symbols of the second decorative symbol are displayed in "black", while in the probability fluctuation game state, the stop symbols of the second decorative symbol in the event of a loss are "white" from the left column. , "black", and "black" will be displayed.

Next, FIGS. 34 and 35 (decorative pattern presentation table 7, decorative pattern presentation table 8) are decorative pattern presentation table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern presentation table 7, especially a part when the result is a loss, This is an example of the decorative pattern production table 8, especially a part when the result is a jackpot. The changes from this embodiment are that the decorative pattern type item is changed to display update type, and three items are provided: "first decorative pattern", "second decorative pattern", and "transparent liquid crystal". In the third modification from the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to execute a transparent effect in which the J display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transparent, and during the period when the transparent effect is being executed, the first decoration Although the pattern is hidden, the second decorative pattern remains displayed (see "33 seconds" of the display update timing).

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in the third modification from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 2327-1 (variation 3) and step 2327-2 (variation 3), that is, when the preview image or reach image display timing is reached in step 2326, step 2327- 1 (variation 3), the preview effect display control means SM24 displays a transparent effect (presentation) based on the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the effect in which the display area SG10 of the display device SG is transparent. If Yes in Step 2327-1 (Variation 3), in Step 2327-2 (Variation 3), the preview effect display control means SM24 sets an image display command related to the transparent effect (in the display command transmission control process of Step 2999). and is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process moves to step 2336. On the other hand, if No in step 2327-1 (variation 3), the process moves to step 2328. Note that when the transparent effect is executed, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG becomes transparent, and the state in which the accessory in the effect display device SG is being driven becomes visible, and the first decorative pattern The display of is erased (becomes non-display), and the second decorative pattern is continuously displayed by the second decorative pattern display device in the performance display device SG (details will be described later). Further, in the third modification from the present embodiment, a reserved number display area is provided adjacent to the display of the second decorative symbol of the effect display device SG (toward the right when viewed from the player). With this configuration, the player can visually check the pending number even while the transparent effect is being executed.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 18 in modification example 3 from this embodiment. The change from this embodiment is step 2410 (variation 3), that is, after setting the command related to the jackpot display in step 2408, or when the special game flag is on, step 2410 ( In Variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command (step In the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the command is sent to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process moves to step 2412. In this way, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the second decorative pattern is displayed even during the execution of the special game, and the player can select which decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) It is possible to determine whether such a special game is being executed even while the special game is being executed.

Next, FIG. 38 is an image diagram of the configuration of the effect display device in modification example 3 from this embodiment. First, as shown in the conceptual perspective view and conceptual top view of the effect display device, a second decorative pattern display device is provided on the back side (as seen from the player) from the display area SG10, and the device emits light ( The light is output in the direction of the display area SG10), so that the second decorative pattern and the reserved number display area are displayed in the display area SG10. Further, by outputting light from the light source, it is possible to display the effect in the display area SG10, but the effect is not displayed in the area adjacent to the second decorative pattern display device in the display area SG10. The display of the second decorative pattern and the reserved number display area by the second decorative pattern display device is configured to be visible to the player. Further, when the transparent effect is executed, the effect in the display area SG10 is no longer displayed, and the accessory inside the effect display device SG becomes visible. Note that even while the transparent effect is being executed, the effect display on the second decorative pattern display device is being executed, so that it is visible to the player. With this configuration, even in a situation where a transparent effect is being performed, the player can recognize the fluctuation status of decorative symbols and the number of reservations by visually checking the effect display on the second decorative pattern display device. Become. In addition, the display of the pending number may differ depending on the gaming state (for example, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the first main game pending number is displayed, and in the time reduction gaming state, the number of pending main games is displayed). displaying the second main game pending number), the first main game pending number and the second main game pending number may always be displayed, or the total of the first main game pending number and the second main game pending number It may be configured to display the number of pending items. Note that the configuration for displaying the effects in the display area SG10 is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the display area SG10 can be switched between a transparent state and a non-transparent state, for example, by changing the position of the light source. (for example, outputting light from diagonally behind the display area), or a light guide plate (a transparent plate-like member that scatters light emitted from a light emitting element that enters from the side in the vertical direction). The display area may be a display area that performs display through a light source (so-called edge-light type), a display area that is made of organic EL, or the like. In addition, as an example of a configuration using a light guide plate, when viewed from the player's side, from the front there is a "transparent liquid crystal (liquid crystal shutter)", a "light guide plate {placed close to the transparent liquid crystal (approximately 5 mm), A light source A for distributing light to the light guide plate is arranged near the outer periphery of the light guide plate}", "Light source B that constantly outputs light to the lower left of the display area SG10", "Accessories", "Accessories" When performing a transparent effect (when you want to emphasize a role object and show it to the player), turn off the output of light source A (light source The output of light source A may be lowered than when the transparent effect is not executed), and the output of light source B and light source C is turned ON, and when the transparent effect is not executed (you do not want to show the accessory to the player, and When you want the player to see the effect in the display area SG10), turn on the output of light sources A and B, and turn off the output of light source C (the output of light source C is lower than when executing the transparent effect). may also be configured. In addition, the display of the second decorative pattern and the reserved number display area is not limited to the configuration of this example, and for example, the second decorative pattern display device emits light (light is output in the direction of the display area SG10). , the second decorative pattern and the reserved number display area can be displayed in the display area SG10 using a mechanism similar to the mechanism in which effects are displayed by outputting light from the light source toward the display area SG10, i.e. Since the second decorative pattern display device takes the place of the light source, the second decorative pattern display device always outputs light even if the light source stops outputting light due to the execution of the transparent effect. 2. The display of the decorative pattern and the reserved number display area may be configured to be visible at all times (the light guide plate is used to prevent transmission of the transparent liquid crystal).

Next, FIG. 39 is an image diagram of transparent effect execution in modification example 3 from this embodiment. In this example, in the normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state), the pseudo continuous variation will be executed twice (the variation of pseudo continuous 2), and one symbol variation will be executed. This example shows the case where First, a certain decorative pattern (a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern) starts to fluctuate, and then a special pattern is temporarily stopped as the first middle row temporary stopping pattern. After that, a certain decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) starts to fluctuate again, and then the special pattern is temporarily stopped again as the second middle row temporary stopping pattern. After that, the variation of a certain decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) is started again, and the display area SG10 becomes transparent due to the transparent effect being executed, and the back of the display area SG10 (game It becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the accessory is being driven (as seen from the player). After that, the transparent effect ends (the display area SG10 becomes non-transparent), the accessory at the back of the display area SG10 (as seen from the player) becomes invisible, and the variable display of the first decorative pattern is started again. Becomes visible (displayed). After that, in the case of a loss, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern stop at the loss pattern {the second decorative pattern stops at a predetermined loss pattern ("345"), and the first decorative pattern stops at the loss pattern ("345") This is a combination of stopped symbols that may be different from the losing symbol ("787"). In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern stop at the jackpot pattern {the jackpot pattern of the first decorative pattern and the jackpot pattern of the second decorative pattern are the same combination of stopping patterns. }. Thereafter, the special game is executed, and even during the execution of the special game, the second decorative symbol continues to be stopped and displayed as the same jackpot symbol as at the start of the special game. Note that even during the execution of the special game, a transparent effect may be executed (the display area SG10 may be set to a transparent state). By configuring the system so that the transparent effect can be executed immediately before execution, the player can increase his or her expectation of transitioning to the probability variable game state after the special game ends by visually recognizing the transparent effect. Furthermore, even if the transparent effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area is maintained (visible), so it will not interfere with the progress of the game. It is configured like this. As an example of the display of decorative symbols during a special game, for example, during a special game, in order to inform the player which three decorative symbols have matched to become a jackpot, only one of the decorative symbols has been displayed. (For example, if "777" hits the jackpot, "7" will be displayed). In order to be able to recognize this, the display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area may be maintained even during the special game.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG becomes a transparent state and the accessory in the effect display device SG becomes transparent. Even if the first decorative pattern is hidden during execution of the transparent effect, the effect display on the second decorative pattern display device is executed, so that the player can display the second decorative pattern. By visually confirming the performance display on the display device, the fluctuation status of the decorative symbols and the number of reservations can be recognized, making the gaming machine more user-friendly. In addition, the game state transition distribution rate after the end of the special game related to the ball entering the first main game starting port A10 and the game state transition distribution after the end of the special game related to the ball entering the second main game starting port B10. In addition to making the odds different, the display attributes of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) are made different depending on whether or not it is a probability variable gaming state, so that it is possible to suggest or inform the player that there is a high profit. By varying the number of types of symbols, the game ball is sent to the second main game starting port B10 rather than the non-probability variable gaming state in which the game is progressed by entering the game ball into the first main game starting port A10. There are more types of display attributes of the jackpot symbol in the variable probability gaming state where the game progresses by entering the ball, and the transition to the variable probability gaming state after the special game is almost certain. This means that it is possible to appropriately suggest or inform the player whether or not the gaming state of the game is highly profitable for the player.

In addition, in modification example 3 from the present embodiment, regardless of whether the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol changes, the change corresponds to the current game state and performance display mode (background performance, etc.). Decorative symbols with display attributes are displayed in a variable manner, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuations in the first main game symbol and the decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuation in the second main game symbol have a common display (and display attribute). (The display attributes and display areas of the decorative symbols are not differentiated between the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol.)

(Second embodiment)
Here, in this embodiment, two types of decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are provided so that the result of pattern variation can be accurately recognized. It can also be applied to configurations that allow execution. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a second embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is steps 1322 (second) to step 1344 (second), the purpose of which is to sub-subscribe variation mode random number delimiter information, which is information to be referred to when determining the content of the look-ahead effect. That is, after storing the first main game content determination random number in step 1308, in step 1322 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 sets the flag of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Refer to the area and determine whether the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1322 (second), in step 1324 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 determines whether or not the main game time shortening flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. Determine whether In the case of Yes in step 1324 (second), in step 1326 (second), the reservation control means MJ30, based on the reservation information (win/fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number), determines the stored win/fail result related to the reservation and the stopped symbol. Determine in advance. Next, in step 1328 (second), the reservation control means MJ30 uses the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting a command related to the newly generated suspension result and stop symbol information to the sub-main control section SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

Next, in step 1330 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 pre-determines the fluctuation mode random number delimiter information and fluctuation mode group related to the stored suspension based on the suspension information (random number for determining fluctuation mode). Regarding the mode random number delimiter information and the variable mode group, see the main game table 3 in FIGS. 41 and 42), and proceed to step 1332 (second). Also, if No in step 1322 (second) or step 1324 (second), the process moves to step 1332 (second). In the second embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Next, in step 1332 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to new hold occurrence (a hold generation command for the first main game content determining random number, a command related to variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) to the sub The command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (it is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to step 1312. In addition, when configured to send symbol information to the sub side as in the second embodiment, an effect suggesting a jackpot may be executed as an effect executed on the sub side, and when such a configuration is adopted, It is desirable to have a configuration that can notify the player of the stopped symbols of the main game symbols that will result in a jackpot (the stopped symbols will be notified only when the stopped symbols of the main game symbols result in a jackpot).

In this way, in the second embodiment, when the main game content determining random number (the first main game content determining random number or the second main game content determining random number) is acquired (or when a hold occurs), the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode It is configured to determine groups.

It should be noted that the main game content determining random number information, win/fail random number delimiter information, variation mode random number delimiter information, and variation mode group information may be configured to be transmitted to the sub side at the timing when a hold occurs. The information to be sent to is not limited to this, but includes information related to the main game symbols to be stopped, information related to the profit mode of the main game symbols that will be a jackpot (number of rounds of special games related to the main game symbols scheduled to be stopped, etc.) ), the number of reservations immediately after winning a reservation (the number of reservations on the winning side of the first main game side or the second main game side only, or the number of reservations on both the first main game side and the second main game side) It may be configured so that information related to the first main game side (
It is one of the random number delimited information in which each gaming state on the second main game side), a random number value (or random number range), and a win/fail lottery result are linked and grouped, and for example, a probability fluctuation game state. Even if it is a non-probability fluctuating gaming state, it is a loss, even if it is a probability fluctuating gaming state or a non-probability fluctuating gaming state, it is a win, and if it is a probability fluctuating gaming state, it is a win, but it is a non-probability fluctuating gaming state. If so, then it is a loss, etc.).

Next, in step 1318, after storing the second main game content determination random number, in step 1334 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and Determine whether the execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1334 (second), in step 1338 (second), the reservation control means MJ30, based on the reservation information (win/fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number), determines the stored win/fail result related to the reservation and the stopped symbol. Determine in advance. Next, in step 1340 (second), the reservation control means MJ30 uses a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting a command related to the newly generated suspension validity result and stop symbol information to the sub-main control section SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

Next, in step 1342 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 pre-determines the fluctuation mode random number delimiter information and fluctuation mode group related to the stored suspension based on the suspension information (random number for determining fluctuation mode). Regarding the mode random number delimiter information and the variable mode group, see the main game table 3 in FIGS. 32 and 33), and proceed to step 1344 (second). Next, in step 1344 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to the new hold occurrence (a hold generation command for the second main game content determining random number, a command related to the variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) to the sub. The command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (it is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400). .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1334 (second), in step 1336 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 determines that the main game time shortening flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. Determine whether or not. If YES in step 1336 (second), the process moves to step 1344 (second). On the other hand, if No in step 1336 (second), the process moves to step 1338 (second).

Note that in steps 1308 and 1318, the first main game content determining random number and the second main game content determining random number are stored, but the main game content determining random number is stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board. When storing the ``main game content determining random number'', secure a dedicated storage area and store only the information related to the ``main game content determining random number'' in the byte that stores the information related to the ``main game content determining random number'' (various timers It is preferable to configure the system so that other information such as values is not stored (when operating other data stored in the same byte, the information related to the main game content determining random number may be rewritten due to noise etc.). (to prevent it from being put away). In addition, regarding the winning lottery random number, changes in the gaming state (changes in the gaming state related to the pending that have already been recorded) between the time the winning lottery random number is acquired and the winning lottery based on the winning lottery random number are executed. In addition to changes, there is a possibility that the gaming state may change due to a new hold, so it is impossible to predict the gaming state at the time of the winning/losing drawing related to the random number. The lottery random number is stored until it is executed. In addition, in the second embodiment, a command to the sub-main control unit SM regarding reservation information can be sent only when a reservation occurs regarding the first main game in the non-time reduction gaming state, while in the time reduction gaming state In the above, the transmission was configured so that it could be sent only when a hold related to the second main game occurred, but regardless of the game state, whether it is a hold related to the first main game or a hold related to the second main game. First, the command may be transmitted, and in such a case, the sub-main control unit SM may be configured to determine whether or not to use the received command. Further, a specific example of the command related to the result information sent to the sub-main control unit SM is "D000H: Miss, D001H: Miss if low accuracy, win if high accuracy, D002H: Win with both low accuracy and high accuracy." Yes, a specific example of the command related to the stop symbol information to be sent to the sub-main control unit SM is "D100H: 16R probability variation winning, D101H: 16R non-probability variation winning, D102H: 2R probability variation winning", and sends it to the sub-main control unit SM. A specific example of the command related to the variation mode random number delimiter information to be transmitted is "D200H: delimiter 1, D201H: delimiter 2, D202H: delimiter 3".

Next, FIGS. 41 and 42 (main game table 3) are the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) in the second embodiment. This is an example. The difference from this embodiment is that variation mode groups and variation mode random number delimiter information are provided. That is, in the second embodiment, for a certain random number value (or random number range), variation mode group and variation mode random number delimiter information are provided. It is configured to determine random number delimiter information, and the number of variation mode groups (number of random numbers separated), variation time, and random number range of variation mode groups may differ depending on the gaming state and winning/failure lottery results (e.g. , the range of random numbers can be different even in the same group 1), and by transmitting the variation mode random number delimiter information to the sub side, the variation mode groups according to these gaming states can be changed to the sub side. It is structured so that it can be derived by In other words, if the gaming state changes between the time the hold occurs and the time the hold expires, the variation mode group scheduled at the time the hold occurs and the variation mode group executed when the hold expires may be different. (For example, when the hold occurred, the variable mode group was scheduled to be Group 1 because it was a non-time-reduced gaming state, but when the hold expired, the time-shortened gaming state entered, so the actual variable mode group became Group 2.) However, regarding variation mode random number delimiter information to which a common variation mode group is assigned across all gaming states, at the time the sub-side receives the variation mode random number delimiter information (the subsequent gaming state It becomes possible to normally execute a so-called pending look-ahead effect (without considering transitions). In addition, the fluctuation mode random number delimiter information in FIGS. 32 and 33 includes whether the fluctuation is on the first main game side or the second main game side, whether the lottery result is a win or a loss, and whether the lottery result is a win or a loss. Although it has been configured to form different fluctuation mode random number delimiter information depending on whether the state is a time-reducing gaming state or a non-time-reducing gaming state, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether the fluctuation is on the first main game side or not. One variation mode random number delimiter including whether it is a variation on the second main game side, whether the lottery result is a win or a loss, and whether the gaming state is a time-reducing gaming state or a non-time-reducing gaming state. It may be configured to form information. In addition, in order to cause the second main game to be suspended during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state, which is an irregular symbol variation, the first main game symbol related to the loss in the time reduction gaming state is The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that short-time variation modes are not selected regardless of the number of reservations (for example, all variation times are 5 seconds or more). Note that the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the number of reservations is the first main game reservation. This is the number of games pending, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, FIG. 43 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2003 (second), that is, after executing the initial processing in step 2002, in step 2003 (second), the sub-main control unit SM Based on the information received from the control board M side), the pending number (for example, the drawing pending counter value) is restored. Please note that information related to the current performance and pre-reading performance will not be restored (also, information related to pending content will not be resent from the main side), and the "Preparing" screen will be displayed until the start of the next change. . With this configuration, if a power outage occurs when the background effect is "Angel Zone Background", which will be described later, the information stored on the sub side will be lost, so the power outage will be After the return, there is no information that the trigger is on hold, and the background effect will be changed from the "angel zone background" to another background effect (background effect such as a flat stage, etc., which will be described later). As a result, if a discrepancy occurs between the hold information stored on the main side and the hold information stored on the sub side due to a power outage (for example, due to a power outage or noise when the power is restored), Also, it is possible to avoid a situation where the main side is fluctuating with low expectations while the sub side executes a zone performance with high expectations. Note that the processing after the power outage is restored is not limited to this, and even after the power outage is restored, the information that the trigger is on hold that was stored immediately before the power outage is restored, and the " It may also be configured to maintain the "angel zone background". In such a configuration, for example, an evacuation area is provided on the sub side that can maintain information even during a power outage, and when a power outage occurs, information related to the performance is backed up to the evacuation area, and it is possible to recover from a power outage. The configuration can be configured to restore the information backed up at the time of the backup. In addition, it is also possible to configure the system to receive information regarding the contents of the hold from the main side again when the power is restored, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation stops, and when a hold occurs (even regarding holds other than the newly generated hold). Good {Although not particularly shown in this example, the main side is configured so that only information related to the number of pending requests is sent (information related to the content of the pending requests is not sent) upon recovery from a power outage. . Therefore, the information related to the hold that existed at the time of the power outage does not exist after the power outage is restored, so it becomes impossible to perform pre-reading effects for the hold (in addition, when the power is restored, the hold information cannot be executed from the main side). (The system may be configured to receive information related to the hold, and may be configured to execute a prefetch effect for the hold.) In addition, if a power outage occurs while the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) are changing, if the main side does not have a function to maintain the information at the time of the power outage, the main side will update the changes. A darkened screen (for example, a screen displaying "Preparing", etc.) will be displayed until the end command is received. Note that in the second embodiment, switching the background effect to display the "angel zone background" as the background effect may be referred to as transitioning to the "angel zone."

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The differences from this embodiment are step 2120 (second) to step 2128 (second), step 2550 (second), step 2600 (second), and step 2650 (second), that is, step 2104 After adding 1 to the drawing holding counter, in step 2120 (second), the drawing holding information display control means SM22 displays the new holding validity result and stopped symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side. The command related to this is temporarily stored in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2122 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays hold information (particularly, variation mode group, variation mode random number delimiter information) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. , etc.) are temporarily stored in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. In addition, if the information regarding the win/fail result, stop symbol, variation mode group, variation mode random number delimiter information is not transmitted from the main side, in step 2120 (second) or step 2122 (second), The information will not be temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area. Next, in step 2124 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether the new reservation is a reservation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2124 (second), in step 2550 (second), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 executes a first main game winning time look-ahead determination process, which will be described later, and in step 2126 (second). to move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2124 (second), in step 2600 (second), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 executes a second main game winning time look-ahead determination process, which will be described later, and executes step 2126 (second). Move on to 2).

Next, in step 2126 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new hold has information indicating that it is a trigger hold. (Information indicating that the trigger is pending is added at step 2576 or step 2622). If Yes in step 2126 (second), in step 2650 (second), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 executes a prefetch pending content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2118. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2126 (second), the process also moves to step 2118.

On the other hand, after subtracting 1 from the drawing reservation counter in step 2112, in step 2128 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the reservation information related to the symbol change (in particular, the result of winning or not, the stopped symbol information, (variation mode group and variation mode random number delimiter information) are deleted from the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, the remaining pending information is shifted, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time look-ahead determination process, which is related to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. 44. This process will be explained in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former pre-reading lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2552, the pending pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and places the second main game pending (first main game) in the pending state. It is determined whether or not there is any hold-up that would be cleared with priority over the gaming side. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the suspension prefetch effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether the current gaming state is not a time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, the suspension pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is a suspension with information indicating that it is a trigger suspension among the suspensions. Determine whether or not there is. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the pre-read lottery when winning a prize (first main game pre-read lottery when winning a prize, pre-read lottery when second main game wins). In the case of Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the reservation pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is no reservation that will be a jackpot among the reservations before the new reservation. Determine whether If YES in step 2560, the process moves to step 2562.

Next, in the process related to the latter pre-read lottery, first, in step 2562, the hold pre-read effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a hold that becomes a jackpot. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the hold look-ahead performance execution possibility determining means SM26k executes a win-win look-ahead lottery for the new hold with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3), The process moves to step 2574. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2562, in step 2568, the reservation pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new reservation variation mode group is group 3 or not. Determine whether In this manner, in the second embodiment, when determining whether or not the pre-read lottery can be executed, the fluctuation mode group is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the pre-read lottery can be executed. In addition, when determining whether or not the pre-read lottery can be executed, it may be configured to take into consideration the variation mode random number delimiter information to determine whether or not the pre-read lottery can be executed. In the case of Yes in step 2568, in step 2570, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k executes a win-win look-ahead lottery for the new hold with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/10), The process moves to step 2574. On the other hand, if No in step 2568, the process also moves to step 2574.

Next, in step 2574, the pending pre-read performance execution possibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2574, in step 2576, the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k sets a "trigger holding" to the new holding that has won the winning pre-reading lottery, which is stored in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process moves to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2552 (when the second main game pending exists in the pending), in step 2578, the pending pre-read performance execution possibility determining means SM26k temporarily stores the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information that it is a "trigger hold" from the stored information on the hold (if there is no hold that has the information that it is a trigger hold, do not execute this process and proceed to the next step). ), and then the process moves to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}. Note that also in the case of No in step 2554, step 2558, step 2560, or step 2574, the process moves to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}. In addition, in the case where there is a hold on the second main game side (occurrence), the processing in step 2578 is performed on the newly generated second This configuration is to avoid a situation in which the pre-read performance over a plurality of variations is not executed normally because the suspension on the main game side is used up first, so the scheduled variation order is not followed. In addition, as a prohibited condition for pre-read lottery, the condition that there is no reservation of a specific fluctuation mode group (or reservation of specific fluctuation mode random number delimiter information) in the reservations before the new reservation is set as a prohibited condition. Good too.

Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the second main game winning time look-ahead determination process, which is related to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) in FIG. This process will be explained in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former pre-read lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2602, the suspended pre-read performance execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether the current gaming state is a time-reduced gaming state. Determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the hold pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is a hold having information indicating that it is a trigger hold within the hold. Determine whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the reservation pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is no reservation that will be a jackpot among the reservations before the new reservation. Determine whether If YES in step 2606, the process moves to step 2608.

Next, in the process related to the latter pre-read lottery, first, in step 2608, the reservation pre-reading effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new reservation is a reservation that becomes a jackpot. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the suspension look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines whether or not to execute the suspension look-ahead performance with a predetermined probability (lower probability than the winning rate of the first main game prize winning lottery for the jackpot hold). Yes, in this example, a pre-read lottery is executed to win a prize (1/5), and the process moves to step 2620. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the reservation pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new reservation variation mode group is group C or not. Determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2616, the suspension look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines that the new suspension is possible with a predetermined probability (a probability lower than the winning rate of the first main game winning lottery for the losing suspension). Yes, in this example, a pre-read lottery is executed to win a prize (1/15), and the process moves to step 2620. On the other hand, if No in step 2612, the process also moves to step 2620.

Next, in step 2620, the pending pre-read performance execution possibility determining means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k sets a "trigger holding" to the new holding that has won the winning pre-reading lottery, which is stored in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process moves to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}. Note that even in the case of No in step 2602, step 2604, step 2606, or step 2620, the process moves to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}.

In this way, in the second embodiment, in both cases where a new hold is a jackpot or a loss, the pre-read lottery for the hold on the first main game side is more effective than the pre-read lottery for the hold on the second main game side. It is easier to win in the lottery (pre-read lottery winning rate when the 1st main game reservation is a reservation that will result in a jackpot = 1/3 > Pre-read lottery when the 2nd main game reservation is a reservation that will result in a jackpot) Winning rate = 1/5, look-ahead lottery winning rate when the first main game hold is a hold that will result in a loss = 1/10 > Look-ahead lottery win rate when the second main game hold is a hold that will result in a jackpot = 1 /15). With this configuration, even in the appearance rate of "special symbols" as a look-ahead effect, "special symbols" related to the first main game side appear more often than "special symbols" related to the second main game side. It's getting easier.

Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the prefetch pending content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) in FIG. First, in step 2652, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether the trigger reservation is a reservation that will result in a jackpot. If Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of trigger pending with reference to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of jackpot), and performs the next process (step 2118). processing). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652, in step 2656, the display mode of the trigger hold is determined with reference to the hold display mode determination table (in case of failure), and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2118).

Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are a pending display mode determination table (for jackpot) and a pending display mode determining table (for loss). In the second embodiment, the types of display modes that can be selected when determining the display mode of the trigger hold that can change when executing the hold change effect by referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of jackpot) are rainbow colors, There are four display modes: red, green, and blue, and there are three types of display modes that can be selected when referring to the pending display mode determination table (in case of failure): red, green, and blue. A lottery will be drawn using a random number exclusively used when determining the mode. In addition, when referring to the pending display mode determination table (when winning a jackpot), red is the most likely to be selected, while when referring to the pending display mode determining table (when losing), blue is the most likely to be selected, and the pending change effect The expectation of jackpot for each pending display mode (the expectation of hitting a jackpot due to the symbol change related to the pending) is that rainbow colors are selected only when there is a jackpot, and for colors other than rainbow colors, the expectation level is The order is red, green, and blue from highest to lowest. Note that the display modes that can be changed are merely examples, and there is no problem even if the types are increased or decreased or the colors that can be changed are changed. In addition, in this example, the display color of the pending item is configured to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. ), it may be configured to suggest the gaming state after the execution of the special game. In such a configuration, in particular, during a probability-variable gaming state, the display color of the pending state indicates the degree of expectation of transitioning to the probability-variable gaming state after execution of the special game in the event that a jackpot is achieved during the pending state. (For example, if the pending display color is red, the probability variation expectation is high; if it is blue, the probability variation expectation is small, etc.) By configuring this, it is possible to determine whether the probability variation gaming state advantageous to the player will continue or end. It is possible to carry out effective performances that stir up excitement.

In this way, in the second embodiment, when the hold change performance is executed, the jackpot expectation level can vary depending on the display mode selected from a plurality of types of hold display modes. Further, it may be configured such that the holding change effect can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the look-ahead effect (from the timing of winning the look-ahead lottery until the end of the variation of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold). With this configuration, for example, in the case where the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the look-ahead effect, if the display mode of the change in the hold change effect in the first hold change effect is blue, the second hold change effect is The display mode of the hold that changes with the hold change performance is set to green or red, that is, the display mode of the hold that changes with the hold change performance is changed (ranked up) to the one with a high expectation of jackpot every time the hold change performance is executed. It is desirable to configure the system so that the player's expectations are not spoiled. Furthermore, the effect related to the hold display change is not limited to this, and as a result, it may be possible to provide a form of effect that does not involve the hold display change. For example, the hold trembles when the change starts (or when the hold expires). There may be a presentation mode in which the effect occurs and the pending display does not change as it is (so-called false pattern), and a presentation mode in which the pending display change is performed thereafter.

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is in step 2206 (second) and step 2250 (second), the purpose of which is to stop the first decorative pattern (including the temporary stop), especially the above-mentioned " The purpose of this invention is to change the factors for determining a special symbol (that is, a symbol that does not mean a jackpot but foretells that a jackpot may occur in the future). That is, after turning on the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2204, in step 2206 (second), the design display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n and the ready-to-reach effect display content determining means SM25n) refers to the symbol information (variation mode related to the main game symbol) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the contents of the design variation, and determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbol. {For example, if the variation mode related to the main game symbol is a short-time variation, non-reach, and if it is a long-term variation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b and the ready-to-reach performance related information temporary storage means SM25b), and the process moves to step 2208.

Further, in step 2216, after determining the contents of the decorative pattern presentation and setting the display update timing and the display update contents, in step 2250 (second), the drawing display contents determining means SM21n determines the preview presentation and decoration, which will be described later. A figure stop symbol determination process is executed and the process moves to step 2218. That is, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (including the time of temporary stop) will be determined in the advance notice production/drawing stop symbol determination process, which will be described later.

Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the notice production/drawing stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) in FIG. 48. First, in step 2252, the preview effect display control means SM24 refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether the fluctuation is a fluctuation related to trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the preview performance display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entry flag in the flag area of the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2260, the preview performance display control means SM24 determines the content of the preview performance from the "special preview performance candidates". Here, the "special preview performance candidate" is a preview performance candidate that is referred to when determining the preview performance when the background performance is the "angel zone background" described later. Next, in step 2262, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stopping symbol (temporary stopping symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stopping symbol of the main game symbol, and performs the next process (the process of step 2218). ). Here, in step 2262, it is desirable to configure so that the above-mentioned "special symbol" is not selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol. In the case of "background" (i.e., a state where the existence of a hold with a high expectation of a jackpot has already been announced), the above-mentioned "special symbol" (i.e., although it does not mean a jackpot, it indicates that a jackpot may occur after that). This is because if the symbol foretelling the game) is stopped and displayed, similar information will be notified twice, which may result in an incomprehensible performance for the player.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2252, in step 2256, the preview effect display control means SM24 refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether trigger reservation exists in the reservation. In the case of Yes in step 2256, in step 2258, the preview performance display control means SM24 refers to the flag area of the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the angel zone entry flag is off. If YES in step 2258, the process moves to step 2264. On the other hand, if No in step 2258, the process moves to step 2260.

Next, in step 2264, the preview performance display control means SM24 determines the content of the preview performance from the "normal preview performance candidates". Here, the "normal preview performance candidate" is a preview performance candidate that is referred to when determining the preview performance when the background performance is other than the "angel zone background" described later. Next, in step 2266, the preview performance display control means SM24 turns on the angel zone entry flag in the flag area of the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2268, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines the stop pattern in the middle row of the first decorative pattern to be a "special pattern", and based on the information regarding the stop pattern of the main game pattern, The temporarily stopped symbols for the left column and the right column are determined (different symbols from the left column and the right column will be temporarily stopped), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2218).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2256, in step 2270, the preview effect display control means SM24 determines whether the variation mode group of the variation in question is group 3. Changes related to the suspension of Group 3 who were not eligible for the Angel Zone Transition Lottery, which will be described later, and who did not win the Pre-Read Lottery (pre-read lottery at the time of winning) (the trigger was not put on hold), will be included in the Angel Zone Transition Lottery, which will be described later. will be subject to a lottery. In the case of Yes in step 2270, in step 2272, the preview effect display control means SM24 determines that the fluctuation is a pseudo continuous fluctuation (a fluctuation in which the pseudo fluctuation is executed at least once, and in this example, it is exemplified in FIGS. 21 and 22. A-1, A-2, B-2, etc.) is a variation to be executed. If Yes in step 2272, in step 2274, the preview effect display control means SM24 changes the background effect to the angel zone background during the angel zone transition lottery (changes the background effect to the angel zone background during the change), which is a winning lottery with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/10). (Lottery of whether or not) is executed. Next, in step 2276, the preview effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the angel zone transition lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2276, in step 2278, the preview performance display control means SM24 determines the preview performance content from "normal preview performance candidates → special preview performance candidates after the special symbol temporary stop timing" (for example, in FIG. 21 In the case of A-1 and A-2, the preview performance content is determined from the "normal preview performance candidates" for up to 14 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, and after 14 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, which is the first middle row temporary stop timing. , the content of the preview performance is determined from the "special preview performance candidates"). Next, in step 2280, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 converts the temporary stop symbol in the middle row of the main game symbol for the first time (the first time in the pseudo continuous fluctuation) into a "special symbol" (the background effect is changed to an angel zone). Based on the information regarding the stop symbols of the main game symbol, the temporary stop symbols in the left and right rows of the first decorative symbol are set to be the same symbol (same as in the case of reach). (stopping mode)) and moves to the next process (the process of step 2218). It should be noted that the temporary stop symbol is a temporary stop symbol of a pseudo variation in a pseudo continuous variation, and may be hereinafter referred to as a pseudo continuous symbol.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2270, step 2272, or step 2276, in step 2282, the preview performance display control means SM24 determines the preview performance content from the "normal preview performance candidates". Next, in step 2284, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stopping symbol (temporary stopping symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stopping symbol of the main game symbol, and performs the next process (the process of step 2218). ).

In the second embodiment, in step 2274, an angel zone transition lottery is executed to determine whether or not the transition to the fluctuating angel zone is possible (the pseudo continuous symbol in the middle of fluctuation is set as a "special symbol", and the special symbol is Although it is configured to determine whether or not to move to the angel zone using the temporary stop as an opportunity, it is not limited to this, and the combination of the first pseudo consecutive pattern (the first middle row temporary stop pattern) and the preview effect. It may be configured such that a plurality of candidates are provided, and at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation, a combination of a pseudo continuous symbol and a preview performance is determined from among the combination candidates. Specifically, the combination candidates are "Pseudo consecutive pattern A, Preview effect 1" and "Pseudo continuous pattern A, Preview effect 2".
, "Pseudo consecutive pattern A, preview effect 3", "Pseudo continuous pattern A, preview effect 4", "Special symbol, preview effect 1", and "Special symbol, preview effect 2" are provided, and six possible combinations are provided, and the corresponding candidates are A combination of a pseudo-recurring pattern and a preview effect is determined by lottery from among them, and if a combination of a pseudo-recurring pattern and a preview effect where the pseudo-recurring pattern becomes a "special pattern" is selected, it will move to the angel zone during the change. It may be configured as follows. The method for determining the combination of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the preview performance is not limited to the pseudo-continuous variation, and may be used for other variation modes as well. Further, the combination is not limited to only the pseudo-sequential symbols and the preview effects, but may also include background effects, sound modes, and the like.

In addition, as a method for determining the preview effects, we first decided on the basic preview effects of the preview effects (e.g., a preview effect that can be executed regardless of the background effect being executed, a effect that is executed in the first half of a change, etc.). After that, based on the determined basic preview performance, a performance that is not a preview performance such as a background performance is determined, the determined performance (preview performance, background performance, etc.) is executed, and then, It may be configured to determine undetermined performances among the preview performances based on the basic preview performances and the determined performances that are not preview performances such as background performances (this determination method is repeated multiple times). , it may be configured to determine all of the preview performances to be executed in accordance with the variation). With this configuration, it is possible to determine the preview effects to be executed in the relevant variation at multiple timings, and the effects that occur when all the preview effects to be executed in the variation in question are determined at one timing. This makes it possible to reduce performance problems and the like. In this example, (1) "Determined stop": Determined stop is executed after a temporary stop, and if the determined and stopped symbol combination is a jackpot (three of the same symbol), the game will move to a special game. , If it is a loss (not a set of three of the same symbol), it will not move to the special game. (2) "Temporary stop": A temporary stop is executed before a confirmed stop (for example, due to swing fluctuation), and one time Pseudo fluctuations can be executed by temporarily stopping in the middle of a symbol fluctuation and then changing again. (3) If a "special symbol" is displayed when performing a look-ahead effect, the "special symbol" will be treated as a fixed stop. It is configured so that it can be displayed not only as a temporary stop before a confirmed stop. In addition, in this example, the fixed stop and final stop are synonymous, and "stop" is used for both fixed stop and temporary stop, but the stop symbol in the variation of the main game symbol is the fixed stop symbol. The stopping symbol in the variation of decorative symbols is used for both temporary stopping symbols and fixed stopping symbols (if it is stated that the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol is "777", etc., it is a stopping symbol. = It is a confirmed stop symbol).

Here, the lower part of the same figure is an image diagram showing an example of a preview effect/drawing stop pattern display. As shown in the upper part of the same image, in this example, when transitioning to the angel zone in this variation, under the situation where a normal background effect (an example of a background effect that is not an angel zone background effect) is being executed as a background effect, The "special symbol" is stopped as the first middle row temporary stop symbol. Further, with the temporary stop of the "special symbol" as a trigger, an angel zone background performance is executed as a background performance, and then the final stop symbol is stopped. In addition, in this example, the case of a jackpot is illustrated, but the background effect is configured to switch in the same way in the case of a loss. Decorative patterns may be random (different patterns), but may not be (same pattern) (="special pattern" may temporarily stop after reach)}.

In addition, as shown in the middle part of the same image, in this example, when other pseudo-continuous fluctuations that do not involve transition to the angel zone are performed (in the case of not winning the angel zone transition lottery), the background effect is a normal background effect. is being executed, "Pseudo continuous pattern A" is used as the first middle row temporary stop symbol (a temporary stop symbol that notifies the player that a pseudo continuous fluctuation is being executed, which is different from the "special symbol") ) will temporarily stop. Next, even after the "pseudo continuous pattern A" is temporarily stopped, the normal background effect is executed, and then the final stop pattern is stopped.

In addition, as shown in the lower part of the same image, in this example, in a situation where a normal background effect is being performed as a background effect, if a winning lottery is won while the decorative pattern is changing, it will stop when the change stops. As a pattern, the losing pattern (uneven pattern) stops. After that, the next variation is started, and the "special symbol" stops as the stop symbol of the variation (that is, the variation is a variation before entering the look-ahead angel zone). Next, when the "special symbol" stops, an angel zone background effect is executed as a background effect from the next variation (that is, the next variation is the first variation in the look-ahead zone). In addition, in this example, if a special symbol is displayed as a stop display (temporary stop display) in a symbol change related to the pending expiration schedule before the trigger hold, the temporary stop will not be made except for the confirmed stop (previous temporary stop). (It is not used when changing again after temporarily stopping as a stop symbol of pseudo fluctuation). In other words, in a symbol variation related to a pending expiration schedule before the trigger pending, the symbol variation related to the trigger pending starts from "the timing when the special symbol temporarily stops → the pseudo variation is executed, and the symbol variation becomes a loss". It cannot be performed until the angel zone background is displayed. In this way, in the second embodiment, by configuring the angel zone background effect to be executed when the "special symbol" stops (or temporarily stops), the player can stop the "special symbol". (or temporary stop), it is possible to recognize that the transition to the angel zone has occurred. This means that players can have a sense of anticipation for the stoppage (or temporary stoppage) of the "design".

In addition, as shown in the diagram, when a "special symbol" stops as a temporary stop symbol during pseudo-continuous fluctuation, the same numbers in the left column and right column stop (temporary stop). On the other hand, when a "special symbol" is stopped as the final stop symbol of the next change after winning the pre-read lottery, different numbers (random numbers) are configured to stop in the left column and right column. There is.

Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of background effect control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2506 (second), that is, in step 2504, after setting the "angel zone background" as the background effect, in step 2506 (second), the background effect display control means The SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and stores the fluctuation (part of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation) that triggered the transition to the "angel zone" (or the pending fluctuation). Such fluctuations) {The fluctuations that triggered the transition of the "Angel Zone" (or the fluctuations related to the hold) are the fluctuations related to the trigger hold, or the fluctuations that caused the transition to the angel zone} judge. If Yes in step 2506 (second), the process moves to step 2508, and if No, the process moves to step 2520.

By configuring as described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern as decorative patterns, and is configured to be able to execute a so-called pending look-ahead effect. In addition, when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as the first decorative symbol, a background change effect indicating that the expectation level for transition to the special game is increased is executed. Then, regarding the hold that is extinguished before the hold that triggers the hold look-ahead effect (trigger hold), the "special symbol" is displayed as a fixed stop pattern when the first decorative pattern changes when the hold is extinguished. Therefore, the meaning of the "special symbol" being stopped and displayed in this case is "the symbol variation has ended" and "the expectation level for transition to the special game has increased." On the other hand, regarding trigger hold, a "special symbol" can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol when the first decorative symbol changes when the hold is extinguished, so the meaning of the "special symbol" being stopped and displayed in this case is , ``symbol fluctuations will change again'' and ``expectations for transition to special games have increased.'' In this way, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment creates a novel performance method in which the same type of "special symbol" has different meanings depending on the timing (or situation) in which it is stopped and displayed. It is possible to do so.

In addition, in the second embodiment, regarding a hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold, there is a case where a "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as a fixed stop pattern when the first decorative pattern changes when the hold is extinguished. , Regarding the trigger hold, it is configured so that the same type of ``special pattern'' is displayed when the ``special pattern'' is stopped and displayed as a temporary stop pattern when the first decorative pattern changes when the hold is extinguished. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "special symbol" in the former case may be "special symbol A", and the "special symbol" in the latter case may be "special symbol B". With this configuration, it is possible to clearly convey to the player the meaning of the stop display of the "special symbols" for both players. Further, the probability that the "special symbol" will be displayed in the former case may be configured to be lower than the probability that the "special symbol" will be displayed in the latter case.

In addition, in this example, the number of symbol rows of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is 3, and the effective line is 1 line, but there is no problem even if these are changed. For example, (1) "Special pattern" When the "special symbol" stops, the symbol row and/or active line increases (for example, the effective line becomes 9 lines). (2) When the "special symbol" stops, the symbol row and/or the active line increases. The number of lines decreases (for example, the symbol row becomes two rows and one of the symbols stops, resulting in a reach state, and furthermore, the symbol row becomes one row = a hit is almost definitely notified, and the rest The system may be configured so that the difference in the profit rate given to the player is notified by the type of symbol that is stopped and displayed.

(Example 1 of change from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the "special symbol" has a different meaning depending on the timing (or situation) when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed. By further increasing the linkage with the above, it is possible to create even more innovative production methods. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 2220 (2nd variation 1) to step 2224 (2nd variation 1), and the purpose thereof is to determine when the hold is extinguished with respect to the hold whose display mode has changed due to the hold look-ahead effect. The content of the presentation is to be configured to be associated with the changed display mode. That is, in step 2216, after determining the contents of the decorative pattern presentation and setting the display update timing and display update contents, in step 2220 (second change 1), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 displays the drawing pending information. Referring to the temporary storage means SM22b, it is determined whether the pending display mode related to the change is a dedicated effect display mode (a specific pending display mode different from other pending display modes, and in this example, red). do. If Yes in step 2220 (second change 1), in step 2222 (second change 1), the preview performance display control means SM24 determines the preview performance content from the "dedicated preview performance candidates". Here, the "dedicated preview performance candidate" is a performance candidate that is selected only when the special performance display mode (in this example, red) is on hold, which is a specific hold display mode. An example of this is configuring a battle effect with a specific enemy character to be executed. In addition, it is desirable that the symbol variation related to the "dedicated preview performance candidate" is configured such that the jackpot expectation level is relatively high compared to other preview performance candidates. Next, in step 2223 (second change 1), the preview performance display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entry flag in the flag area of the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2224 (second variation 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stopping symbol (temporary stopping symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stopping symbol of the main game symbol, and in step 2218 to move to. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 2220 (second variation 1), the process moves to step 2250 (second variation). Here, if it is configured so that the "special symbol" is easily selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, it is possible to ensure that the pending display mode is the exclusive effect display mode and that the first decorative symbol is It is possible to further improve the linkage with the fact that a "special symbol" is more likely to be selected as a stop symbol (temporary stop symbol).

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, the special performance display mode (in this example, red), which is a specific pending display mode, is suspended as a preview performance candidate. By configuring so that the "dedicated preview performance candidate", which is a performance candidate that is selected only in the change related to the change, can be selected, when executing a pending change performance (a performance in which the pending display mode changes) based on the winning of the pre-read lottery. , it is possible to set up a preview effect that is executed only when the hold display mode changes to a specific hold display mode, and by increasing the expectation of a jackpot when the hold display mode is executed, the player is able to predict the hold when the hold changes. Attention will be paid to the display color (the manner in which the pending change is executed), which will increase the interest of the game. In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the effect to be executed due to the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is not determined when the trigger hold occurs, but is determined when the trigger hold is extinguished. By configuring it like this, "Trigger hold occurs → Hold display mode is determined and is displayed in that display mode → Trigger hold is cleared → Hold display related to trigger hold It can be configured such that the effect to be executed in the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is determined based on the mode. Note that there is no problem in applying the configuration related to the retained digestion transmission image to be described later to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment.

In addition, in modification example 1 from the second embodiment, when a hold change effect is executed as a so-called hold look-ahead effect and the hold display mode becomes a dedicated effect display mode (in this example, red), the preview effect content is configured to be selected from "dedicated preview performance candidates", but the pending change performance is executed at the timing when the "special symbol" stops as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol. It may be configured such that "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are provided as the "special symbol", and "special symbol A" is stopped. In this case, the holding display mode may be changed to a color other than red as a holding change effect, and when the "special symbol B" stops, the hold display mode may be changed to a red hold display mode as a hold change effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to further enhance the linkage between the so-called pending look-ahead performance and the "special symbol".

(Example 2 of change from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, it is configured to further enhance the linkage between the so-called pending look-ahead effect and the "special symbol", but the first main game side and the second main game side The strength of the characteristics may be different, and an example of such a configuration is referred to as a second modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2226 (second), step 2250(1) (second variation 2), and step 2250(2) (second variation 2), the purpose of which is to The object of the present invention is to control the selection rate of "special symbols" to be changed depending on whether it is a symbol variation on the game side or a second main game side. That is, in step 2216, after determining the content of the decorative pattern presentation and setting the display update timing and display update content, in step 2226 (second change 2), the design display content determining means SM21n temporarily stores the main side information. Referring to the means SM11b, it is determined whether the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2226 (second change 2), in step 2250 (1) (second change 2), the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the first main game preview performance/drawing stop symbol, which will be described later. The process is executed and the process moves to step 2218. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2226 (second change 2), in step 2250 (2) (second change 2), the drawing display content determining means SM21n stops the second main game preview performance/drawing, which will be described later. The symbol determination process is executed and the process moves to step 2218.

Next, FIG. 53 shows the first main game preview performance/drawing stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250(1) (second variation 2) in FIG. 52 in the second modification from the second embodiment. This is a flowchart. The processing of this subroutine is the same as the advance notice production/drawing stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), so a description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the second embodiment, this process is the same process executed on the first main game side and the second main game side, but in the second modification example from the second embodiment, the same process is executed on the first main game side and the second main game side. The purpose is to execute separate processes on the first main game side and the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 54 shows the second main game preview performance/drawing stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250(2) (second variation 2) in FIG. 52 in the second modification from the second embodiment. This is a flowchart. Since the processing of this subroutine is similar to the advance notice performance/drawing stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), only the differences from this processing will be described in detail. The difference from step 2250 (second) notice production/drawing stop pattern determination process is step 2286 (second change 2) and step 2288 (second change 2). If there is no trigger hold, in step 2286 (second variation 2), the preview performance display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines that the fluctuation is a fluctuation related to group C. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2286 (2nd variation 2), in step 2272, the preview effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether the fluctuation is one in which a pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2288 (second change 2), the preview performance display control means SM24 calculates a predetermined probability (1, which is the winning rate of the angel zone transfer lottery on the first main game side executed in step 2274). An angel zone transfer lottery is executed in which the probability of winning is lower than /10 (in this example, 1/30), and the process moves to step 2276. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 2286 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 2282.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the second modification example from the second embodiment, the angel zone transition lottery (pseudo By configuring the lottery to determine whether or not the "special symbol" will temporarily stop due to continuous variation and the angel zone background will be displayed as a background effect, the probability of winning will be different. It becomes possible to change the selection rate of the "special symbol" in the first decorative pattern depending on whether it is a symbol variation on the first main game side or a symbol variation on the second main game side. It is possible to widen the range of performance and increase the interest of the performance by making the performance tendency accompanying the variation of the symbols on the second main game side different from the performance tendency accompanying the symbol variation on the second main game side.

In addition, in the second modification from the second embodiment, since the second main game hold cannot become trigger hold in the non-time saving gaming state, the second main game hold cannot be held in the non-time saving gaming state. Pending look-ahead effect targeting pending on the gaming side is not executed. Therefore, in the non-time saving gaming state, compare the appearance rate of "special symbols" related to the pending look-ahead effect on the first main game side and the appearance rate of "special symbols" related to the hold look-ahead effect on the second main game side. However, the appearance rates will be different (higher on the first main game side). Furthermore, as mentioned above, whether the lottery probability for temporarily stopping the "special symbol" in pseudo continuous variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side or a symbol variation on the second main game side. (The "special symbol" is more likely to temporarily stop in response to symbol fluctuations on the first main game side), and the ease with which trigger hold occurs also depends on the hold on the first main game side. , differs depending on whether the hold is on the second main game side (the hold on the first main game side is more likely to become a trigger hold), so a trigger hold occurs → a hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold At the time of extinguishing, the "special symbol" is confirmed and displayed (the so-called pending look-ahead effect is executed) → The "special symbol" is temporarily stopped when the trigger is extinguished (so-called pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed). It is also possible to configure the system so that the probability that the series of effects will occur is higher on the first main game side than on the second main game side. In addition, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the appearance rate of symbol fluctuations in which the "special symbol" temporarily stops due to pseudo-continuous fluctuations in symbol fluctuations related to the first main game symbol, and pseudo-continuity in symbol fluctuations related to the second main game symbol. The difference between the appearance rate of the symbol fluctuation in which the “special symbol” temporarily stops due to the fluctuation, the appearance rate of the “special symbol” as a look-ahead effect in the symbol fluctuation related to the first main game symbol, and the second main game symbol When comparing the difference with the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as a look-ahead performance in symbol variation, the difference related to pseudo continuous variation (the former difference) is smaller.

In addition, in this example, (1) the selection probability (appearance rate) of the "special symbol" may be the same on the first main game side and the second main game side, and (2) there is no hold that will result in a jackpot. If it exists in the second main game pending, the "special symbol" related to the look-ahead effect will not appear due to the fluctuation of the second main game symbol, (3) If the pending that will result in a jackpot exists in the first main game pending (4) In the case of a fluctuation of the second main game symbol that results in a jackpot, a "special symbol" related to the look-ahead effect may appear in the variation of the first main game symbol, and a "special symbol" related to the pseudo-continuous variation It may be configured such that (5) "special symbols" related to pseudo-continuous fluctuations appear or are likely to occur when the first main game symbol is a fluctuation that results in a jackpot. In addition, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the "special symbol" is configured so that it can appear both during the look-ahead presentation and during the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, but the "special symbol A" is configured so that it can appear only during the look-ahead presentation. "Special symbol" and "Special symbol B" are "special symbols" that can only appear during pseudo-continuous fluctuations, and the appearance rates of "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are compared to determine the second main game symbol. It may be configured such that "special symbol A" does not appear in the variation, "special symbol B" has a low appearance rate in the variation of the second main game symbol, etc.

(Example 3 of modification from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the background change effect and the hold change effect are configured to be executable as the so-called pending look-ahead effect, but new gameplay is created by changing the execution mode of the hold look-ahead effect. Is possible. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as modification example 3 from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2700 (second variation 3) and step 2750 (second variation 3), that is, after executing the decorative pattern display content determination process in step 2200, step 2700 ( In the second change 3), the sub-control board S executes a pending display mode change control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2750 (second change 3), the sub-control board S executes a pending digestion transmission image display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2300.

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 55 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2130 (second variation 3), the purpose of which is to notify that a certain hold is being used up (symbols are changing) when a certain hold is being used up. The purpose of this invention is to configure the system so that it can display images. That is, in step 2112, after subtracting 1 from the drawing reservation counter value, in step 2130 (second variation 3), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the reservation information (in particular, the display mode) related to the symbol change. and fluctuation mode group information), "pending digestion transmission image information" The preview performance related information is temporarily stored (overwritten and stored) in the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b as the information related to the "suspended digest transmission image" that is to be continuously displayed even after the preview performance has been digested), and the process moves to step 2128 (second). do. In addition, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the pre-read determination process when winning a prize in the second main game is deleted (the pre-read lottery is executed only on the first main game side).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time look-ahead determination process related to the subroutine of step 2550 (second variation 3) in FIG. 56 in the third modification from the second embodiment. Here, this process will be explained by dividing it into two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery, first, in step 2580, the hold pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new hold is the second main game. It is determined whether or not the game is on hold (a hold that is extinguished with priority over the first main game hold). In the case of Yes in step 2580, in step 2582, the suspension prefetch performance execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether the current gaming state is not a time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2584, in step 2586, the hold pre-reading performance execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the holding change mode group before the new hold is group 1. (There is no hold that would result in a jackpot, hold that could have a long fluctuation time, or trigger hold before the new hold). If YES in step 2584, the process moves to step 2586.

Next, in the process related to the latter pre-read lottery, first, in step 2586, the hold pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold variation mode group is Determine whether or not it is in group 3 {Fluctuations related to suspensions whose variation mode group is group 3 will be affected even if the number of suspensions at the start of the fluctuation is large (for example, the number of suspensions is 2 or 3) , the fluctuation time is relatively long}. In the case of Yes in step 2586, in step 2588, the reservation pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines the possibility of executing the reservation with a predetermined probability (for example, if the reservation is a jackpot reservation, the probability is 2/3, and if the reservation is a loss reservation, the probability is 1/8). When winning a prize, a pre-read lottery is executed. Next, in step 2590, the pending pre-read performance execution possibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2590, in step 2591, the suspension look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k adds information to the effect that it is a "trigger hold" to the new hold that won the prize-winning look-ahead lottery, and displays the hold. The mode is determined to be ``yellow-shaped hold'' and is stored in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the pre-read lottery at the time of winning, and is a hold that can be displayed in a different display form from the normal hold. Next, in step 2592, the suspension look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines whether or not the new suspension (trigger suspension) is appropriate, and the suspension change plan until the trigger suspension is exhausted, based on the current number of suspensions. For example, determine an execution plan for holding a green box at the start of the next variation, changing to a red box at the start of the next variation, etc., and store it in the pending information temporary storage area of the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, The process moves to the next process (the process of step 2118).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2580 (when the new reservation is the second main game reservation), in step 2596, the reservation pre-read performance execution possibility determining means SM26k temporarily stores the drawing reservation information in the temporary storage means SM22b. In addition to deleting the information that it is a "trigger hold" from the information related to the first main game hold that is being held (if there is no hold that has information indicating that it is a trigger hold, this process is executed Step 2594 changes the pending display mode to "normal pending" (for example, white pending) and stores it in the pending information temporary storage area of the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. to move to. Note that if the answer is No in step 2582, step 2584, step 2586, or step 2590, the process also moves to step 2594.

Next, in step 2594, the reservation pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines the reservation display mode of the new reservation as "normal reservation" (for example, white reservation), and stores the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. The pending information is stored in the temporary storage area, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2118). Here, in the processing of steps 2596 and 2594, when a hold on the second main game side exists (occurs), in a gaming machine such as this example where the second main game side is prioritized, the processing of steps 2596 and 2594 is performed to Since the hold on the second main game side is used up first, the planned change order is not followed, and a pre-read effect that covers multiple changes (for example, a hold display mode change effect based on a hold change plan) is not executed normally. This is a configuration to avoid this.

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 55 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2208 (second variation 3), step 2222 (second variation 3) to step 2226 (second variation 3), and step 2228 (second variation 3), that is, After determining the variation mode of the first decorative pattern in step 2206 (second step), in step 2208 (second variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display The content determining means SM25n) refers to the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta and determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbol {for example, if the variation mode related to the main game symbol is a short-time variation, In the case of long-term fluctuations, reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.) is determined and stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (as well as the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b and the reach performance related information temporary storage means SM25b). Memorize temporarily. Next, in step 2216, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the validity result of the main game symbol and the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Based on the variation mode, determine the decorative pattern presentation content by referring to the decorative pattern presentation table SM21ta-2 (for example, decorative pattern presentation table 1 to decorative pattern presentation table 2) in the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, The display update timing and display update contents are set and temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2222 (second variation 3), the drawing display content determining means SM21n randomly determines the content of the preview effect to be executed during the variation. Here, as shown in the preview content image diagram on the right side of the figure, in this example, the content of the preview performance that can be executed differs depending on the image set as the background performance (so-called stay stage). The content lottery of the preview performance to be executed may be executed based on an appropriate random number obtained by the sub-main control unit SM, the result of the change, the winning symbol, the time of the change, etc. Here, the content of the preview performance marked with an asterisk in the same image is the specific preview performance in this example, and is configured so that different specific preview performances can be executed based on the stay stage (specific preview performance). (This will be explained in the processing below). Furthermore, the content of the preview performance (in this example, a performance that can be performed before a reach performance, etc.) is not limited to this. (In that case, you may change the display mode of the suspended digestion conveyance image and the suspension described later in the pseudo continuous performance, or change the suspended digestion conveyance image described later by the preview performance executed during the pseudo continuous performance. (You may also change the display format of pending status.)

Next, in step 2224 (second variation 3), the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the "suspended digestion transmission image information" temporarily stored in the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines the change. Determine whether the change is related to trigger hold. If Yes in step 2224 (second change 3), in step 2226 (second change 3), the drawing display content determining means SM21n selects the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b (or the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b). ), and based on the propriety of the change, the variation mode, or the "holding digestion transmission image information" regarding the preview effect, the holding digestion transmission image change plan (for example, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped: yellow zako holding → green zako An execution plan for effects such as pressing a button repeatedly during hold or reach (change from green star hold to red star hold, etc.) is determined, stored in the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 2218. Incidentally, even if the answer in step 2224 (second variation 3) is No, the process moves to step 2218.

Next, in step 2218 and step 2228 (second variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21. , turns on the pending display mode change process execution flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2300).

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the pending display mode change control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second variation 3) in FIG. 55 in modification example 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2702, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the pending display mode change process execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether the current gaming state is not a time reduction gaming state. If Yes in step 2704, in step 2706, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether trigger hold exists within the hold. If Yes in step 2706, in step 2708, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 checks the reservation change plan stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2710, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether there is a plan to change the hold display mode during the change based on the hold change plan.

If Yes in step 2710, in step 2712, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 refers to the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and selects a specific preview performance (see FIG. 49) during the preview performance to be executed during the fluctuation. ). If Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 performs a drawing based on the preview mode temporarily stored in the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. , it is determined whether the execution timing of the specific preview effect has been reached. If Yes in step 2714, the process moves to step 2718 (the display mode of the hold is changed in accordance with the execution of the specific preview effect).

Here, FIG. 60 is an image diagram of a pending change in the specific preview performance. In this example, an example will be described in which the display mode of the hold is changed in accordance with a grassy area notice (in particular, a grassy area notice where a snake appears, which is a specific notice effect) in a flat zone. First, in a state where there is a trigger hold within the holds, fluctuations related to holds before the trigger hold start {in this example, the display mode of the trigger hold at this point is normal hold (white hold)}.

Next, a grass preview, which is a preview performance of the current change, is executed, and an image of searching for something through the grass is displayed.

Next, an image is displayed in which a snake (the expectation of winning the jackpot during the fluctuation is "low") appears from behind the grass.

Here, if there is no plan to change the pending display during the change, an image of a snake appearing from behind the grass and leaving the screen is displayed, and the preview performance ends.

On the other hand, if there is a plan to change the hold display during the change, unlike the case described above, an image of a snake appearing from behind the grass and jumping into the hold (trigger hold, which is normally held at this point) will be displayed. Ru. After that, the display mode of the hold in which the snake jumped (trigger hold) changes, and is displayed in a hold display mode different from the normal hold (in this example, the hold is called ``snake hold''). Note that it may be configured to perform a performance in which the display mode of the pending event does not change even if the specific preview performance is executed (so-called fake performance).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2712 (when the specific notice effect is not executed during the variation), in step 2716, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 displays a general-purpose pending change effect (which can be executed independently of other effects). At the same time, a command is set to display a production that can be executed at any production stage, for example, a production in which a hold is exploded (step 299).
(It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 9), and the process moves to step 2718.

Next, in step 2718, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the trigger hold based on the hold change plan stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and changes the display mode of the drawing hold information. It is stored in the temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2720, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 turns off the pending display mode change processing execution flag in the flag area of the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and executes the next process {step 2750 (Processing of 2nd variation 3)}. In addition, in the case of No in step 2704, step 2706 or step 2710, the process moves to step 2720, and in the case of No in step 2702 or step 2714, the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 2750 (second variation 3)}. Transition.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the pending digestion transmission image display process according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second variation 3) in FIG. 55 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol fluctuation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the preview presentation related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the suspension consumption transmission image displaying flag is off. Determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the pending consumption conveyance image based on the suspended consumption conveyance image information temporarily stored in the preview presentation related information temporary storage means SM24b. (Initial display mode) is determined. Here, the pending completion transmission image is an image that continues to display the pending related to the relevant change during the relevant change (after the relevant change has started and the pending related to the relevant change has been completed). . By displaying the hold completion transmission image, even during a change related to a hold whose display mode has changed within the hold (e.g. Zako hold), the player can easily recognize that the change is a change related to Zako hold. During this change, it becomes possible to perform an effect that changes the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image.

Next, in step 2758, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 turns on the pending consumption transmission image displaying flag in the flag area of the preview presentation related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 2760. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2754, the process moves to step 2760.

Next, in step 2760, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b and confirms the reservation execution transmission image change plan. Next, in step 2762, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a plan to change the display mode or delete the pending digest transmitting image during the change based on the pending digest transmitting image change plan. do. If Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the pending digesting transfer image based on the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the pending digesting transfer image change plan. It is determined whether or not a change timing (for example, at the start of re-variation after displaying a temporary stop of a pseudo-continuous pattern, at the time of execution of a predetermined effect, or a predetermined period during a ready-to-win effect) has been reached. If Yes in step 2764, in step 2766, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 determines the conditions for changing the display mode of the reservation transmission transmission image (for example, pressing the sub-input button during a predetermined period, the maximum number of reservations, etc.) Determine whether or not the requirements are satisfied. If Yes in step 2766, in steps 2768 and 2770, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command to display a general-purpose hold change effect (for example, a hold exploding effect) (sends the display command in step 2999). (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and also change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image (for example, Akaboshi suspension, Midorizako suspension, no display, etc.) based on the suspension digestion transmission image change plan. display mode), and stores it in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and proceeds to step 2780. Incidentally, if the result in step 2762 or step 2766 is No, the process also moves to step 2780.

Here, FIG. 62 is an image diagram of a change in the retained digestion transmission image. The change in the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image in the third modification from the second embodiment is configured to be executed in the flow shown in the figure. In addition, this example illustrates a pattern in which the battle performance does not end in the first half but shifts (develops) to the battle performance (second half). First, the fluctuation related to the trigger hold (currently, the last hold) starts, and the last hold is displayed as the hold digestion transmission image.

Next, a battle performance (first half) is performed as a performance during the fluctuation. In this example, if the hold digestion transmission image is a hold, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold by pressing the sub-input button a predetermined number of times during the execution of the battle effect (first half) in the change. It is composed of In this example, a predetermined effect can be executed by pressing the sub-input button during the execution of the battle effect (first half); however, effects that prompt the player's operation (pressing the sub-input button) are not Since it is not particularly executed, the operation of the sub-input button is the input of a so-called hidden command (back button).

If you press the button repeatedly (press the sub-input button a certain number of times) during the battle production (first half), each time you press the sub-input button, an attack will be added to the hold that is displayed as the hold digestion transmission image. The current effect image will be displayed.

Next, when the number of presses of the sub-input button in the battle production (first half) reaches a predetermined number, an image of Zako Hold exploding, which is a pending digestion transmission image, will be displayed, and based on the pending digestion transmission image change plan, The display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is changed and displayed (for example, the display mode of pending is changed to red star pending or not displayed). Furthermore, even after transitioning to the battle performance (second half), the pending digestion transmission image will be displayed (or not displayed) in the display format after the display format change. Since there is an intention to predict the expected jackpot of the change according to the display mode of the transmission image, even after transitioning to the battle performance (second half), the pending digestion transmission image continues to be displayed in the display mode after the display mode has been changed. }.

On the other hand, if you do not press the button repeatedly during the battle performance (first half) (or the number of repeated presses is less than the predetermined number of times), the Zako hold, which is a hold-up digestion transmission image, will automatically explode at the timing of transitioning to the battle performance (second half). At the same time as the image is displayed, the display of the pending completion notification image will be erased (taking into account players who enjoy the game by not hitting the button repeatedly and not anticipating the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation, we have created a plan to change the pending completion notification image) regardless of the contents). In this example, the jackpot expectation level of Zako reservation is medium, and the jackpot expectation level of Akahoshi reservation is high expectation level. Moreover, when the battle performance (second half) is executed, the expectation level of jackpot increases at once compared to when the battle performance (first half) is executed. Here, in a situation where the jackpot expectation level has increased after moving to the battle performance (second half), if the display of "Zako pending" with a medium jackpot expectation level continues, the battle performance is a performance with a high jackpot expectation level. Although it may spoil the interest of the (second half), when the highly anticipated production (in this example, the battle production (second half)) starts, the production that is not highly anticipated (in this example, the second half of the battle production) is started. By deleting it, you can avoid such situations. Although not particularly shown in this example, even if the number of presses of the sub-input button is less than a predetermined number of times, at the timing of the change in the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image, based on the pending digestion transmission image change plan. It may be configured to automatically change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image. In such a configuration, for example, the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is automatically changed only when a change is planned to a display mode that suggests that there is a high expectation of a jackpot in the relevant fluctuation. It may be configured as follows. In addition, if you do not press the button repeatedly (or the number of repeated presses is less than a predetermined number of times), the display mode of the pending digestion communication image will be automatically changed at a predetermined timing only if the fluctuation results in a jackpot or a probability-variable jackpot. It may also be configured such that a so-called hit effect can be executed.

Also, if you move to the battle performance (second half) without going through the battle performance (first half) {for example, drawing change start (all rows) → preview effect 1, temporary drawing stop display (left column) → drawing temporary Stop display (right column) → Incite reach development → Battle reach (second half) image display → Temporary drawing stop display (middle row) → Execute the performance depending on the validity → Display confirming drawing (all columns) }, that is, if there is no period during which the button is pressed {in this example, the battle effect (first half)} and the transition to the battle effect (second half) occurs, the timing of transition to the battle effect (second half) Then, the pending digestion transmission image, Zako-Hold, is automatically exploded, and the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is changed and displayed based on the suspended digestion transmission image change plan. Although not particularly shown in this example, the number of presses of the sub-input button required to change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is determined by the number of presses of the sub-input button required to change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image. The configuration may be such that a larger number of times is more likely to be selected as the number of times is more likely to change to a pending state. Although not particularly shown in this example, when the display mode of the hold-down transmission image changes, in addition to the general-purpose hold change effect, there is also a play that suggests the content of the change (for example, when the hold-down explodes) It may also be configured to be able to execute a death warning (death warning that utters lines). The content that the Deathrattle Announcement suggests is the expected level of jackpot for the change in question and the contents of the planned performance (for example, "Achichii!" = Expected jackpot of 60% or more, "Congratulations!" = However, if the sub-input button is not pressed by the player, the jackpot expectation level related to the change may be It is preferable to assume that the player does not want to make a prediction, and to configure the system so that the death penalty notice related to the jackpot expectation level of the change is not executed (only the death penalty notice related to the content of the performance scheduled to be executed can be executed). . In other words, only when the display mode of the pending consumption transmission image is changed by the player's operation, it is only necessary to configure the system so that a preview effect related to the jackpot expectation level of the change can be executed based on the result of the validity of the change. Note that the battle performance (first half) performance can be executed in "a4" and "b4", which are variable times of 30 seconds.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if No in step 2764 (if it is not the timing to change the display mode of the pending digest transmission image), in step 2772, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 changes the display format of the suspended digest transmission image. It is determined whether it is time to delete the . If Yes in step 2772, in step 2774, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines the display mode deletion conditions for the pending digestion transmission image (for example, no sub-input button is pressed during a predetermined period, the number of sub-input button presses) less than a predetermined number of times, etc.). If Yes in step 2774, in steps 2776 and 2778, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command to display a general hold change effect (for example, a hold exploding effect) (sends the display command in step 2999). (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is changed to "no display" (regardless of the contents of the pending digestion transmission image change plan). ) and is temporarily stored in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process moves to step 2780.

Next, in step 2780, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 sets a command to display the pending digesting transfer image based on the display mode of the pending digesting transfer image temporarily stored in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. (It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 2752, in step 2782, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 turns off the pending digestion transmission image displaying flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. . Next, in step 2784, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the pending transmission transmission image to "no display" and temporarily stores it in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2786, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 displays the pending digesting transfer image based on the display mode of the pending digesting transfer image temporarily stored in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b (the processing Then, set a command (to hide the pending digestion transmission image) (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and perform the next process (process of step 2300). to move to.

In addition, although the third modification from the second embodiment is configured to be able to display the pending digest notification image, the pending digest notification image does not need to be displayed all the time. For example, if the pending display mode is normal pending, It may be configured such that a hold completion notification image corresponding to a hold that has been completed as is is not displayed, and a hold completion notification image corresponding to a hold whose hold display mode has changed from the normal hold is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can check the pending consumption notification image at the timing when he wants to know the jackpot expectation level of the symbol change, and if the pending consumption notification image is displayed, the expectation level is relatively high, If it is not displayed, it can be easily recognized that expectations are relatively low.

Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the background effect control process related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 46 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2524 (second variation 3) to step 2534 (second variation 3). That is, if the angel zone flag is off in step 2502, step 2524 (second variation 3) In 2nd change 3), the background effect display control means SM23 controls the variation of the decorative pattern based on the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Determine whether the start timing has been reached. If Yes in Step 2524 (Second Variation 3), in Step 2526 (Second Variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b, and stores the trigger holding {described above} in the holding state. It is determined whether or not there is a "pending" that was won in the first main game prize winning pre-read lottery. If Yes in Step 2526 (Second Variation 3), in Step 2528 (Second Variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 executes an angel zone transition lottery with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) of winning. do. Next, in step 2530 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result in step 2528 (second variation 3) and determines whether or not the angel zone transfer lottery has been won. . If Yes in step 2530 (second change 3), in step 2532 (second change 3), the background effect display control means SM23 displays the angel zone flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Turn on, and proceed to step 2504.

Further, in step 2504, after setting the "angel zone background" as the background effect, in step 2534 (second change 3), the background effect display control means SM23 stores the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the temporary drawing pending information. With reference to the storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation related to the trigger hold has ended. If Yes in step 2534 (second change 3), the process moves to step 2508, and if No, the process moves to step 2520.

By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment, the sub-main control is performed for holds that are highly expected to result in a jackpot (especially holds on the first main game side). The display mode of pending on the SM side can be changed and displayed, and when a predetermined preview performance (in this example, a specific preview performance, especially a low-expectation preview performance) is executed, the predetermined The system is configured so that the display mode of the hold can be changed and displayed in accordance with the preview effect and the movement of the displayed image. As a result, even if the prediction performance has a low jackpot expectation due to the fluctuation, the display mode of pending may change, so it is possible to increase the player's interest in the preview performance and improve the interest of the game. This makes it possible. In addition, when the jackpot expectation level increases after moving to the battle performance (second half), if the display of "Zako pending" with a medium jackpot expectation level continues, the battle performance is a performance with a high jackpot expectation level. (Second half) may lose the interest of the (second half), so even if there is no operation by the player, the production (in this example, the battle production (second half)), which is not highly anticipated, will be performed at the timing when the production with high expectations (in this example, the battle production (second half)) starts. In this example, it is possible to prevent the interest of the performance from being lost by hiding the ``Zako hold''. In addition, there is a condition that the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the sub-input button SB a predetermined number of times) during a period when a predetermined effect during symbol variation (for example, Battle Reach (first half)) is being performed. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode of the pending consumption transmission image, so it is possible to create a performance in which players can participate, and a player who does not want to know the expected jackpot of the change due to the performance can perform the prescribed operation. By not doing so, it is possible to provide a game in which it is possible to select that the display mode of the pending consumption transmission image becomes an effect that does not suggest the degree of jackpot expectation (for example, deletion of the pending consumption transmission image).

In the third modification from the second embodiment, a background change effect and a pending change effect are provided as the prefetch effect, and only the pending change effect is executed multiple times during the execution of the prefetch effect. is not limited, and the background change effect may also be configured to be executed multiple times during execution of the pre-read effect (for example, even after changing to the "angel zone background", it may change to the "true angel zone background"). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the more the background change effect is executed (the more times it is executed), the higher the expectation of a jackpot due to the fluctuations related to the currently executed look-ahead effect (rank It is desirable to configure the system so that the It should be noted that the background change effect does not change (rank does not increase) during the execution of symbol change related to trigger hold.

(Third embodiment)
Here, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured to start and stop changing at almost the same time as the main game pattern, but the manner of variation of the decorative pattern is not limited to this. . Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a third embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the third embodiment, a specific area C22 is provided inside the second grand prize opening C20, which is an area where entering the ball triggers a transition to the probability variable gaming state.

First, FIG. 64 (main game table 1 and main game table 2) shows the first main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-B) and the first main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-B in the third embodiment. This is an example of the main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). The difference from this embodiment is that the jackpot probability in the probability-changing gaming state is lower, and that short-open jackpots and long-open jackpots are provided as jackpots. Here, a short opening jackpot means that the second big winning hole C20 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.1 A long open jackpot is a jackpot in which only seconds) are opened, and a long open jackpot is a long open jackpot in which the second grand prize opening C20 is opened for a long time in the distribution game execution round (the round in which the second grand prize opening C20 is opened) during the jackpot. (For example, 30 seconds) It is a jackpot that can be released. In addition, in the third embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the above-mentioned distribution game execution round, the game property is such that the state shifts to the probability variable game state after the end of the special game being executed. (so-called Yu-Kan-ki).

Next, FIGS. 65 and 66 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). The difference from this embodiment is that both the first main game side and the second main game side are tables that are referred to in the losing time and time reduction game state, and the number of pending at the start of fluctuation is "0". ” and “1 to 3 items” have different table contents. In addition, in the third embodiment, among the variation modes of the second main game symbol selected in the time reduction gaming state, "b0 (1 second)" is a short variation, and the other variation modes are long variations, The method of determining the variation mode of the decorative symbols (especially the first decorative symbol) is configured to be different depending on whether the variation mode of the second main game symbol is a short variation or a long variation (details will be described later). . In addition, in the time reduction game state, the game is mainly played on the second main game side (because the game is played with right-handed players, the second
Only symbol variations on the main game side are executed, or variations in the second main game symbols are easier to execute than variations in the first main game symbols).

Further, although the details will be described later, in the time reduction gaming state, the variation time of the second decorative symbol is configured to be the same as the variation time of the second main game symbol, so the variation time of the second decorative symbol in the time reduction gaming state is The fluctuation time of the 2 decorative symbols is also determined depending on the number of reservations at the start of the symbol fluctuation (it may differ depending on the number of reservations).

Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time reduction gaming state, the game is mainly played on the second main game side (because the game is played with right-handed players, the second main game side is not shown). (only symbol fluctuations on the gaming side are executed), the first main game hold basically does not occur, so the contents of the fluctuation mode determination table related to the first main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state are In the case of a jackpot, a short period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) may contain only one type of variation; in the case of a jackpot, a long period of variation (e.g., 30 seconds) may contain only one type of content. Since the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol in the shortened game state is an irregular symbol fluctuation, there is no problem even if the contents of the fluctuation mode determination table have a simple structure. In addition, in order to cause the second main game to be suspended during irregular symbol fluctuations, the contents of the fluctuation mode determination table related to the first main game symbol related to the loss in the time-reduced gaming state are changed for a short period of time regardless of the number of reservations. It may be configured such that the variation mode is not selected (for example, all variation times are 5 seconds or more). Note that the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the number of reservations is the first main game reservation. This is the number of games pending, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is steps 1454 (third) to step 1464 (third), the purpose of which is to end the probability fluctuation gaming state by the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol (into a non-probability fluctuation gaming state). (transition). That is, in step 1454 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variable number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1454 (third), in step 1456 (third), the specific game control means MP50 subtracts (decrements) by 1 from the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1458 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1458 (third), in step 1460 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1462 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1464 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1470. Note that if the answer is No in step 1454 (third) or step 1458 (third), the process also moves to step 1470. In addition, in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the symbol variation is executed in the probability variation gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state ends when the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c becomes 0 (so-called ST). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the probability fluctuating game state may be configured so that it does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations (it may end when the winning of the special game is triggered), and the jackpot related to the first main game Even if the configuration is such that the proportion of jackpots related to the second main game becoming long-open jackpots is higher than the proportion of long-open jackpots resulting in long-open jackpots, and short-open jackpots also exist in the jackpots related to the second main game. good.

Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of special game control processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that step 16
11 (third), step 1700 (third), and step 1650 (third), that is, after the special game start display instruction command is set in step 1608, or when the special game execution flag is turned on in step 1610. If so, in step 1611 (third), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines that the round currently being executed is the allocated game execution round (the second round having the specific area C22). This is the round in which the big prize opening C20 is to be opened, and in this example, it is determined whether the round is 2R or 4R). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (third), in step 1700 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes a distribution game execution process, which will be described later, and moves to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (third), the process moves to step 1612. Further, after setting the special game end display instruction command in step 1638, in step 1650 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later. The process moves to step 1997.

Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1700 (third) in FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1702, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether the distribution game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1702, the process moves to step 1716. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1704, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped main game symbols are changed to long open symbols (7A, 4B, 5B and 7B, and the second main game jackpot symbols are all long open symbols). If Yes in step 1704, in step 1706, the distribution game execution control means MP36 selects a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 30 seconds, A release pattern designed to ensure that the ball enters the specific area C22 is almost certain is set, and the process moves to step 1710. In the case of No in step 1704, in step 1708, the distribution game execution control means MP36 selects a short opening pattern (for example, 0.1 second opening pattern) as the opening pattern of the second big winning hole C20 having the specific area C22. An opening pattern (opening pattern designed so that it is almost certain that the ball does not enter the specific area C22) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1710.

Next, in step 1710, the distribution game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1712, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1714, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second grand prize opening C20 according to the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1716.

Next, in step 1716, the distribution game execution control means MP36 checks the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether a predetermined number of game balls (10) have entered the second big prize opening C20. do. If YES in step 1716, the process moves to step 1720. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1716, in step 1718, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second big prize opening C20 has ended. If YES in step 1718, the process moves to step 1720. Next, in step 1720, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1722, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns off the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1724, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1724, in step 1726, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1728. . Note that if the answer in step 1724 is No, the process also moves to step 1728. Next, in step 1728, the distribution game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and moves to the next process (the process of step 1634). Note that even in the case of No in step 1718, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1634).

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to the subroutine of step 1650 (third) in FIG. 68, in the third embodiment. First, in step 1662, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1662, in step 1664, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1666, the specific game control means MP50 sets the probability variation number counter MP51c to a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example). Next, in step 1668, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1672. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1662, in step 1670, the specific game control means MP50 sets the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example), and moves to step 1672.

Next, in step 1672, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1674, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2010 (third) and step 2850 (third). That is, after executing the above-described decorative pattern display content determination process in step 2200, step 2010 (third) Then, the sub control board S refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is not a time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2010 (third), the process moves to step 2300, and in the case of No, in step 2850 (third), the sub-control board S performs a time-saving decorative pattern display control process to be described later. Execute and move to step 2400.

Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2230 (third) and step 2800 (third), that is, after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2204, in step 2230 (third), The drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether the current gaming state is not a time reduction gaming state or not. In the case of Yes in step 2230 (third), the process moves to step 2206, and in the case of No, in step 2800 (third), the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines that the first The figure content determination process is executed and the process moves to step 2208. Note that the process of step 2218 is not executed in the third embodiment (there is no symbol content determination flag). In addition, in the third embodiment, the first decorative pattern is composed of three columns: the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and the number of valid lines (lines that become valid when the same numerical patterns are lined up) is 1. It is a line, and if the same number symbols are aligned on the active line, it means a jackpot (on the contrary, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the active line, it is a loss). Also, in the left column, middle column, and right column (or in the middle column), only numerical symbols can stop (temporarily stop) (the above-mentioned "special symbols" do not stop, or the appearance frequency itself is extremely (or the probability of temporary stopping is extremely low) and it is possible to temporarily stop during symbol fluctuation (or the probability of temporary stopping is extremely low). In addition, the second decorative pattern is composed of three columns: the left column, the middle column, and the right column. If the number symbols are aligned, it means a jackpot (on the contrary, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the active line, it is a loss). In addition, in the left column, middle column, and right column (or in the middle column), only the number symbols can stop (temporarily stop) (the above-mentioned "special symbols" do not stop), and in the middle of the symbol change. It is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the first drawing content determination process during time saving, which is related to the subroutine of step 2800 (third) in FIG. 72 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2802, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the first decorative pattern is currently stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the second main game pending content (in particular, win/fail result and variation time) related to the symbol variation (main game symbol variation), and Confirm the contents of the second main game hold (especially the variable time) in the order of consumption of the first and second games, that is, the contents of the second main game hold excluding the third hold (especially the win/fail result and the variable time) . Next, in step 2806, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not there is a hold (including the symbol change) whose variation time is longer than a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) related to the confirmed hold, and , based on the extinguishing order of the pending (including the symbol variation) whose variation time is longer than a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example), refer to the table for determining the first design variation mode during time saving, and determine the first decorative symbol. Determine the variation mode.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a table for determining the first drawing variation mode during time saving in the third embodiment. As shown in this table, in the third embodiment, when the first decorative symbol stops (at the timing of step 2806), the second main game pending number, the second main game symbol fluctuation and the second main The variable time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the variable time related to game hold. As mentioned above, among the variations of the second main game symbols, "b0 (1 second)" is considered a short variation, and anything other than "b0 (1 second)" is considered a long variation.

Specifically, if there are two or more second main game holds, it is determined whether or not there is a hold that will be a long change between the symbol change, the first hold, and the second hold. , if there is no hold that results in a long variation, the variation time of the 3 variations of the second main game symbol becomes the variation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, if the number of second main games pending is 3, and the number of second main games pending is ``1 to 3'', the fluctuation time will be ``The variation: 1 second, 1st game: 1 second, 2 games. In the case of "1st: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second", the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol when the second main game pending number maintains "1 to 3" is "the said fluctuation" and " The total of ``1st'' and ``2nd'' will be 3 seconds, and the first decorative symbol will also stop at the same time (or approximately at the same time) as the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the second pending symbol stops. . The second decorative symbols are configured to stop at the same time (or approximately at the same time) as the main game symbols stop changing in each variation.

On the other hand, if there are two or more second main game holds, and if there is a hold that will be a long change between the symbol change, the first hold, and the second hold, the first The fluctuation time until the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the hold, which is a long fluctuation in the order of consumption, becomes the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, if the number of second main games pending is 3, and the number of second main games pending is ``1 to 3'', the fluctuation time will be ``The relevant variation: 1 second, 1st game: 10 seconds, 2 games. In the case of "1st: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second", the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol when the second main game pending number maintains "1 to 3" is "the said fluctuation" and " The first decorative symbol will also stop at the same time (or approximately at the same time) as the main game symbol related to the first pending symbol, which is a long fluctuation, stops changing.

In addition, if the number of second main game holds is one or less, it is determined whether there is a hold that will become a long change up to the hold that becomes the final extinguishment order (including the symbol change concerned), and a long change is made. If there is no pending, the fluctuation time that is the sum of the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol and all the pending becomes the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, if the number of second main games pending is 1, and the number of second main games pending is ``1 to 3'', and the fluctuation time is ``the fluctuation: 1 second, the first game: 1 second''. In this case, when the second main game pending number is maintained at "1 to 3", the variation time of the first decorative symbol is 2 seconds, which is the sum of "the variation" and "the first symbol", and 1 The first decorative symbol also stops at the same time (or approximately at the same time) as the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the eye retention stops.

On the other hand, if the number of second main game pending is 1 or less, and if there is a long change pending (including the symbol change) before the final redemption order, the first redemption order will be The fluctuation time up to the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the hold that becomes a long fluctuation becomes the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, if the number of second main games pending is 1, and the number of second main games pending is ``1 to 3'', and the fluctuation time is ``the fluctuation: 1 second, the first game: 10 seconds''. In this case, when the second main game pending number is maintained at "1 to 3", the variation time of the first decorative symbol is 11 seconds, which is the sum of "the variation" and "the first symbol", and it is a long variation. The first decorative symbol will also stop at the same time (or approximately at the same time) as the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the first pending symbol stops.

In the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first decorative pattern is determined at the timing of step 2806, that is, after the hold is extinguished, but the variation time of the first decorative symbol is not limited to this. It may be configured to check the second main game hold information at the timing and determine the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol.

Next, in step 2808, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the reservation information confirmed in step 2804 and determines whether or not there is a reservation that will result in a jackpot among the confirmed second main game reservations. If Yes in step 2808, in step 2810, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the hold that becomes the jackpot, and 2814. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2808, in step 2812, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol to be a loss, and proceeds to step 2814. In addition, in the process of step 2812, depending on the variation time of the first decorative symbol, the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol are changed to reach mode (the stop symbols of the left column and the right column are the same, for example, "4, 6, It may also be configured to determine whether to make a winning combination (the stopped symbols in the left and right rows are not the same, for example, "4, 6, 3") or a random number ("4, 6, 3", for example). Next, in step 2814, the drawing display content determining means SM21n turns on the first symbol content determination flag during time saving in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (step 2208). processing). Note that if the answer is No in step 2802, the process also moves to the next process (the process in step 2208).

Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time reduction game state, the game is mainly played on the second main game side (because the game is played with right-handed players, the second (Only the symbol fluctuations on the main game side are executed), so the first main game hold basically does not occur, but if the first main game hold occurs due to the player executing a left-handed hit, etc. In this case, it is desirable that the first decorative symbol has the same variation time as the main game symbol until the variation related to the first main game suspension ends.

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the time-saving decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (third) in FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2852, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main game symbols has started. If Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol variation flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, step 2
At 856, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 starts the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second drawing variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2858. On the other hand, if No in step 2852, the process also moves to step 2858.

Next, in step 2858, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2858, in step 2860, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 checks the timer values of the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second drawing variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2862, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the first decorative pattern is stopped. If Yes in step 2862, in step 2864, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 starts variable display of the first decorative pattern, and proceeds to step 2866. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2862, in step 2865, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative pattern, and proceeds to step 2866.

Next, in step 2866, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 variably displays the second decorative pattern. Next, in step 2868, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 appropriately executes image displays such as a temporary stop display, a preview image display, and a ready-to-reach image display related to the determined variation of the main game symbol. Note that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the time reduction game state, but are configured not to be temporarily stopped in a stopping mode such as a "special symbol" or a pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, as a specific example of a temporary stop, the first decorative symbol is a reach in a symbol variation that is a long-term reach variation (for example, 30 seconds or more) (the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped). The second decorative pattern may be configured to be temporarily stopped during the period (in which the first decorative pattern is reached), or the first decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped as a pseudo-continuous fluctuation before the first decorative pattern becomes a reach. .

Next, in step 2870, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbols have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2870, in step 2872, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the stop timing of the first decorative pattern has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2872, in step 2874, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 finalizes the display of the first decorative pattern. Next, in step 2876, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2880. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2872, in step 2878, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative pattern, and proceeds to step 2880.

Next, in step 2880, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 finalizes and displays the second decorative pattern. Next, in step 2882, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the second drawing variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). Note that even in the case of No in step 2858 or step 2870, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2400).

Here, the upper part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative pattern variation during time saving, and illustrates an example of the effect related to the variation of the decorative pattern in the third embodiment. First, the "main game symbol fluctuation start state" means that the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) begin to fluctuate at the timing when the main game symbol (in particular, the second main game symbol) begins to fluctuate. It is displayed whether or not. Note that the areas displayed with diagonal lines indicate that the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern) is changing. In addition, at the timing when the main game symbols (particularly the second main game symbols) stop varying, it is displayed whether or not the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols) stop varying. Note that the areas displayed with diagonal lines indicate that the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern) is changing. in this way,
The second decorative symbols start and stop fluctuating at the same (or almost the same) timing as the fluctuations of the main game symbols (especially the second main game symbols) (they fluctuate according to the fluctuations of the main game symbols). On the other hand, the second decorative pattern is configured to start and stop changing every three times the main game pattern (particularly the second main game pattern) changes. That is, the first decorative pattern is configured such that one pattern variation can be performed over a plurality of variation periods of the main game pattern (and the second decorative pattern).

By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the number of pending items and the fluctuation time of the second main game reservation. By configuring the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol to be the value of the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol multiple times, the game can be played with multiple fluctuations of the main game symbol as if they were one fluctuation. This means that even if the number of variations of the main game symbol, which is the condition for ending the probability variable gaming state, is large (200 in this example) as in the third embodiment, the number of variations (in this example, 200) is small. For example, 100 times), it is possible to show the player that the probability is variable (100 times), and it is possible to reduce the fact that the progress of the game becomes boring due to continuous loss fluctuations during the probability variable game state. This makes it possible to make the user feel that the probability of hitting the jackpot in the state is higher than it actually is.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the second decorative pattern is configured to be able to make a definite stop three times in a period in which the first decorative pattern makes a definite stop once, but the number of definite stops of the second decorative pattern is The maximum number of 3 times is smaller than the 2nd main game hold upper limit number of 4 times (If the 2nd main game hold upper limit number is exceeded, the 1st decorative symbol will be suspended during the change. (This is because a situation may occur in which the second main game hold is all used up).

Note that the board configuration of the third embodiment may be changed. For example, the game ball almost certainly passes through the auxiliary game starting port H10 and the second main game starting port B10 when hitting right. (the auxiliary game starting port H10 is placed on the upper side when viewed from the player), and almost all of the game balls that flow down the route and pass through the auxiliary game starting port H10, It may be configured so that the ball can enter the second main game starting opening B10. In the case of such a configuration, in the time reduction game state, during the period from when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game starting port H10 until it enters the second main game starting port B10, the "auxiliary game symbol" Since it is desirable that the fluctuation start → the end of the fluctuation of the auxiliary game symbol → the opening of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d, "the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is 0.2 seconds, the second main game starting opening electric It is preferable that the opening state of the accessory B11d be configured such that it opens for 6 seconds and then closes. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from entering the second main game starting port B10 when a right-handed hit is executed in the time reduction game state, the second main game It is desirable that the number of prize balls for the starting opening B10 is one ball (the number of prize balls for the first main game starting opening A10 is three balls).

In addition, in the third embodiment, the second main game pending content is confirmed while the first decorative symbol is stopped, and the fluctuation time related to the next fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is determined. If a hold that results in a long change in the main game symbol exists before the second one is extinguished, the first decorative pattern is configured to stop at the same time when the pattern change related to the hold that results in a long change stops. Therefore, the variation time of the first decorative pattern may not depend on the number of reservations at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol, and also, due to the reservation that occurs during the variation of the first decorative symbol, the first variation of the next variation The variation times of the decorative patterns are configured to be different.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as described above, if there are two or more second main game holds, and the symbol change, the first hold, or the second hold, a long change is applied. When there is a hold that becomes, the change time until the change of the main game symbol related to the hold that is the longest change in the order of consumption is the change time of the first decorative symbol, and, If there is no hold that becomes a long change between the symbol change, the first hold, and the second hold, the change time for 3 changes of the second main game symbol is the change of the first decorative pattern. However, for example, if the number of second main games pending is 3 and the number of second main games pending is maintained at "1 to 3", the variation time will be "The variation: 1 second". , 1st symbol: 1 second, 2nd symbol: 1 second, 3rd symbol: 1 second", the first decorative symbol when the second main game pending number maintains "1 to 3". The fluctuation time is scheduled to be 3 seconds, which is the total of "the said fluctuation", "1st piece", and "2nd piece", but the second main game hold is not maintained at "1 to 3 pieces", For example, if the actual fluctuation time is "the relevant fluctuation: 1 second, the first: 1 second, the second: 5 seconds", the fluctuation time of the first decorative pattern is "the relevant fluctuation" and " The total of the first and second symbols is 7 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol can vary depending on whether or not additional reservation occurs.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the content of the second main game hold is checked while the first decorative symbol is stopped, and the fluctuation time related to the next fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is determined. While it is stopped, the effect related to the first decorative pattern may be determined; for example, when a ``lightning bolt effect'' is executed on the effect display device SG at the start of the variation in a certain first decorative pattern variation. Then, while the first decorative symbol variation is stopped, the subsequent variation content of the second decorative symbol (or the variation content of the second main game symbol) is confirmed, and the "Lightning Bolt" is confirmed in the next first decorative symbol variation. It may be determined whether or not to perform the "running performance" again. In addition, the more the "lightning bolt running performance" continues, the higher the expectation that the first decorative symbol variation (or the main game symbol variation included in the first decorative symbol variation) related to the performance will be a jackpot. It is desirable to configure it so that it is high. Note that the timing for checking the fluctuation content of the second decorative symbol (or the fluctuation content of the second main game symbol) may be changed, but if the timing is confirmed at the timing when the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol starts, While it is possible to check only the fluctuation contents related to the second main game pending, if you check at the timing when the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol stops or at the timing of the final stage of the fluctuation, it is possible to check the fluctuation contents that occurred during the period when the first decorative symbol is fluctuating. Since it is also possible to check the details of the fluctuation of the second main game hold, it is desirable that the checking timing is after the final stage of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol.

(Fourth embodiment)
Here, in the embodiment described above, a configuration in which two decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are displayed on the effect display device was described in detail, but such a configuration is different from the embodiment described above. It is not limited to only the configuration of the form. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, in a game situation in which right-handed hitting (a firing mode in which a game ball is fired toward the right side of the board) is to be performed, a right-handed hitting instruction display is displayed indicating that right-handed hitting should be performed. It has a right-handed display control means SM27 that controls the display.

First, FIG. 75 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 3400 (fourth), that is, when execution of (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM, is started, in step 3400 (fourth), The sub control board S executes a right-hand hitting instruction display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2100.

Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of right-handed hitting instruction display control processing according to the subroutine of step 3400 (fourth) in FIG. 75 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3402, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time reduction gaming state. In this example, it is determined in step 3402 whether or not the time reduction game state is in effect; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined whether or not the game state is a game state in which right-hand hitting should be executed (for example, in a probability fluctuation game). It may be configured to determine whether the game is in the current state, whether the game is in a probability-changing gaming state, whether it is in a non-time saving gaming state, etc.
Note that in the case of Yes in step 3402, the process moves to step 3406.

In the case of No in step 3402, in step 3404, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3404, in step 3406, the right-handed hitting display control means SM27 sets a command to display a right-handed hitting instruction display on the production display device SG, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2100). Here, the upper right part of the figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed hitting instruction display. As shown in the figure, the right-hand hitting instruction display is displayed on the performance display device SG, and is configured to notify the player that he should play the game by playing right. Note that since it is important for the player to recognize whether or not to hit the ball to the right, the right-hand ball instruction display is configured to have a high display priority (details will be described later). In addition, the displays that are basically always displayed on the performance display device SG, such as the second decorative pattern and the pending display (including the first pending display and the second pending display), which will be described later, are not the right-hand hit instruction display. It may be configured to avoid duplication.

In addition, the right-handed display mode in each game state or situation may always be the same display mode even if the game state or situation (such as when a special game is in progress and when a special game is not in progress) is different, or It may be configured such that the display mode may be different (for example, the size may be different) depending on the state or situation. In addition, if the display format is configured to be different, for example, during a jackpot, the display format of the right-hand instruction display may be different depending on the opening mode of the big winning opening. The right-hand hit instruction display during a jackpot in which all the opening modes are long openings is the relatively large first display pattern, and the right-hand hitting instruction display during a jackpot in which all the opening modes of the big winning opening are short openings is relatively small. As the second display pattern, the right hit instruction display during a jackpot where long opening and short opening are mixed as the opening mode of the big winning opening is the first display pattern which is relatively large in the round where the big winning opening is long opening. Therefore, in a round in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time, the game may be configured to proceed while switching the right hit instruction display so that the second display pattern is relatively small.

In addition, if the configuration is such that a first right-handed instruction display with a relatively small display area and a second right-handed instruction display with a relatively large display area can be displayed as the right-handed instruction display, the following will be done. may be configured.
(1) In a situation where you should be hitting to the right (for example, a time-reduced game state), the first right-handed hitting instruction display is configured to be displayed, and in the situation where you should be hitting to the right, the game player can indicate that you are hitting from the left. If the machine detects this (for example, in the time-reduced game mode, if three game balls enter the first main game starting port A10, which allows balls to be hit left-handed), a second right-handed hit instruction display will be displayed. is displayed for a predetermined period of time (the first right-hand hit instruction display remains displayed).
(2) The first right-hitting instruction display is displayed near the four corners (for example, the upper right) of the effect display device SG, and the second right-hitting instruction display is displayed near the center of the effect display device SG. Furthermore, the display area for the first right-handed hitting instruction display and the display area for the second right-handed hitting instruction display do not overlap. Note that the display area for the first right-handed hitting instruction display and the display area for the second right-handed hitting instruction display may be configured to overlap, and in such a case, display priority is given to the second right-handed hitting instruction display. It may be configured such that the display priority of the first right-hand hitting instruction display is higher than that of the first right-hand hitting instruction display.
(3) The display priority in the performance display device SG is from the highest to lowest: ``1st right-handed instruction display → 2nd right-handed instruction display → Preview presentation → Decorative symbol that is changing'' (``2nd right-handed instruction display → 2nd right-handed instruction display → For example, if the display area of the second right-hitting instruction display and the display area of the fluctuating decorative pattern overlap, , the second right-handed hitting instruction display is displayed in front (visible).
(4) The first right-hitting instruction display may overlap with the first decorative symbol during variation in the auxiliary game state {during special symbol variation (during first decorative symbol variation, during second decorative symbol variation)}. (For example, when a "symbol enlargement effect" occurs in which at least a part of the first decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device SG is enlarged), it does not overlap with the second decorative pattern. However, the first right hit instruction display does not overlap with either the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern while the fluctuation is stopped. In addition, the first right-handed instruction display is the first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, see FIG. 87) and the second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see, for example, FIG. 87). Furthermore, the first right-handed instruction display may overlap with a predetermined preview effect {for example, a group preview (see the lower right diagram in FIG. Notice to be displayed)} does not overlap.
(5) The second right-hitting instruction display may overlap with the first decorative symbol during variation in the auxiliary game state {during special symbol variation (during first decorative symbol variation, during second decorative symbol variation)}. (For example, not only when a "design enlargement effect" in which at least a part of the first decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device SG is enlarged, but also during scrolling from top to bottom), It does not overlap with the second decorative pattern. In addition, the second right-handed instruction display includes the first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, see FIG. 87) and the second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see, for example, FIG. 87). Furthermore, the second right-handed instruction display is for a predetermined preview performance {for example, a group preview (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)} and a specific preview performance {for example, a line preview (a notice that displays a character's lines)}. Both can overlap.
(6) When the first decorative symbol is changing special symbols (during the first decorative symbol fluctuation, during the second decorative symbol fluctuation), the first suspension display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, (see FIG. 87) and the second hold display on the first and second main game sides (for example, see FIG. 87). Furthermore, when the first decorative pattern is in the special pattern variation (+first decorative pattern variation), a predetermined preview effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right figure in FIG. 83)} and a specific notice effect {for example, , dialogue preview (notice that displays the character's dialogue)} may overlap.
(7) When the second decorative pattern is changing special symbols (during the first decorative pattern changing, during the second decorative pattern changing), the first pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, (see FIG. 87) and the second hold display (for example, see FIG. 87) on the first main game side and the second main game side. Furthermore, when the second decorative pattern is changing during a special pattern (+during a second decorative pattern changing), it may overlap with a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}, but a specific It does not overlap with the preview performance {for example, a dialogue preview (a preview that displays a character's dialogue)}.
(8) The first pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, see FIG. 87) overlaps with a predetermined preview effect {for example, group preview (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}. However, it does not overlap with a specific preview effect {for example, a line preview (a preview displaying a character's lines)}.
(9) The second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, see FIG. 87) overlaps with a predetermined preview effect {for example, group preview (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)} However, it does not overlap with a specific preview effect {for example, a line preview (a preview displaying a character's lines)}.

Further, in a case where the display mode of the right-hand hitting instruction display can be different depending on the gaming state or situation, the following arrangement may be adopted.
(1) While a small hit is being executed, the right hit instruction display is relatively small (for example, one arrow, etc.), and the display mode is different from when a small hit is not being executed.
(2) A probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state when a special game is not being executed, a non-probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state when a special game is not being executed, and a case where a special game is being executed. is in a non-time saving gaming state.
(3) The time reduction gaming state includes a non-probability variable gaming state and time reduction gaming state, and a probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state.
(4) When a special game is not being executed, the right-handed hitting instruction display is not displayed in the non-probability fluctuating game state and non-time reducing game state and the probability fluctuating gaming state and non-time reducing game state (the display prompting left-handed hitting is not displayed). On the other hand, while the special game is being executed, a right-handed hitting instruction display is displayed (a display prompting left-handed hitting is not displayed).
(5) In the time reduction game state, a right-handed hitting instruction display is displayed (a display urging left-handed hitting is not displayed).
(6) If the configuration is such that the above-mentioned first right-hitting instruction display and second right-hitting instruction display can be displayed in both the non-time saving gaming state and the time saving gaming state, the non-time saving gaming state The display mode of the first right-handed instruction display is different between the time reduction game state and the time-reduced game state, but the display mode of the second right-handed instruction display is the same.
(7) The display encouraging left-handed batting will be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, for a predetermined period of time after changing from a situation where you should bat right-handed to a situation where you should bat left-handed, and an auxiliary game start opening that is easy to enter when executing a right-handed ball in a situation where you should bat left-handed. On the other hand, the right-handed batting instruction display is displayed for a predetermined period of time from when a right-handed hit is detected, such as when a game ball enters the ball (it becomes hidden after a prescribed period of time). The period during which the right-hand hit instruction display is displayed is longer than the predetermined period.

In the case of No in step 3404, in step 3408, the right-handed hitting display control means SM27 sets a command to erase the right-handed hitting instruction display, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2100). Note that, in step 3408, if the right-hand hitting instruction display is not displayed, the process is not executed.

Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram of the display mode and display position of decorative patterns in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the display mode and display position of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are illustrated depending on the combination of the game state and the background effect. In addition, all four display examples shown in the figure illustrate a situation in which the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) related to "7A" which is the jackpot symbol on the first main game side are stopped. ing. First, in the upper left part of the figure, a case is illustrated in which the game state is a non-probability fluctuating game state and the background effect being executed is a "daytime stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777", which is an arithmetic numeral, and the display position is three numerals arranged horizontally in a straight line. Further, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777", which is an arithmetic numeral, and the display position is three numerals lined up horizontally in a straight line. Next, in the upper right part of the same figure, a case is illustrated in which the game state is a probability variable game state and the background effect being executed is a "daytime stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777" in Chinese numerals, and the display position is three numbers arranged in a convex shape. Further, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777", which is an arithmetic numeral, and the display position is three numerals lined up horizontally in a straight line. In addition, when the background effect being executed is "daytime stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "black" for both "777" and "777". , the display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" in both cases of "777" and "777".

Next, in the lower left part of the figure, a case is illustrated in which the game state is a non-probability fluctuating game state and the background effect being executed is a "night stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777", which is an arithmetic numeral, and the display position is three numerals lined up diagonally in a straight line. Further, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777", which is an arithmetic numeral, and the display position is three numerals lined up horizontally in a straight line. Next, in the lower right part of the figure, a case is illustrated in which the game state is a probability variable game state and the background effect being executed is a "night stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777" in Chinese numerals, and the display position is three numbers arranged in a concave shape. Further, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777", which is an arithmetic numeral, and the display position is three numerals lined up horizontally in a straight line. In addition, when the background effect being executed is "Night Stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "white" for both "777" and "777". , the display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" in both cases of "777" and "777".

In this way, in the same figure,
(1) The display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the game state.
(2) The display mode of the first decorative pattern differs when the background effects differ.
(3) The display position of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the game state.
(4) The display position of the first decorative pattern differs when the background effects differ.
(5) The display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the game state differs.
(6) The display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effects differ.
(7) The display position of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the game state differs.
(8) The display position of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effects differ.
It is structured as follows.

In addition, in the case where the display mode of the first decorative pattern is configured to be different depending on the background effect or the game state, as shown in FIG. In the case where the display mode is configured to be a combination of the above, the display mode of the first decorative pattern may be made different by making the patterns different (for numbers, Chinese numerals and arithmetic numerals may be used). They may be different or may be the same). Further, the display mode may be different depending on whether a pattern is attached or not. In addition, the display color of the numbers on the decorative pattern can indicate the gaming state after the jackpot ends in the event of a jackpot, and the jackpot is started when three numbers whose display color is green line up. In this case, it is not certain whether or not the probability fluctuating gaming state will occur after the end of the jackpot, but if the jackpot starts when three numbers with a display color of red line up, then after the jackpot ends, It may be configured so that it is almost certain that the probability-changing gaming state will be entered; for example, in the non-probability-changing gaming state, "3" is green and "7" is red, while in the probability-changing gaming state, "3" is green and "7" is red. may be configured so that "3" and "7" are red (in the probability variation game state, "3" has the same properties as "7"). In addition, the difference in nature between green and red is that if a jackpot is started when the green decorative pattern stops, a jackpot with 8 rounds (or more than 8 rounds) will start. Therefore, if the jackpot starts when the red decorative pattern stops, it may be configured so that a jackpot with 16 rounds is started, or the green decorative pattern becomes the reach. In this case, the percentage of the symbol change resulting in a jackpot is 10%, while if the red decorative symbol becomes a reach, the percentage of the pattern variation resulting in a jackpot may be configured to be 50%. good. In addition, when it becomes a reach at "1", the probability that the symbol change becomes a jackpot is 10%, while when it becomes a reach at "7", the probability that the symbol variation becomes a jackpot is 10%. It may be configured to be 50%. In addition, in the case where the display mode of the first decorative pattern is configured to differ depending on the background effect or the game state, the display mode may be changed depending on whether or not letters are attached to the numbers of the first decorative pattern. For example, in the non-probability fluctuating game state, the first decorative symbol "7" does not have the word "SUPER" attached to it, while in the probability fluctuating game state, the first decorative symbol "7" ” may be configured to have the characters “SUPER” attached to it. In addition, in the case of a jackpot with the first main game symbol (especially during a non-time reduction game state), the word "SUPER" is not attached to the 7, and when a jackpot with the second main game symbol (especially during a time reduction game state) ), the word "SUPER" is attached to the number "7", or the word "SUPER" is attached to the number "7" due to a jackpot in the first main game symbol (especially during the non-time saving game state). , the probability that the word "SUPER" will be attached to the number "7" may be increased when the second main game symbol hits the jackpot (particularly during the time reduction game state). Furthermore, if the word "SUPER" is attached, a 16R jackpot is confirmed (a configuration in which a 16R probability variable win is confirmed), but if the word "SUPER" is not attached, a 16R jackpot is confirmed. may not be determined (a structure in which the 16R probability winning is not determined) or the property may be such that the 4R jackpot is determined. Note that the first decorative pattern may have the letters "SUPER" attached to it, but the second decorative pattern is configured such that the letters "SUPER" are not necessarily attached thereto. Further, the first decorative patterns other than "7" (especially even numbered symbols) are configured such that the characters "SUPER" are not attached thereto even if they are first decorative patterns.

Next, FIG. 78 is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, an example is shown of an area in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can be displayed on the performance display device SG. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in the upper left of the figure, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner around the center of the display area SG10, and the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner around the upper left of the display area SG10. It is configured so that The range of the display area SG10 in which decorative patterns can be displayed considering the execution of SP reach effect or the execution of a jackpot is such that the second decorative pattern is in the upper right corner of the figure, and the first decorative pattern is The range is as shown in the lower right corner of the drawing. As illustrated, in the fourth embodiment, the area where the first decorative pattern can be displayed is larger than the area where the second decorative pattern can be displayed. Further, in the fourth embodiment, the display of the second decorative pattern is configured not to move during the variable display, while the display of the first decorative pattern moves during the variable display (for example, the upper part of the display area SG10 Since the moving range of the first decorative pattern is larger than the moving range of the second decorative pattern.

Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram related to the variable display period of decorative symbols in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern and the display are illustrated when the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed. First, in the upper left row of the figure, since the main game symbol is changing, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. Next, in the upper right corner of the figure, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern become a ready-to-reach display. Next, in the lower left of the figure, a battle performance is executed as an SP reach performance. The display of the first decorative pattern is erased (it becomes hidden). On the other hand, the second decorative pattern continues to be displayed as the reach display, and if the player wants to check the status of the decorative pattern during the battle performance, the player can check the reach by visually checking the display of the second decorative pattern. You can recognize that it is inside. Thereafter, the battle performance is won, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed as the jackpot pattern. In this way, while the main game symbols are changing, there is a period when the display of the first decorative symbol is erased (while the battle performance is being executed), while the display of the second decorative symbol is always displayed, so the display of the first decorative symbol is The display period of the second decorative pattern is relatively longer than the display period of the pattern. Note that even when the first decorative pattern is a ready-to-reach display, the second decorative pattern may be configured not to be a ready-to-reach display. Further, even when the first decorative pattern executes the above-described pseudo-continuous variation, the second decorative pattern may be configured not to execute the pseudo-continuous variation. Further, the second decorative pattern does not need to be displayed all the time; for example, the second decorative pattern may be hidden during the period when the first decorative pattern is displayed, or it may cover the display area SG10 as a specific effect. When such an effect with a large display area is executed, the second decorative pattern may be hidden (difficult to see).

Next, FIG. 80 is an image diagram of decorative patterns used in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in the same figure, the structure concerning the display mode of the decorative pattern applicable to 4th Embodiment is illustrated. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is changing, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are being displayed in a changing manner. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol has ended, and the jackpot symbol "7A" has stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, so the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have stopped as the jackpot symbol. It will be displayed. Incidentally, the first decorative pattern uses arithmetic numerals, which are common patterns on the first main game side and the second main game side, and in this example, "777" is stopped. Further, the second decorative pattern uses arithmetic numerals when the first main game pattern changes, and when "7A" stops, "777" stops.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the second main game pattern is changing, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are being displayed in a changing manner. After that, the fluctuation of the second main game symbol has ended, and the jackpot symbol "7B" has stopped as the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, so the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have stopped as the jackpot symbol. It will be displayed. Note that the first decorative pattern has "777" stopped. On the other hand, the second decorative symbols are configured such that when the second main game symbol changes, the alphabet is used, and when "7B" stops, "AAA" stops. In this way, in the first decorative pattern, the pattern used when the first main game pattern changes and the pattern used when the second main game pattern changes are the same (the display area of the pattern and the design of the pattern are the same, and it is difficult for the player to distinguish between fluctuations in the first main game symbol and fluctuations in the second main game symbol just by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol). On the other hand, in the second decorative symbols, the symbols used when the first main game symbol fluctuates and the symbols used when the second main game symbol fluctuates are different (the designs of the fluctuating and stationary symbols are different). are doing). Note that the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be displayed on the same display device, or may be displayed on different display devices. Further, a first hold display and a second hold display, which will be described later, may be displayed on the same display device or may be displayed on different display devices. In addition, when displaying both decorative patterns and hold displays on different display devices, either display device may be a liquid crystal display device (having multiple liquid crystal display devices), or a liquid crystal display device may be used. It may also be a device and an LED lamp.

Next, FIG. 81 is an image diagram of a stop display mode of decorative patterns in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in the same figure, similarly to FIG. 80, a configuration related to a display mode of decorative patterns applicable to the fourth embodiment is illustrated. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is fluctuating, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol has ended, and the jackpot symbol "7A" has stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, so the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have stopped as the jackpot symbol. It will be displayed. Incidentally, the first decorative pattern uses arithmetic numerals, which are common patterns on the first main game side and the second main game side, and in this example, "777" is stopped. Further, the second decorative pattern uses arithmetic numerals, and "777" is stopped.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the first main game symbol is changing at a different timing from the upper part of the figure, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is finished, and the jackpot symbol "7A" (the same jackpot symbol as the upper part of the figure) has stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, so that the first decorative symbol and The second decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed at the jackpot pattern. The first decorative pattern has the arithmetic numeral "333" stopped, and the second decorative pattern has the arithmetic numeral "777" stopped. In this way, the first decorative pattern has multiple types of stop display modes (such as "777" and "333") even when the main game pattern has the same stop pattern, while the second decorative pattern , when the stop symbols of the main game symbols are the same, only one type of stop display mode ("777") exists. In addition, as a specific example of a candidate for the stop display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, first, when the stop display mode of the first decorative pattern is a stop display mode that suggests a 16R jackpot. are "333" and "777", and in the case of a stop display mode that suggests a jackpot of 8R (or 8R or more), they are "111" and "555", and 4R (or 4R or more). In the case of a stop display mode that suggests a jackpot, the numbers are "222", "444", "666", and "888". In addition, the stop display mode of the second decorative pattern is only "333" in the case of a stop display mode that suggests a jackpot of 16R, and a stop display mode that suggests a jackpot of 8R (or 8R or more). In the case of the display mode, there is only "111", and in the case of the stop display mode, which suggests a jackpot of 4R (or 4R or more), there is only "222". In addition, as another specific example, a candidate for the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol that suggests a transition to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot (transition to a probability-variable gaming state is almost certain) is , "111", "333", "555", and "777", and do not suggest that the transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state will occur after the jackpot ends (it is not certain that the transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state will occur). Candidates for the decorative pattern stop display mode are "222", "444", "666", and "888". In addition, the only candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol that suggests a transition to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot (transition to the probability variable gaming state is almost certain) is "111". , "222" is the only candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol that does not suggest transition to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot (transition to the probability variable gaming state is not certain).

Next, FIG. 82 is an example of display priorities in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, display contents that can be displayed on the effect display device SG are listed, and those with high display priority are shown in the upper row, and those with low display priority are shown in the lower row. In addition, when display content with a high display priority and display content with a low display priority are displayed overlappingly, specifically, for example, when a right-hand hitting instruction display and a first decorative pattern are displayed overlappingly, When displaying the overlapping part, the right-hand hitting instruction display with a high display priority is displayed on the front side (front layer) (displayed so as to be visible), and the first decorative pattern with a low display priority is displayed on the front side (front layer). is displayed on the back side (rear layer) (it is hidden behind the right-hand hitting instruction display and cannot be seen). In this example, the display priority is as follows from highest to lowest: "error display → right hit instruction display → power saving display → second decorative pattern → preview performance → first decorative pattern → pending display." Note that the display priority may be changed, but the display priority will be changed for "error display," "right hit instruction display," and "power saving display" because they have a large impact on the player's profits. That is not desirable. Furthermore, the order of display priority of the preview effect, the first decorative pattern, and the pending display may be changed, but the display priority of the preview effect, the first decorative pattern, and the pending display is that of the second decorative pattern. It is preferable to configure the priority level to be lower than the priority level. In addition, it is desirable to display the "right-handed hitting instruction display" in a position that is not hidden by other display objects (including accessories such as YK), and new display content that has a higher priority than the "right-handed hitting instruction display" should be added. In the case where the newly provided display content is displayed, it is preferable to configure the area where the newly provided display content is displayed so as not to overlap with the area where the "right-hand hitting instruction display" is displayed. Furthermore, the "power saving display" is configured not to be displayed while symbol variation is being executed.

Next, FIG. 83 is an image diagram related to priorities in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that this figure exemplifies a configuration related to a display mode of decorative patterns applicable to the fourth embodiment, and has a configuration different from that of FIG. 77 described above. First, in the upper row of the figure, the second main game symbol is fluctuating, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuating, and a right-handed instruction display is displayed (the game state is This is a time-reduced game state, and in the time-reduced game state, the game is played by hitting right. Thereafter, the area in which the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner overlaps with the area in which the right-hand hitting instruction display is displayed, and since the right-hand hitting instruction display has a higher priority, it is displayed in front. Further, the second decorative pattern and the right-hand hit instruction display are configured so that their display areas do not overlap.

Next, in the lower part of the same figure, a flock of sheep appears as a preview performance under a situation where the second main game symbol is changing and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. The display area of this preview effect overlaps with both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, and the priority is "second decorative pattern > preview effect > first decorative pattern," so the display of a sheep is When the and the first decorative pattern overlap, the sheep display is displayed on the front, and when the sheep display and the second decorative pattern overlap, the second decorative pattern is displayed on the front. Become. In addition, as in modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment described later, when there are multiple hold display areas on the effect display device SG (hold display on the first main game side and hold display on the second main game side), display, a first hold display and a second hold display exist, etc.), a hold display area SG10 is newly provided at the lower left of the display area SG10 in the figure (not shown). Even if the right-hand hitting instruction display and the display area SG10 are configured so that they do not overlap, for example, the hold display at the top right of the display area SG10 is set as the first hold display, and the newly created hold display is set as the second hold display, etc. good.

With the above configuration, the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is configured such that two decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are displayed on the effect display device SG, To provide a user-friendly game machine in which a player can check the status of decorative patterns even when he or she wants to by configuring the second decorative pattern to be displayed even when the first decorative pattern is erased. In addition, when it is desired to show a performance to a player such as an SP ready-to-win performance, by erasing the display of the first decorative pattern, the desired performance can be made more conspicuous. In addition, by configuring the display priority of the second decorative pattern to be higher than that of the first decorative pattern, in a situation where it is desired to check the status of the decorative pattern when the first decorative pattern is hidden, the second decorative pattern This means that the structure can be configured so that a situation in which the image cannot be visually recognized is unlikely to occur.

In the fourth embodiment, the first decorative pattern may be displayed as a combination of three patterns, while the second decorative pattern may be displayed as one pattern. In addition, there are four types of stop display modes for one pattern in the first decorative pattern, two types of stop display modes for one pattern in the second decorative pattern, and so on. The number of types of display modes may be greater than the number of types of stop display modes for one second decorative pattern. With such a configuration, the probability that the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol (display mode of a combination of three symbols) remains the same continuously over a predetermined number of symbol changes is greater than the probability that the second decorative symbol is It can be configured such that the probability that the stop display mode remains the same continuously over a predetermined number of symbol variations is higher. In addition, two display areas, "○" and "x", are provided as the display area for the second decorative pattern, and "○" is lit when the pattern fluctuation is stopped and displayed at a jackpot (or small win) symbol. If the symbol change results in a loss, an "x" may be displayed. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the display of the second decorative pattern does not move on the display area SG10, and the "○" or "x" blinks to notify that the pattern is changing. It may be configured as follows. In addition, two display areas are provided as the display area for the second decorative symbol, an area in the shape of "○" and an area in the shape of "☆", and when the first main game symbol changes, the shape is in the shape of "○". A variable display and a stop display are executed in the area, and when the second main game symbol changes, a variable display and a stop display are executed in the "☆" shaped area, and "○" or A flashing "☆" will notify you that the symbol is changing, and if the symbol fluctuation is stopped at a jackpot (or small hit) symbol, a "○" or "☆" will be lit up and the symbol will change. When the fluctuation is stopped and displayed in a losing pattern, the "○" or "☆" may be displayed off. In such a case, in the first decorative pattern, the first main The symbols used when changing the game symbols and the symbols used when changing the second main game symbol are the same (the display area of the symbols and the design of the symbols are the same, and the player only visually recognizes the first decorative symbol) This is a symbol in which it is difficult to distinguish between fluctuations in the first main game symbol and fluctuations in the second main game symbol, and may be configured as, for example, "777"). In addition, in the second decorative pattern, the pattern used when the first main game pattern changes and the pattern used when the second main game pattern changes are different (the areas for variable display and stop display are different). (The designs of the fluctuating and statically displayed symbols are different.) Furthermore, as described above, in the case where two display areas are provided as display areas for the second decorative symbols, an area in the shape of an "○" and an area in the shape of a "☆", the first main game symbols If the jackpot (or small win) symbol is stopped and displayed, "○" will be lit up, and if the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot (or small win) symbol, "☆" will be displayed. If the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, a "○" is displayed off, and if the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, a "☆" is displayed. The stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is "333" when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is a jackpot (or small win) symbol. It can be stopped and displayed in multiple types of stop display modes such as "" and "777", and when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, "326" or " The display may be configured so that it can be stopped and displayed in a plurality of types of stop display modes such as "761". With such a configuration, the number of types of stop display modes of the second decorative symbol is such that the second decorative symbol stops when the main game symbol (the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) becomes a jackpot (or a small win). There is only one type of stop display mode that can be obtained, and there is only one type of stop display mode that can be stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) becomes a loss. The number of types of symbol stop display modes includes multiple types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) becomes a jackpot (or small win);
In addition, there are a plurality of types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) becomes a loss.

(Example 1 of change from the fourth embodiment)
Here, in the embodiment described above, a configuration in which two decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are displayed on the effect display device was described in detail, but such a configuration is different from the embodiment described above. It is not limited to only the configuration of the form. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment, and only the differences from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 84 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 3500 (fourth variation 1), that is, in step 2200, the sub control board S executes the decorative pattern display content determination process, and then steps 3500 (fourth variation 1). In step 1), the sub-control board S executes a decorative pattern display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2400.

Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 84 in modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2118-1 (fourth change 1) and step 2118-2 (fourth change 1), that is, in step 2106, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 After temporarily storing the information in the pending information temporary storage area, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2116, or after the drawing pending information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2111. has not received the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main side, in step 2118-1 (fourth change 1), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 displays the drawing pending counter value as the first pending display. The same number of pending images (lamp-shaped pending display on the production display device SG) are lit and displayed on the production display device SG. Next, in step 2118-2 (fourth change 1), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the drawing reservation counter value as a numerical value on the effect display device SG as a second reservation display, and The process moves to step 2200. Note that the display mode of the second hold display is not limited to the mode of this example, and may be displayed by a combination of lighting and blinking in LED lamps that is different from the display on the effect display device SG. It is sufficient that the hold display and the second hold display are different.

Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display control process related to the subroutine of step 3500 (fourth variation 1) in FIG. 84 in modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3502, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 3506, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 3508, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 3510. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 3502, the process moves to step 3510.

Next, in step 3510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 3510, in step 3512 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 checks the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 3514, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 adjusts the decorative pattern variation start timing based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Determine whether it has been reached. If Yes in step 3514,
In step 3516, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a decorative pattern variation display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and proceeds to step 3526.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3514, in step 3518, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 displays the decoration based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. If Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a decorative pattern stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side ) and the process moves to step 3526.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3518, in step 3522, the preview effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25), the design fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the reach effect display control means SM24) Based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-reach image has arrived. If Yes in step 3522, in step 3524, the preview effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the preview image or ready-to-reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). (is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process moves to step 3526. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 3522, the process moves to step 3526.

Next, in step 3526, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, by referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, (Determine whether information indicating that the symbol will be stopped and displayed has been received.) If Yes in step 3526, in step 3528, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a decorative pattern stop display command (determined display command) (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). be done) Next, in step 3530, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 3532, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2400). do. Note that even in the case of No in step 3510 or step 3526, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 87 is an image diagram related to a change in the hold display in modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, in the upper left corner of the figure, a first hold display and a second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. Note that the number of reservations is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. Further, decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are stopped and displayed. After that, as the hold on the first main game side is exhausted and the next symbol change starts, the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side change. (The display that the number of pending games on the first main game side is 2 changes to the display that it is 1). After that, due to the same symbol change, a reservation occurs on the first main game side (a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10), and the number of reservations on the first main game side changes, so that the number of reservations on the first main game side changes. The first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the first main game side change (change from the display that the number of pending items on the first main game side is 1 to the display that the number of pending items is 2) to do). In this way, the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed in the display mode at the hold expiration timing when symbol fluctuation starts and the hold occurrence timing when the game ball enters the main game start opening. is configured to change.

Next, in the middle left row, a first hold display and a second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. Note that the number of reservations is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. Further, decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, during the same change, a pending change effect (a presentation that can change the display mode of pending) is executed as a pending look-ahead effect. In addition, the performance mode of the hold change effect shown in the same figure is a performance that targets the hold on the first main game side, and the display form of the first hold display changes when the first hold display is hit by a flame. It is a performance that provokes the question of whether or not it is true. Thereafter, as a result of the hold change effect, the first hold display on the first main game side changes, while the second hold display on the first main game side does not change. In this way, when the pending pre-read effect is executed, only the first pending display can change, and the second pending display is configured not to change. Furthermore, even when a hold change effect is executed for hold on the second main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side can change, while the second hold display on the second main game side can change. It is structured so that it does not change. Note that the pending look-ahead effect is executed by the process exemplified in the second embodiment and the like described above.

As illustrated in the figure, the characteristics of the first hold display and the second hold display are as follows:
(1) When the number of reservations is the same, the display manner of the first reservation display may change, while the display manner of the second reservation display does not change.
(2) The display mode of the first hold display can change even without an increase or decrease in the number of holds (exhaustion of hold or occurrence of hold), while the display form of the second hold display does not change unless there is an increase or decrease in the number of holds.
(3) When executing a performance in which an action is executed on a display related to a hold and the display mode of the hold changes as a hold change effect, the hold display that is the target of the effect is the first hold display, The hold change effect is not executed for the second hold display.
It is configured as described above.

Next, FIG. 88 is an image diagram related to the hold display for each gaming state in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the presence or absence of display and the display mode of the first suspension display and the second suspension display in the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, which are applicable in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, are shown. A configuration example is illustrated. First, in <<Example 1>> shown in the upper part of the figure, the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed in both the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. The display mode of the first hold display is different between the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state (the first hold display related to the first main game side and the first hold display related to the second main game side are different). Both are different). In <<Example 1>> shown in the upper part of the figure, the first hold display corresponds to the hold on the first main game side, the first hold display corresponds to the hold on the second main game side, and the first hold display corresponds to the hold on the second main game side. A second hold display corresponding to the hold on the second main game side and a second hold display corresponding to the hold on the second main game side are respectively displayed, that is, on the first main game side and the second main game side, Neither the first hold display (the area where the first hold display is displayed) nor the second hold display (the area where the second hold display is displayed) is shared.

Next, in <<Example 2>> shown in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed. A second pending display on the side and a second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. In addition, in the time reduction gaming state, a first hold display on the second main game side, a second hold display on the first main game side, and a second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. , the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the game is played by executing a right-handed hit in the time-reduced game state, varying the second main game symbol (by letting the game ball enter the second main game starting port B10), and proceeding with the game. In the case of a Pachinko gaming machine (particularly in the case of a gaming machine where the hold on the second main game side takes priority over the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is held by the player. Since it is not very important for the player, the first pending display on the first main game side may be hidden. Furthermore, even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the configuration is such that the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side, so the second reservation display on the first main game side is not displayed. It is configured like this.

Next, in <<Example 3>> shown in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the first main game side are displayed. The second hold display on the side is displayed, and the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed. In addition, in the time reduction gaming state, a first hold display on the second main game side, a second hold display on the first main game side, and a second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. , the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the game is played by executing a right-handed hit in the time-reduced game state, varying the second main game symbol (by letting the game ball enter the second main game starting port B10), and proceeding with the game. In the case of a Pachinko gaming machine (particularly in the case of a gaming machine where the hold on the second main game side takes priority over the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is held by the player. Since it is not very important for the player, the first pending display on the first main game side may be hidden. In addition, it is possible to create a game in which the game is progressed by executing a left-handed hit in the non-time saving game state and changing the first main game symbol (by letting the game ball enter the first main game starting port A10). In the case of a pachinko game machine (particularly when the second main game starting port B10 does not exist in the flow path of the game ball that is hit left), the holding on the second main game side is not very important for the player. , the first pending display on the second main game side may be configured to be hidden. Even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side. The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are configured to be always displayed. In addition, in the figure, an example is illustrated in which the configuration regarding the presence or absence of a hold display is different between the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-probability variation gaming state and the probability variation The configuration regarding the presence or absence of a hold display may be different depending on the gaming state, or the configuration regarding the presence or absence of a hold display may be different depending on the production mode. Note that the configuration shown in <<Example 1>> where the display mode of the first hold display differs due to the difference in the gaming state shown in <<Example 1>> but the display form of the second hold display does not differ is the configuration shown in <<Example 2>> and <<Example 1>>. It is also applicable to the configuration 3≫. As shown above in <<Example 1>><<Example2>><<Example3>>,
(1) If the gaming states differ (for example, between a non-time saving gaming state and a time saving gaming state, or between a non-probability variable gaming state and a probability variable gaming state, or depending on the type of limited frequency state) , the display manner of the first pending display is different, but the display manner of the second pending display is the same.
(2) If the production modes are different (for example, between the daytime stage in Fig. 77 and the night stage in Fig. 77, or between a predetermined production stage indicating that a pending look-ahead production is being executed and a production stage other than the predetermined production stage) (or depending on which one of the plurality of types of production stages that can be manually switched), the display mode of the first pending display is different, but the display mode of the second pending display is the same.
(3) If the gaming states differ (for example, between a non-time saving gaming state and a time saving gaming state, or between a non-probability variable gaming state and a probability variable gaming state, or depending on the type of limited frequency state) , the presence or absence of the first pending display is different, but the second pending display is always displayed regardless of the gaming state (however, the second pending display is always displayed regardless of the gaming state (however, if there are special gaming states or error states that have priority over the pending display) (In a state in which there is information to be displayed, neither the first pending display nor the second pending display may be displayed).
(4) If the production modes are different (for example, between the daytime stage in Fig. 77 and the night stage in Fig. 77, or between a predetermined production stage indicating that a pending look-ahead production is being executed and a production stage other than the predetermined production stage) (or depending on which one of multiple types of production stages that can be manually switched), whether or not the first suspension display is displayed differs, but regardless of which production mode the second suspension display is displayed. is always displayed (However, in display modes that have information that should be displayed with priority over the pending display, such as demo screen display or error display, neither the first pending display nor the second pending display will be displayed. good).
It has the following characteristics. Note that the above features are applicable to both the reservation on the first main game side and the reservation on the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 89 is an image diagram related to deletion of the hold display in modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, a first hold display and a second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. Further, the number of reservations is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. Further, decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-reach display in the same variation, and then a battle production is executed as an SP ready-to-reach production in the same variation. While the battle performance is being executed, the first pending display is erased (hidden) on both the first main game side and the second main game side, while the second pending display is displayed on both the first main game side and the second main game side. Both displays on the second main game side are continuously displayed. As described above, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the display area SG10 is The first pending display is configured to be erased because the user wants to exclusively execute the battle effect (using most of the display area SG10). Furthermore, even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side. The second pending display on the side and the second pending display on the second main game side are configured to be always displayed. In the figure, when SP reach is executed, the first pending display (the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second pending display is hidden. Although the configuration is illustrated in which the pending display (the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) remains displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. (or all the time), the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second hold display (the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden. The second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side may be configured to remain displayed. Furthermore, when executing SP reach, the first pending display (the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second pending display (first pending display on the second main game side) is hidden. The configuration in which the second hold display on the main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side remain displayed may be applied at all times during the execution period of SP reach, or may be applied during the execution period of SP reach. May be applied to some periods.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment, two pending displays, the first pending display and the second pending display, are displayed on the effect display device SG. With regard to the first pending display, the display format changes to suggest the expectation level of jackpot related to the pending, and when the player wants to draw attention to the SP reach effect, the display is erased, etc. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by adjusting the display mode (display presence or absence) to match the situation and by using it as part of a performance that suggests a jackpot or the like. In addition, by configuring the second pending display to be always displayed and the display format not to change, when a player wants to check the current pending number, the player can recognize the pending number without causing any doubts. It is configured like this.

Note that the first modification from the fourth embodiment may be configured to display a suspended digestion transmission image as exemplified in the third modification from the second embodiment. In such a configuration, it may be configured such that the suspended digestion transmission image corresponding to the first suspension display is displayed, and the suspended digestion transmission image corresponding to the second suspension display is not displayed. In addition, the hold display corresponding to the first hold display is a display mode that is the same or similar to the first hold display, for example, the first hold display is a display in the shape of an "○". , and if the display color is "red", "green", "blue", or "white", the pending digestion communication image corresponding to the first pending display will also be "○". An example of such a configuration is that the display is in the shape of ``, and the display color is one of ``red,'' ``green,'' ``blue,'' and ``white.'' Furthermore, the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the hold on the main game side corresponding to the first hold display is extinguished, and the display mode of the first hold display immediately after the hold on the main game side corresponding to the first hold display is exhausted. The display mode of the pending digestion transmission image may be configured to be displayed in the same manner.

In addition, when the configuration is such that the pending digestion transmission image can be displayed, the configuration may be as follows. Note that only one of the following configurations may be employed, or a plurality of components may be combined. In addition, a configuration employing only one component or a configuration combining a plurality of components, and one or more of the configurations of <<Example 1>>, <<Example 2>>, or <<Example 3>> in FIG. You may also combine them.
(1) In the non-time saving game state, the suspended consumption transmission image on the first main game side can be displayed, but the suspended consumption transmission image on the second main game side is not displayed.
(2) In the non-time saving game state, both the first main game-side pending consumption transmission image and the second main game side pending consumption transmission image can be displayed.
(3) In the time reduction game state, the second main game side's pending consumption transmission image can be displayed, but the first main game side's pending consumption transmission image is not displayed.
(4) In the time reduction game state, it is possible to display both the first main game-side pending completion notification image and the second main game-side pending completion notification image.
(5) In the non-time saving game state, the pending consumption transmission image can be displayed, but in the time saving game state, the pending consumption transmission image is not displayed.
(6) The proportion of displaying the suspended consumption transmission image in the non-time reduction gaming state is higher than the proportion of displaying the suspended consumption transmission image in the non-time reduction gaming state (for example, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the first main game (The side hold digestion transmission image is always displayed)
(7) In the non-time saving game state, the display mode of the hold-up consumption transmission image on the first main game side can be changed during symbol variation.
(8) In the non-time saving game state, the display mode of the second main game-side pending consumption transmission image does not change during symbol variation (if configured so that the second main game side pending consumption transmission image can be displayed).
(9) The display mode of the pending consumption transmission image on the second main game side in the time reduction game state can be changed during symbol variation. However, the held consumption transmission image on the second main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state changes during symbol fluctuations at a higher rate than the rate at which the held digestion transmission image on the first main game side changes during symbol variation in the non-time reduction gaming state. The percentage of people who do so is lower.
(10) In the time reduction game state, the display mode of the first main game-side pending consumption transmission image does not change during symbol variation (if configured so that the second main game side pending consumption transmission image can be displayed).
(11) Unlike the above-mentioned pending display, which has two pending displays, such as a first pending display and a second pending display, the pending digestion transmission image has a first pending display and a second pending display. It does not have two pending digestive transmission images such as images, but only one pending digestive transmission image.
(12) During SP reach, etc., the first pending display is hidden as shown in FIG. 89 described above, but the pending digestion transmission image remains displayed.
It may be configured as described above. In addition, although the above describes the configuration related to the display of the pending consumption transmission image in the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, ” may be replaced with “a non-probability variable gaming state and a probability variable gaming state”, or a configuration may be applied in which “performance mode A and production mode B” are replaced.

(Fifth embodiment)
Here, in the embodiment described above, the effect display device SG is configured to display two displays of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern as the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to one main game pattern. , the configuration in which two decorative patterns are displayed simultaneously on the effect display device SG is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which two decorative patterns are displayed simultaneously on the effect display device SG, which is different from the configuration described above, is defined as a fifth embodiment, and only the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 90 is a front view of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that a distribution starting port unit C50 including a first main game starting port A10 and a second main game starting port B10 is provided. Details of the distribution starting port unit C50 will be described later, but as shown in the figure, the distribution starting port unit C50 is provided with a first main game starting port A10 and a second main game starting port B10. The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area is configured to be easily guided to either the first main game starting port A10 or the second main game starting port B10. In addition, the game balls flowing down the right side of the gaming area are configured to easily flow down to the vicinity of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11hd attached to the distribution starting port unit C50. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, since the second main game starting port electric accessory B11hd is configured to be easily opened when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, the time saving game state (the auxiliary game time saving flag is On), by executing a right-handed hit, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11hd opens and the game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 (second main game starting port B10). The game ball that enters the distribution starting port unit C50 from the vicinity of the starting port electric accessory B11hd is configured so that it is difficult to enter the first main game starting port A10, but it is easy to enter the second main game starting port B10. ing).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the display area SG10 in the performance display device SG includes a second decorative pattern display area SG14, which is an area in which the second decorative pattern can be displayed in a variable manner, and a second decorative pattern display area SG14 in which the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. A first decorative symbol display area SG15 is an area to obtain, a common reservation display area SG16 that displays both the reservation on the first main game side and the reservation on the second main game side, and a display related to the reservation that has been expired. It has a hold passage route SG17 through which a certain hold extinguishment display passes. In addition, on the top of the performance display device SG, there is an accessory that is a movable accessory for the performance that will be driven when a performance that incites the player to decide whether or not it will be a jackpot, such as an SP reach performance, is executed. YK is provided.

Next, FIG. 91 is an overall view and an operational view of the distribution starting port unit C50 according to the fifth embodiment. First, the distribution starting port unit C50 has a common ball entry port C51 into which game balls flowing down the gaming area D30 can enter, and a game ball provided below the common ball entry port C51 that allows game balls flowing down from the common ball entry port C51 to enter. A starting port distribution member C50y (in this example, a three-legged member that tilts left and right around a spindle) that regularly distributes balls in the left-right direction, and a starting port distribution member C50y provided below the starting port distribution member C50y. The main game starting port A10 includes a first main game starting port A10, and a second main game starting port B10 provided below the starting port distribution member C50y. As shown by the dotted line in the same figure, the distribution starting port unit C50 configured in this way transfers game balls that have flowed into the common ball entry port C51 by tilting the starting port distribution member C50y in the left and right direction. It is configured to guide the player to either the first main game starting port A10 or the second main game starting port B10. For example, the case where the starting port distribution member C50y is tilting to the left is the "first position", and the case where the starting port distribution member C50y is tilting to the right is the "second position". In the case of "position", under the situation where the starting port distribution member C50y is in the "second position", the game ball that has flowed into the common ball entry port C51 is guided to the first main game starting port A10 side, While the starting port distribution member C50y is displaced to the "first position", under the situation where the starting port distribution member C50y is in the "first position", the game balls that have flowed into the common ball entrance C51 are transferred to the second main ball slot. At the same time as being guided to the game starting port B10 side, the starting port distribution member C50y is displaced to the "second position". In this example, the tilting operation of the starting port distribution member C50y in the left and right direction is performed by the weight of the game balls, so that mechanically, the game balls flowing into the common ball entry port C51 are , game balls are alternately distributed to either one of the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 (after distributing one game ball toward either one, one toward the other) It is designed with the intention of repeating the action of distributing individual game balls. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, since it is possible to execute a parallel lottery and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are configured to be able to fluctuate at the same time, by having the distribution starting port unit C50. , is configured so that the holding on the first main game side and the holding on the second main game side can occur almost equally, and can be changed frequently at the same time as the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. has been done.

Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (fifth) in FIG. 5 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1400(1) (fifth), the game content determining means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1400 (2) (fifth), the game content determining means MN executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500). With this configuration, fluctuations on the second main game side can start even when there are fluctuations on the first main game side, and fluctuations on the first main game side can also start when fluctuations on the second main game side occur. (so-called parallel lottery).

Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} of FIG. 92 in the fifth embodiment. In addition, this process is approximately the same process for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, so the first main game symbol side will be mainly explained, and the process for the second main game symbol side will be explained below. It is written in parentheses. First, in step 1407-1, the game content determining means MN determines whether the first (second) variation start condition is satisfied. The fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), and the first main game symbol is not fluctuating (in the case of processing on the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbol is not fluctuating). ), and the main game symbols must be on hold, and the small winning game must not be in progress. In other words, since parallel lottery can be executed, when executing the process related to the first main game symbol, there is no problem even if the second main game symbol is fluctuating, but when the first main game symbol is fluctuating, there is no problem. If so, the fluctuation start condition regarding the first main game side is not satisfied.

Next, in step 1407-2, the game content determining means MN reads out the main game side random number. Next, in step 1407-3, the game content determining means MN deletes the read main game side random number from the pending information and shifts the remaining pending information (discontinues pending). Next, in step 1407-4, the game content determining means MN executes a main game symbol winning/failure lottery based on the main game side random numbers and the game state. Next, in step 1407-5, the game content determining means MN determines stop symbols related to the main game symbols based on the main game side random numbers and the win/fail lottery results, and temporarily stores them in the RAM area. Next, in step 1407-6, the game content determining means MN determines based on the main game symbol winning/failure lottery result and the first main game content determining random number (second main game content determining random number) (in particular, the fluctuation mode lottery random number). The variation mode of the main game symbols is determined and temporarily stored in these RAM areas. Next, in step 1407-7, the game content determining means MN issues commands regarding information regarding the determined main game symbols and game state information (commands to the sub-control board S side, such as symbol fluctuation display start instruction commands). Set. Next, in step 1407-8, the game content determining means MN uses the first main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C1 (the second main game symbol Set the symbol variation management timer MP11t-C2) and start the timer. Next, in step 1407-9, the game content determining means MN selects the first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On part B21g), variable display of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is started. Next, in step 1407-10, the game content determining means MN turns on the first (second) fluctuating flag, and proceeds to step 1407-12. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-1, in step 1407-11, the game content determining means MN determines whether the first (second) fluctuating flag is on. If YES in step 1407-11, the process moves to step 1407-12.

Next, in step 1407-12, the game content determining means MN determines whether a predetermined time related to the variation time of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1407-12, in step 1407-13, the game content determining means MN selects the first main game symbol display section A21g ( The variable display of the main game symbols on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, the display is controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the process moves to step 1407-17. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-12, in step 1407-14, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1407-14, in step 1407-15, the game content determining means MN issues the first (second) forced stop execution command (a command to the sub side, and the first main game side has won the jackpot). If the second main game symbol is a loss, the second main game symbol is a loss and the information is forcibly stopped. If the second main game symbol is a jackpot, the first main game symbol is a loss and the information is forcibly stopped. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1407-16, the game content determining means MN selects the first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbols on part B21g) is stopped with the stopped symbols as losing symbols, the losing symbols are controlled to be displayed as confirmed stopped symbols, and the process moves to step 1407-17. In this way, in the fifth embodiment, when the first main game symbol stops at a jackpot symbol, the fluctuating second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss, and the second main game symbol stops at a jackpot symbol. When the game stops at a symbol, the first main game symbol which is changing is forcibly stopped due to a loss. In addition, when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss, a command to force the sub-control board S to stop is set immediately before the forced stop. (The effect when the sub-control board S side receives the command will be described later).

Next, in step 1407-17, the game content determining means MN sends information (symbol finalization display instruction command) to the command transmission buffer MT10 to the sub-main control unit SM side to the effect that the symbol fluctuation is finished. set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command sending process in step 1999). Next, in step 1407-18, the game content determining means MN turns off the first (second) fluctuating flag, and proceeds to step 1407-19. Next, in step 1407-19, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the stopped symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If YES in step 1407-19, the game content determining means MN turns on the conditional device activation flag in step 1407-20, and proceeds to step 1450. On the other hand, if No in step 1407-19, the process moves to step 1450 without executing the process in step 1407-20.

Next, in step 1450, the game content determining means MN executes the aforementioned specific game end determination process, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1500). Note that even in the case of No in step 1407-11 or step 1407-14, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1500).

Next, FIGS. 94 and 95 show the main game table 3 used when determining the variation mode of the first main game symbol and the variation mode used when determining the variation mode of the second main game symbol in the fifth embodiment. This is the main game table 3. The contents of the table are the same as in the second embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Note that the performance contents corresponding to the determined variation mode of the main game symbols will be described later.

Next, FIG. 96 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in the fifth embodiment. The differences from the second embodiment are step 2050 (fifth), step 2200 (fifth), step 2350 (fifth), step 2500 (fifth), and step 3300 (fifth), that is, the sub When the main control unit SM starts executing the repeat processing routine (b), in step 2050 (fifth), the sub control board S executes a symbol standby display control process, which will be described later, and then proceeds to step 2100. Transition. Further, after the sub-control board S executes the pending information management process in step 2100, in step 2200 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes a decorative pattern display content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2300. do. Further, after the sub-control board S executes the first decorative pattern display control process in step 2300, in step 2350 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes the second decorative pattern display control process, which will be described later. The process moves to step 2400. Further, after the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process in step 2400, in step 2500 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes the background effect control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3300 (fifth), the sub control board S executes accessory drive control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2999.

Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of symbol standby display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and displays the standby preparation flag (both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped). flag) is off. If Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines that both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are newly displayed in a stopped state (the first decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state). Under the situation, the second decorative pattern is newly displayed as a stop display, or in a situation where the second decorative pattern is displayed as a stop display, the first decorative pattern is newly displayed as a stop display. judge. If Yes in step 2054, in step 2056, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 controls the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t (which is an increment timer, and displays the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in a stopped state). Start a timer (to measure the elapsed time since the start). Next, in step 2058, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 turns on the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2060. Incidentally, if the answer in step 2052 is No, the process also moves to step 2060.

Next, in step 2060, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 refers to the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t, and sets the timer value to the standby execution value (the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the main area is placed in a standby state). It is determined whether or not the timer value has exceeded 20 seconds (in this example, 20 seconds). If Yes in step 2060, in step 2062, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 displays the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in the main area in a standby state. Note that the standby state ends when either the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern starts variable display. Here, the right part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area. In the fifth embodiment, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, a first decorative pattern that is a decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern and a second decorative pattern that is a decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game pattern are displayed. The decorative patterns are configured to be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, and one of them is displayed in the main area and the other is displayed in the sub area. Note that the main area is configured so that the area that can be displayed is larger than that of the sub-area. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the decorative pattern displayed in the main area is displayed as a pattern and numbers, and the decorative pattern displayed in the sub area is configured to be displayed only in numbers (numbers The first decorative pattern is an arithmetic numeral, and the second decorative pattern is a Chinese numeral). Further, as illustrated in the same figure, in a situation where the first decorative pattern is displayed as a picture and numbers in the main area, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. After 20 seconds have elapsed, the display of the first decorative pattern in the main area is configured to display only the pattern. This display of only the picture is called a standby state. Note that the main area and the sub area may be provided within the same liquid crystal (for example, within the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG), or may be provided in separate devices. As a specific example of providing them in separate devices, for example, an effect display device A and a effect display device B are provided as effect display devices, and the effect display device A has a main area, and the effect display device B has a main area. It may have a sub-area, and in the case of such a configuration, the size of the display area of the effect display device B may be smaller than the size of the display area of the effect display device A. good. Further, the number of effect display devices and the number of decorative pattern display areas (main area, sub area, etc.) may be set to three or more (a first area, a second area, a third area, etc. are provided).

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in step 2064, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 resets and stops the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t. Next, in step 2066, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 turns off the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and moves on to the next process (the process of step 2100). . Note that even in the case of No in step 2054 or step 2060, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2100).

Next, FIG. 98 is an image diagram of a decorative pattern display mode in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed in the main area are displayed as pictures and numbers, and the decorative patterns displayed in the sub area are configured as numbers only. The numbers displayed in the design are arithmetic numerals, and the numbers displayed in the second decorative design are Chinese numerals. Moreover, the number of types of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are four types each. Although the details will be described later, when there is a trigger hold that is a hold regarding whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect, the display mode of the decorative pattern will be the first sub-area pattern table or the second sub-area pattern table. That is, the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the display mode of the second decorative pattern in the sub-area, and the display mode of the first decorative pattern when a trigger hold is present. and the display mode of the second decorative pattern are the same.

Next, FIG. 99 shows pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The differences from the second embodiment are steps 2130 (fifth) to step 2138 (fifth) and step 3050 (fifth), that is, in step 2128 (second), the drawing pending information display control means After the SM22 deletes the hold information and shifts the remaining hold information, in step 2130 (fifth), the illustrated hold information display control means SM22 determines that the hold to be expired this time is a hold related to the first main game side. Determine whether it exists or not. In the case of Yes in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2134 (fifth), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether the reservation display that is variably displayed in the main area of the main route (reservation passage route) passes. A command is set to execute a pending expiry display (an effect that allows the player to recognize that the pending is extinguished) in which the player passes through the area (details will be described later), and the process moves to step 2138 (fifth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2132 (fifth), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines whether the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are not in a standby state. do. In the case of Yes in step 2132 (fifth), in step 2136 (fifth), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 controls the sub route (an area in the reservation passage route through which the reservation display fluctuatingly displayed in the sub area passes). A command is set to execute the pending consumption display (details will be described later), and the process moves to step 2138 (fifth). Incidentally, in the case of No in step 2132 (fifth), the process moves to step 2134 (fifth). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, if the hold is exhausted on the first main game side, or if the hold is exhausted in the standby state, the hold is exhausted display is executed in the main route, and the hold is exhausted in the standby state. If the hold on the second main game side is exhausted in a situation where the game is not in the current state, the hold extinguishment display is executed in the sub route.

Next, in step 2138 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether trigger hold exists within the hold. If Yes in step 2138 (fifth), in step 3050 (fifth), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 executes a reservation change display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2138 (fifth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S moves to step 2116 without executing the process of step 3050 (fifth).

Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the pending change display control process according to the subroutine of step 3050 (fifth) in FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. First, step 3052
Then, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the suspension is a suspension that passes through the first main route after the occurrence of the trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether the trigger reservation is a reservation that will result in a jackpot. If Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the reservation change scenario determination table for jackpot, and based on the number of reservations at the time of trigger reservation occurrence, the reservation change scenario (trigger reservation A scenario that determines at what timing and how the pending display mode related to trigger pending changes is determined before such symbol variation is started.

Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for jackpot and a table for loss are illustrated as pending change scenario determination tables. As shown in the figure, the hold change scenario is based on the number of holds at the time the trigger hold occurs (the number of holds that will be cleared before the trigger hold occurs at the time the trigger hold occurs) and the number of holds related to the trigger hold. It will be determined by the result of the symbol change. In addition, the "1 change before" shown in the diagram is the pending display mode immediately before the trigger hold is extinguished, and the jackpot expectation of the "1 change before" pending display mode (if the trigger hold becomes a jackpot) The ratio of winnings to the sum of winnings and losses) goes from rainbow to red to blue. In addition, the pending display mode is configured to be able to change every time the symbol changes, but as the trigger hold period approaches, the pending display mode does not change or changes to a display mode that increases the expectation of a jackpot. It is configured to go. That is, as the trigger hold is about to expire, it is configured so that the hold display mode does not change to a hold display mode with a low expectation of a jackpot, and is configured so as not to spoil the player's expectations for the trigger hold.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in step 3058, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the reservation passage route display color determination table for jackpots, determines the display color of the reservation passage route, and performs the next process ( The process moves to step 2116). Further, if No in step 3054, in step 3060, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the reservation change scenario determination table for failure and determines the reservation change scenario based on the number of reservations when trigger reservation occurs. do. Next, in step 3062, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the reservation passage route display color determination table for use in case of failure, determines the display color of the reservation passage route, and performs the next process (the process of step 2116). ). Note that even in the case of No in step 3052, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2116).

Here, in the lower part of the same figure, a table for a jackpot and a table for a loss are shown as a reservation passing route display color determination table. As shown in the figure, the display color of the hold passing route is determined by the validity result of the symbol change related to the trigger hold. The jackpot expectation level of the hold passing route display color (the ratio of the jackpot to the total of the cases where the trigger hold is a jackpot and the case where it is a loss) is from the highest to the highest: "Rainbow → Red → Blue → No change" It becomes. Although the hold passage route is configured to be determined only at the first hold extinguishing timing after the trigger hold occurs, it is not limited to this, and is configured so that it can change every time until the trigger hold is extinguished. It's okay. In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the display mode so that it does not change to a display mode with a low jackpot expectation level as the expiry of the trigger hold approaches, similar to the change in the hold display mode described above (hold change effect). . In addition, regarding changes in the display mode of the pending display mode and the display mode of the pending passing route display color, it is not specifically shown at what timing in the symbol variation, but there is a preview effect at the start of the symbol variation, and during the symbol variation. The display mode may be configured to change at various timings according to the execution timing, when the hold is generated, when the hold is extinguished, etc., and by such a configuration, the player can always It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the pending display mode or the pending passing route display color changes to a display mode with a high expectation of a jackpot. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the expectation level of the jackpot of the trigger hold is suggested by the display color of the hold pass route SG17, which is the display color of the hold pass route SG17 (the trigger hold is more likely to be a loss when the trigger hold is a jackpot). However, the present invention is not limited to this. and has a display mode of the pending digestion transmission image, and when the display mode is configured to suggest the jackpot expectation of symbol fluctuation related to the pending digestion transmission image, the display color of the pending passage route , it may be configured such that the display manner of the pending consumption transmission image can be different, that is, the jackpot expectation level suggested by the pending consumption transmission image may be different, or the display manner of the pending consumption transmission image may be changed easily. may be configured differently. In addition, the display color of the hold passage route is configured such that the content of the effect of symbol fluctuations related to the expired hold that has passed through the hold pass route SG17 may be different (the rate at which effects with high jackpot expectations are executed may be different). You may.

Next, FIG. 101 is an image diagram of a reservation occurrence display in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, since the parallel lottery is configured to be able to be executed, a situation in which the first main game side and the second main game side are held simultaneously will frequently occur. However, the hold display is configured to be displayed in a common hold display section SG16 for the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side. In addition, in the order of numbers "1 → 2 → 3 ... → 8" shown in the same figure, regardless of whether the reservation that has occurred is the reservation on the first main game side or the second main game side. First, the common hold display section SG16 is configured to display holds in the order in which they occur (the most recent hold is displayed in the first area, and the holds that have already been displayed are displayed in the order of ``1 → 2''). ”). In addition, the hold display mode is the same for the first main game side hold display and the second main game side hold display, and just by visually recognizing the common hold display section SG16, it is difficult to tell whether the first main game The configuration is such that it is impossible to determine whether the display is on hold for the second main game side or the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 102 is an image diagram of a pending consumption display in the fifth embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, an example of the display on the common reservation display section SG16 when the number of reservations is 4 is illustrated. As shown in the figure, two holds on the first main game side and two holds on the second main game side are displayed, and number 1 is "A1" which is the hold on the first main game side, "B1", which is a hold on the second main game side, is displayed at No. 2, "A2", which is a hold on the first main game side, is displayed at No. 4, and "B2", which is a hold on the second main game side, is displayed at No. 4. has been done. Under such circumstances, the hold display when the hold is exhausted will be detailed below.

The middle row of the figure is an example of the order of symbol variations related to the four reservations mentioned above, and the lower row of the figure is an example of how the reservation display is erased in the common reservation display section SG16. With reference to these, the manner in which the symbol variation in the fifth embodiment is executed and the pending display is erased will be described in detail. First, as the symbol variation related to A1, which is pending on the first main game side, starts to be executed, the pending display in the No. 1 area, which is the pending display related to A1, is erased, and the remaining pending items are shifted and displayed. Ru. The display on the common reservation display section SG16 is "No. 1: B1, No. 2: A2, No. 3: B2". Although not shown, it is assumed that the symbol variation on the second main game side is executed at the symbol variation start timing related to A1. After 10 seconds thereafter, the symbol variation related to B1, which is pending on the second main game side, starts to be executed. The display on the common reservation display section SG16 is "No. 1: A2, No. 2: B2". Thereafter, the symbol variation related to B1 ends 20 seconds after the start of the symbol variation related to A1. Note that the symbol variation related to A1 is still changing. As the symbol variation related to B1 is completed, the pending symbol related to B2 is extinguished and the symbol variation starts, but in the display in the common pending display section SG16, the pending display related to "A2" is not displayed. The system is configured so that the pending display in the first area that has been displayed is deleted. That is, visually, from the state in which the No. 1 and No. 2 areas in the common reservation display section SG16 are lit, the display in the No. 1 area goes out, and then the display in the No. 2 area changes to the No. 1 area. It will be displayed in a shifted manner. On the other hand, since the hold that was actually completed is the hold related to "B2", the display in the No. 1 area is the hold related to "A2". In this way, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the hold that is actually consumed is on the first main game side or the second main game side, the hold display displayed in the No. 1 area is It will be erased (turned off).

Next, FIG. 103 is an image diagram of the reservation passage route in the fifth embodiment. First, in the fifth embodiment, a reserved passing route SG17 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area SG10. The hold passage route includes a main route, which is an area through which the hold display that is variably displayed in the main area passes, and a subroute, which is an area through which the hold display that is variably displayed in the sub area passes. First, the left part of the figure is an example where the hold expiry display when the hold is expired passes through the main route. In a situation where you are not in a standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the No. 1 area), and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the No. 2 area). The case where "A1", which is pending on the first main game side, is played out first will be explained. First, when "A1" is consumed, the pending display in the No. 1 area is erased, and the pending display moves toward the pending passage route SG17. After that, since the symbol variation on the first main game side related to the hold of "A1" is executed in the main area, the hold extinguishment display related to "A1" will pass through the main route and go towards the main area. Become. Next, the right part of the figure is an example of a case where the pending expiry display when the pending is expired passes through a subroute. In a situation where you are not in a standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the No. 1 area), and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the No. 2 area). A case where "B1", which is pending on the second main game side, is played out first will be explained. First, when "B1" is consumed, the pending display in the No. 1 area is erased, and the pending display moves toward the pending passage route SG17. After that, since the symbol variation on the second main game side related to the hold of "B1" is executed in the sub area, the hold extinguishment display related to "B1" will pass through the sub route and go towards the sub area. . In this way, in the fifth embodiment, depending on whether the symbol variation is executed in the main area or in the sub-area, the area through which the pending extinguishment display in the pending passage route SG17 passes is a sub-route which is the main route. The configuration is such that it is determined whether the

Next, FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time look-ahead determination process related to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that step 2552 and step 2578 are deleted. That is, in the fifth embodiment, even if there is a hold on the second main game side, the first main game The system is configured such that a prefetch effect related to the side's hold can be executed. In addition, in this example, the look-ahead effect on the first main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time reduction game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect can also be executed in the time reduction game state. It may be configured so that it can be done. In addition, although it has been configured so that the pre-read lottery on the first main game side can be executed only when winning a prize, that is, when a reservation occurs, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main game symbol fluctuation start timing, the main game symbol fluctuation It may be configured such that the pre-read lottery can be executed even at intermediate timings.

Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the second main game winning time look-ahead determination process related to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) in FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2602 (fifth), step 2610 (fifth), and step 2616 (fifth), that is, in step 2602 (fifth), the suspension look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means The SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not it is currently in a time reduction gaming state. If Yes in step 2602 (fifth), the process moves to step 2604, and if No in step 2602 (fifth), the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2118).

In addition, in step 2608, when the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26 determines that the new holding is a holding that will result in a jackpot, in step 2610 (fifth), the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines the predetermined probability. (In this example, 1/3) is executed as a pre-read lottery when winning a prize, and the process moves to step 2620. Further, in step 2612, when the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26 determines that the new holding is a group C hold, in step 2616 (fifth), the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines the predetermined probability. (In this example, 1/10) A pre-read lottery is executed when winning a prize (1/10 in this example), and the process moves to step 2620. In this manner, the fifth embodiment is configured such that even when there is a hold on the first main game side, a pre-read effect related to the hold on the second main game side can be executed. In this example, the look-ahead effect on the second main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect can also be executed in the time save game state. It may be configured so that it can be done. In addition, although it is configured such that the pre-read lottery on the second main game side can be executed only when winning a prize, that is, when a reservation occurs, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main game symbol change start timing and the main game symbol change It may be configured such that the pre-read lottery can be executed even at intermediate timings. Further, in step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth), the winning rate is set to be the same as the pre-read lottery winning rate on the first main game side.

Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2249-1, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2249-1, in step 2249-2, the drawing display content determining means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2249-3, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether there is no trigger hold within the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2249-3, in step 2249-5, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly expired hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-5, in step 2249-6, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be the main area. Next, in step 2249-7, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the first main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbols and variation mode of the first main game symbol, and 1. Determine the stopping pattern and variation mode of the decorative pattern. Next, in step 2249-8, the drawing display content determination means SM21n selects the first symbol content determination flag (based on symbol fluctuations on the first main game side) in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. A flag that is turned on when the relevant content is determined is turned on, and the process moves to step 3350 (fifth).

Further, in the case of No in step 2249-5, in step 2249-10, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the symbol change related to the newly expired hold is a symbol change from the standby state. judge. If Yes in step 2249-10, in step 2249-11, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the decorative pattern display area to be the main area. Next, in step 2249-12, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the second main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbols and variation modes of the second main game symbols, and 2. The stop pattern and variation mode of the second decorative pattern are determined, and the process moves to step 2249-15. In this way, when a new decorative pattern starts changing from the standby state, it is displayed in a changing manner in the main area regardless of whether the decorative pattern is the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern. It is configured like this. In addition, if the decorative pattern that newly starts changing from the standby state is the second decorative pattern, and the first decorative pattern starts changing while the second decorative pattern is changing, the first decorative pattern changes. Previously, the second decorative pattern was displayed in a variable manner in the main area, but when the first decorative pattern started to change, the first decorative pattern was displayed in a variable manner in the main area, and the second decorative pattern was displayed in the sub area. Alternatively, even if the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the second decorative pattern can be continuously displayed in a variable manner in the main area, and the first decorative pattern can be displayed in the sub area. The display may be configured to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, as mentioned above, since the decorative pattern that newly starts changing from the standby state is the second decorative pattern, when the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area, the display of the second decorative pattern is , the display of the first decorative pattern and the pattern in the main area are the same, and the display of the numbers is different (the first decorative pattern is an arithmetic numeral, and the second decorative pattern is a Chinese numeral).

Further, if No in step 2249-10, in step 2249-13, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be a sub area. Next, in step 2249-14, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the second sub-area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbols and variation mode of the second main game symbol, and 2. Determine the stopping pattern and variation mode of the decorative pattern. Next, in step 3100 (fifth), the drawing display content determining means SM21n executes main area interrupt processing A, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2249-15. Next, in step 2249-15, the illustration display content determination means SM21n selects a second symbol content determination flag (based on symbol fluctuations on the second main game side) in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. A flag that is turned on when the relevant content is determined is turned on, and the process moves to step 3350 (fifth).

Next, in step 3350 (fifth), the drawing display content determining means SM21n executes a production content determining process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Further, if No in step 2249-3, in step 3150 (fifth), a prefetching display control process, which will be described later, is executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2300). Note that even in the case of No in step 2249-1, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2300). In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the second main game symbol starts to fluctuate in the standby state, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the main area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in situations other than when an interrupt performance is executed, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is always displayed in the main area in a variable manner (even in the standby state). , the second decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game pattern may be variably displayed in the sub-area.

Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the effect display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 3350 (fifth) in FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3352, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n executes reading of the winning/failing lottery result regarding the symbol variation based on the command received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 3354, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3354, in step 3356, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n refers to the first decorative pattern performance content determination table based on the win/fail lottery results and the variation mode of the first decorative pattern, and adjusts the symbol variation accordingly. Decide on the content of the performance. Next, in step 3358, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n determines and temporarily stores the first half priority and second half priority of the symbol variation based on the determined performance content related to the symbol variation, and then performs the next process. The process moves to step 2300 (processing of step 2300). Note that the first half priority and the second half priority will be described later. In addition, in the case of No in step 3354, in other words, if the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the second main game side, in step 3360, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n selects the result of the lottery and the second decorative symbol. Based on the variation mode, the second decorative symbol production content determination table is referred to, and the production content related to the symbol variation is determined. Next, in step 3362, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n determines and temporarily stores the priority of the symbol change based on the determined performance content related to the symbol change, and performs the next process (the process of step 2300). ). Note that the priority will be described later.

Next, FIG. 108 is an example of the first decorative pattern presentation content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the same figure, the production content related to the first decorative symbol is configured to be determined based on the winning/failure result of the first main game symbol and the variation time (variation mode), and depending on the determined production content, an interrupt The first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements for determining whether or not to perform the performance, are determined. Note that the priority is relatively higher when the result is a jackpot than when it is a loss. Further, when the variation time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the variation time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority for the period before the start of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in symbol fluctuation, and the second half priority is the priority for the period after the start of the SP reach effect. In the symbol variation (performance content) in which the SP ready-to-reach performance is not executed, it is configured such that it has the first half priority but does not have the second half priority. Note that the priority is a number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 109 is an example of the second decorative pattern presentation content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the same figure, the production content related to the second decorative symbol is determined based on the result of winning or failing the second main game symbol and the variation time (variation mode), and depending on the determined production content, the interruption The system is configured to determine priority, which is an element that determines whether or not to perform the performance. Note that, unlike the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern does not have the two priorities of the first half priority and the second half priority, but has only one priority. Note that the priority is relatively higher when the result is a jackpot than when it is a loss. Furthermore, when the variation time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the variation time is short. Note that the priority is a number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) in FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the priority of the second decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3104, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether the priority of the second decorative pattern is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n selects an interrupt possible flag (design fluctuation of the determined second decorative pattern) in the flag area of the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. Turn on the flag that is turned on when the change is such that an interrupt effect can be executed. Next, in step 3108, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n determines whether the accessory YK is not stopped at the initial position. If Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n selects the accessory initialization flag (directing the accessory YK to the initial position) in the flag area of the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. Activation flag) is turned on, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2249-15). Note that even in the case of No in step 3104 or step 3108, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2249-15). In this way, in the fifth embodiment, after it is decided to display the second decorative pattern in a variable manner in the sub-area, the pattern variation of the second decorative pattern is interrupted (the variable display in the sub-area). It is configured to determine whether or not the variation is executable (an effect of exchanging the display area of the decorative pattern and the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed in the main area). In addition, if it is determined that the second decorative pattern can be executed by interrupting, the position of the accessory YK is confirmed, and if the accessory YK is in operation, the accessory YK is driven to the initial position. It is configured to control the By configuring this way, the details will be described later, but the proportion of the accessory YK stopping at the initial position at the timing of executing the interruption effect (the first timing of multiple timings) is increased. be able to.

Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the prefetching display control process related to the subroutine of step 3150 (fifth) in FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3152, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether the newly expired hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether the newly expired hold is not a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3154, in step 3156, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be the first read-ahead area, and proceeds to step 3158. Here, in the fifth embodiment, during the execution of the look-ahead effect (from the start of execution of the first symbol variation after the existence of a trigger hold until the end of the symbol variation related to the trigger hold), the first decoration The display area of the symbol and the second decorative symbol is configured to change, and as shown in the image of the pre-reading effect display device in the lower part of the figure, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed at the lower left of the display area SG10. A second look-ahead area is provided in which a second decorative pattern is variably displayed at the lower right of the display area SG10, and the first look-ahead area and the second look-ahead area are configured to have approximately the same display area. has been done. Moreover, the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is configured to be displayed only with numbers, similar to the case where they are displayed in the sub area. As described above, when two effect display devices are provided, one of the effect display devices (for example, the effect display device with a larger display area) displays two decorative patterns (the first effect display device). The decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) may be displayed variably (or statically).

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of No in step 3154, in step 3158, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be "first read area → enlarged when SP reaches", and in step 3158 to move to. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when a pattern variation is executed due to a trigger hold during the execution of a look-ahead effect, the variation of a decorative pattern related to a trigger hold is displayed in an enlarged manner in the center of the display area SG10, and SP reach is achieved. The performance is configured to be executed. Note that the decorative pattern that is not enlarged (for example, the second decorative pattern when the first decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed) is displayed in a variable manner at a position that does not overlap with the display area of the enlarged decorative pattern. That's fine. Next, in step 3158, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the first sub-area symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbols and variation mode of the first main game symbol, and refers to the stop symbols and variation mode of the first decorative symbol. Determine the variation mode. As mentioned above, since the variation mode of the decorative symbols during the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined by referring to the first sub-area symbol table or the second sub-area symbol table, the display mode of the decorative symbols is determined when displayed in the sub-area. Only numbers are displayed, similar to . Next, in step 3160, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the first symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (the process of step 2300). ).

Further, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3162, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether the newly expired hold is not a trigger hold. If Yes in step 3162, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be the pre-read second area, and proceeds to step 3168. In the case of No in step 3162, in step 3166, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be "pre-read second area→expansion at SP reach", and proceeds to step 3168. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the trigger hold is related to the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern, it is enlarged and displayed when a pattern variation related to the trigger hold is executed. It is configured like this. Next, in step 3168, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the second sub-area symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbols and variation modes of the second main game symbols, and refers to the stop symbols and variation modes of the second decorative symbols. Determine the variation mode. Next, in step 3170, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (the process of step 2300). ).

Next, FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the first decorative pattern display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2344 (fifth) and step 2346 (fifth), that is, step 231
After the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a variable display command for the first decorative pattern in step 6, and after the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop) for the first decorative pattern in step 2324, After the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328, or when the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines in step 2326 that the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-reach image has not been reached. In step 2344 (fifth), the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first forced stop execution command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 2344 (fifth), the process moves to step 2336. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2344 (fifth), in step 2346 (fifth), the decorative pattern display control means SM21 displays the variable display area (if the look-ahead effect is not being executed, the main area or the sub area). ), a stop display command (determined display) for stopping the first decorative symbol at a forced loss symbol is set, and the process moves to step 2340. The manner in which the forced loss pattern of the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern is displayed will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 114.

Next, FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the second decorative pattern display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2366, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the second symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in step 2368, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2370, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the second symbol variation flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2372, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 starts the second drawing variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2374. Incidentally, even if the answer in step 2366 is No, the process moves to step 2374.

Next, in step 2374, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the second symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2374, in step 2376 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 checks the timer value of the second drawing variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2378, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 controls the second decoration based on the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether the symbol fluctuation start timing has been reached. If Yes in step 2378, in step 2379, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a variable display command for the second decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). ) and moves to step 3200 (fifth).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2378, in step 2380, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the variation mode temporarily stored in the second drawing variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on this, it is determined whether the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the second decorative pattern has been reached. If Yes in step 2380, in step 2381, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the second decorative pattern (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, (transmitted to the SS side), and the process moves to step 3200 (fifth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2380, in step 2382, the preview performance display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-reach performance display control means SM25) stores the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. (and the variation mode temporarily stored in the ready-to-reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-reach image has arrived. If Yes in step 2382, in step 2383, the preview effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the preview image or ready-to-reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). , the data is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process moves to step 3200 (fifth). Note that even in the case of No in step 2382, the process moves to step 3200 (fifth).

Next, in step 3200 (fifth), the decorative pattern display control means SM21 executes main area interrupt processing B, which will be described later. Next, in step 2384, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not it has not received the second forced stop execution command from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2384, in step 2385, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, Referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the second main game symbol will be stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2385, in step 2386, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (determined display command) for the second decorative pattern (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 ). Next, in step 3250 (fifth), the decorative pattern display control means SM21 executes main area interrupt processing C, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2390.

Moreover, in the case of No in step 2384, in step 2388, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 displays the second decorative pattern in the variable display area (or the main area or sub area if the look-ahead effect is not being executed). A stop display command (determined display) to stop at a forced loss symbol is set, and the process moves to step 2390. The manner in which the forced loss pattern of the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern is displayed will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 114. Next, in step 2390, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the second drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2392, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol fluctuation flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (the process of step 2400). to move to. Note that even in the case of No in step 2374 or step 2385, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 114 is an image diagram of the stop symbol display at the time of jackpot in the fifth embodiment. First, a case will be described in which the first decorative pattern displayed in the main area shown in the upper part of the figure is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area. After that, since the first main game symbol stops at the jackpot symbol, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the main area ("777" in the figure). Further, since the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern, the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a forced loss pattern. The forced loss symbol of the second decorative symbol is a "giraffe", which is a symbol that is stopped and displayed only when the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped. Further, when the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a forced loss pattern, the background effect in the sub-area becomes a special background effect (background effect executed only when the forced loss pattern is stopped and displayed).

Next, a case where the second decorative pattern displayed in the sub-area shown in the lower part of the figure is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern will be explained. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main region. After that, since the second main game symbol stops at the jackpot symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the sub-area ("777" in the figure). Further, since the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern, the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a forced loss pattern. The forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol is a "zoo", and is a symbol that is stopped and displayed only when the first main game symbol is forcibly stopped. Further, when the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a forced loss pattern, the background effect in the main area becomes a special background effect (background effect executed only when the forced loss pattern is stopped and displayed). In this way, in the fifth embodiment, when the first main game pattern stops at a jackpot pattern and the second main game pattern is forcibly stopped due to a loss, the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. A forced loss pattern of the first decorative pattern that will be stopped and displayed when the first main game pattern is forced to stop due to a loss due to the second main game pattern stopping at the jackpot pattern. are configured to have different display modes. As shown in the figure, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area are different display modes. As a specific example of the display mode of the special background effect, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area may be "blue", and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may be "red". Further, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may all be the same display mode, or the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may be the same. The display mode may be partially the same as the display mode (only the colors are the same but the patterns are different, etc.).

Next, FIG. 115 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth) in FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3202, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the first interrupt timing of the second decorative pattern has been reached. In this example, the first interrupt timing is 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the second decorative pattern, and the system is configured to determine whether the interrupt effect can be executed at the first interrupt timing. There is. If Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets an interrupt enable flag (in the above-mentioned main area interrupt process A, if the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol itself is interruptible), flag) is on. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in step 3206, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the fluctuation status of the first decorative symbol being fluctuated is in the first half. In this example, in the variation of the first decorative symbol, the part before the start of SP reach is the first half, and the part after the start of SP reach is the second half, and in the variation where SP reach is not executed, only the first half is included. It is assumed that there is no such thing.

If Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines the first half priority of the first decorative pattern that is changing in the main area and the priority of the second decorative pattern that is changing in the sub area. are compared, and the process moves to step 3212. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3206, in step 3210, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets the second half priority of the first decorative pattern that is changing in the main area and the priority of the second decorative pattern that is changing in the sub area. Then, the process moves to step 3212. Next, in step 3212, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the second decorative pattern is higher than the priority of the first decorative pattern. Note that the priority of the first decorative pattern is the priority compared in step 3208 or step 3210. If Yes in step 3212, in step 3214 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK has stopped at the initial position. If Yes in step 3214, in step 3216, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the performance mode of the interruption performance to the performance mode when the accessory is not activated (with the accessory YK stopped at the initial position). The execution mode of the interruption effect when the execution is started) is determined, a command for executing the determined interruption effect is set, and the process moves to step 3220. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3214, in step 3218, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the performance mode of the interruption performance to the performance mode when the accessory is activated (a state in which the accessory YK is activated by a trigger other than the interruption performance). In step 3220, the execution mode of the interruption effect when the execution is started is determined, a command for executing the determined interruption effect is set, and the process moves to step 3220. In this way, when the priority of the second decorative pattern is higher than the first half priority or the second half priority of the first decorative pattern, the interrupt effect can be executed. The mode of the interruption effect is different depending on whether or not the interruption effect is stopped. Furthermore, the fifth
In the embodiment, the interrupting effect is a effect that is executed when the expectation of a jackpot due to symbol change is high (the priority of the second decorative symbol is high), so it is an effect that stands out (flashy) to the player. It is preferable to carry out the execution in a manner. Therefore, it is more suitable to perform both the effect display on the liquid crystal (on the display area SG10) and the operation of the accessory than only the effect display on the liquid crystal (on the display area SG10). In other words, it is preferable to execute the interruption effect while the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. Therefore, as mentioned above, by configuring the accessory YK to be activated to the initial position when the accessory YK is operating when main area interrupt processing A is executed, the effect when the interruption effect is executed. As an aspect, it can be configured such that the performance aspect when the accessory is not activated is selected more often. Note that the interrupt effects in steps 3216 and 3218 (interrupt effects executed at the first interrupt timing) may be referred to as first interrupt effects.

Next, in step 3220, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command for exchanging the display of decorative patterns between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to step 3222. It should be noted that even if No in step 3202, step 3204, or step 3212, the process moves to step 3222. Here, the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the sub area, and the second decorative pattern (second main game pattern) is In the case of a jackpot, if the display area of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is not changed, the second decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the sub-area, which is a smaller area than the main area, is the jackpot symbol. The game stops at , and the player's joy at winning the jackpot is diminished. Therefore, by executing an interrupt effect and making the fluctuating display of the second decorative symbol that becomes a jackpot into the main area, the jackpot symbol can be stopped and displayed in the main area, thereby increasing the interest of the game. .

Next, in step 3222, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the second decorative pattern is being displayed in the sub-area. In the case of Yes in step 3222, in step 3224, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the second decorative pattern has been reached. Here, in the fifth embodiment, the second interrupt timing of the second decorative pattern is 5 seconds before the end of the variation of the second decorative pattern. In the case of Yes in step 3224, in step 3226, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol being fluctuated is a symbol fluctuation that will result in a jackpot. If Yes in step 3226, in step 3228 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the second decorative pattern is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3228, in step 3230, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is in operation as a variation performance of the first decorative pattern. If Yes in step 3230, in step 3232 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command to execute the second interrupt effect. Next, in step 3234, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command for exchanging the display of decorative patterns between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to the next process (processing in step 2384). It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 3222, step 3224, step 3226, step 3228, or step 3230, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2384). In this manner, in the fifth embodiment, even if it is not determined at the first interrupt timing that the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the priority of the first decorative symbol, the priority is determined at the second interrupt timing. If the following conditions are satisfied, an interrupt effect is executed as a second interrupt effect.
(1) The second decorative pattern is changing in the sub area,
(2) The variation of the second decorative pattern is a variation that results in a jackpot,
(3) The priority of the second decorative pattern that is being changed is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (in this example, 2),
(4) The accessory YK is not activated as a part of the first decorative pattern fluctuation.
If the above conditions are satisfied, the interruption effect will be executed.

Although not shown, the second interrupt performance is configured to be executed when the accessory YK is not operating, so it is preferable that the performance mode is a performance mode in which the accessory YK is activated. It is. Further, the performance mode of the second interrupt performance may be such that the player can determine that the variation of the second decorative pattern is a pattern variation that will result in a jackpot when the accessory YK is activated. In the fifth embodiment, when the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the main area and the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the sub-area, an interrupt effect is executed and the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the main area. The decorative symbols will be displayed in a variable manner in the sub-area, and the second decorative symbols will be displayed in a variable manner in the main area, but when the interrupt performance ends, that is, the second main game side symbol related to the interrupt performance If the fluctuation is a loss, the timing at which the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol related to the interrupt performance ends, and if the symbol fluctuation on the second main game side related to the interruption performance is a jackpot, the timing at which the jackpot ends. , the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area, and the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the sub area. Although the details will be described later in FIG. 117, the third interrupt timing shown in FIG. The timing may be just before the stop or the timing just before the symbol fluctuation is confirmed and stopped. Furthermore, if it is the last timing of a plurality of interrupt timings that exist in one symbol variation period, it may be during symbol variation. In addition, when an interrupt effect is executed, or when the display areas of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are swapped, for example, when the first decorative pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the main area, the interrupt effect occurs. When the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub area and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main area, the variable display of the second decorative pattern displayed in the main area is executed. The display area of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is configured not to be swapped until the end of the process (during the variation of the second decorative pattern for which the interruption effect is performed, the next variation of the first decorative pattern starts). It is preferable to keep the second decorative pattern variably displayed in the main area even when the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main area.

Next, FIG. 116 is an image diagram of interrupt effect execution in the fifth embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure shows an example of the presentation mode when the accessory is activated. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area. Thereafter, 5 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the second decorative pattern, and at the time of the first interrupt timing, the accessory YK is activated as a performance corresponding to the variation of the first decorative pattern. In this case, an interrupt performance will be executed, but since the accessory YK cannot be activated as an interrupt performance, the performance mode is set to "LCD display only" (a performance mode in which the accessory YK does not operate). The interruption effect will be executed. The figure shows how the accessory YK, which was operating as a performance related to the first decorative pattern, returns to its initial position.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, an example of a performance mode when the accessory is not activated is illustrated. First, in a situation where a decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern is being displayed in a variable manner in the main area, and a decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game pattern is being displayed in a variable manner in the sub area, the second decorative pattern is When 5 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation and the first interrupt timing has arrived, the accessory YK has stopped at the initial position. In this case, since it is possible to activate the accessory YK as an interrupt performance, the interruption performance is executed in the production mode of "liquid crystal display + accessory operation" (the production mode in which the accessory YK is activated). It happens. In the same figure, a state where the accessory YK is operating in the center of the performance display device SG as an interrupt performance related to the second decorative pattern is illustrated.

Next, FIG. 117 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) in FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3252, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol being fluctuated is a symbol fluctuation that will result in a jackpot. If Yes in step 3252, in step 3254, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the second decorative pattern is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (3 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3254, in step 3256, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command to execute a third interrupt effect as an interrupt effect. Next, in step 3258, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command for exchanging the display of decorative patterns between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2390). Note that even in the case of No in step 3252 or step 3254, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2390). In this way, even if the interruption performance (second interruption performance) cannot be executed at the second interruption timing, (1) the pattern fluctuation of the executed second decorative pattern is a fluctuation that will result in a jackpot; (2) the execution If both of the following two conditions are satisfied: the priority of the second decorative pattern is higher than a predetermined value (3 in this example), a third interruption effect is performed as an interrupt effect at the stop timing of the second decorative pattern. is configured to run. Note that the timing at which the second decorative pattern stops is referred to as the third interrupt timing. In addition, since the execution of the third interrupt performance = the start of the jackpot, the performance mode of the third interruption performance may be a performance mode that congratulates the player who has confirmed the jackpot, or a performance similar to the one at the start of the jackpot. It may be configured to run. Furthermore, it may be a performance mode in which the accessory YK is activated. Further, the performance mode of the third interrupt performance may be configured to be different between when the accessory YK is operating and when it is not operating as the performance content related to the variation of the first decorative pattern.

Next, FIG. 118 is a flowchart of background effect control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2522, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether the prefetching flag (a flag that is turned on when the prefetch effect is being executed) is off. Determine whether it exists or not. In the case of Yes in step 2522, in step 2524, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether trigger hold exists within the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2524, in step 2526, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the first timing to start changing the decorative pattern in the main area after the occurrence of trigger hold has been reached. If Yes in step 2626, in step 2528, the background effect display control means SM23 calculates the time until the end of the symbol variation related to the trigger hold, and based on the result of whether or not the trigger hold is appropriate, the background effect display control means SM23 calculates the time until the calculated time elapses based on the result of whether or not the trigger hold is appropriate. Determine the preview performance scenario during pre-reading. Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of execution of a preview performance during pre-reading. The same figure exemplifies how a pre-read preview performance scenario is determined and a pre-read performance is executed. First, the pattern variation related to the trigger hold ends at the first decorative pattern fluctuation start timing after the trigger hold occurs (the fluctuation start timing of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, whichever starts changing earlier). The time until then is calculated, and a pre-reading preview presentation scenario for the period is determined. Thereafter, when 20 seconds have elapsed from the timing of the first symbol variation start, the message "hot" is displayed as a warning message. Thereafter, when 40 seconds have elapsed from the first symbol variation start timing, a cut-in effect is executed. Thereafter, when 60 seconds have elapsed from the first symbol variation start timing, an effect is performed in which the accessory YK is activated. Thereafter, since 70 seconds have passed since the first symbol variation start timing, the symbol variation related to the trigger hold ends. In the fifth embodiment, since the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner at the same time, if a preview effect is executed based on the variation time of one pattern change, a preview effect related to either pattern change is executed. In other words, there is a risk that it will be recognized whether the symbol change related to the trigger hold is being executed, and the interest of the symbol change related to hold other than the trigger hold becomes low. Put it away. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, by managing the execution timing of the preview performance based on the elapsed time from the start of the first variation of the decorative pattern after the trigger hold occurs, the overall interest of the pre-read performance is increased.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in step 2530, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the pre-reading flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2532, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "background during pre-reading" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {step 3300 (fifth) process}. In this way, the "background during pre-reading" is configured to be set for the first time when the determination in step 2526 is Yes, that is, at the first timing when the variation of the decorative pattern in the main area starts after the trigger hold occurs. In other words, the timing of switching from the "normal background" to the "prefetching background" is the start timing of symbol variation. Further, when the background effect is "background during pre-reading", as described above with reference to FIG. 111, a first pre-reading area in which the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner is provided at the lower left of the display area SG10. , a look-ahead second area in which a second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner is provided at the lower right of the display area SG10, and the look-ahead first area and the look-ahead second area are displayed in a variable manner side by side with the same display area. That will happen. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 2522, in step 2534, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the symbol variation related to the trigger hold has ended. If Yes in step 2534, in step 2536, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the prefetch flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2538. It should be noted that if the result in step 2524 or step 2526 is No, the process moves to step 2538 as well. Next, in step 2538, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "normal background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {step 3300 (fifth) process}. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 2534, in step 2540, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "background during pre-reading" as the background effect, and moves to the next process {step 3300 (fifth) process}. It should be noted that the "background during pre-reading" and the "normal background" may be displayed in any manner as long as they can be visually recognized and identified by the player.

Next, FIG. 119 is a flowchart of accessory drive control processing according to the subroutine of step 3300 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3302, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the effect content related to symbol variation has been newly determined. Incidentally, in step 3302, it is determined whether or not the presentation contents for cases other than when the pre-reading effect is being executed have been determined. In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is a scheduled operation of accessory YK in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes in step 3304, in step 3306, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory YK based on the variation mode of the decorative pattern and the effect content related to the pattern variation, and proceeds to step 3314. Moreover, in the case of No in step 3302, in step 3308, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether a preview effect scenario during pre-reading has been newly determined. In addition, in step 3308, it is determined whether or not the content of the effect in the case where the pre-read effect is being executed has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 3308, in step 3310, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is a scheduled operation of accessory YK in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes in step 3310, in step 3312, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory YK based on the preview effect scenario during pre-reading, and proceeds to step 3314. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 3304, step 3308, or step 3310, the process moves to step 3314.

Next, in step 3314, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether the accessory initialization flag (the change in the second decorative pattern is an interruptible change) It is determined whether a flag for operating the accessory YK to the initial position, which is turned on when the accessory YK is not stopped at the initial position at the time of determination, is on. If Yes in step 3314, in step 3316 the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory TK toward the initial position. Next, in step 3318, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the accessory initialization flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 3320. Incidentally, if the answer in step 3314 is No, the process also moves to step 3320. In this manner, in the fifth embodiment, if the accessory YK has been activated from the initial position at the time when it is determined that the pattern fluctuation of the second decorative pattern is a fluctuation that can be interrupted, the activation is It is configured to execute control to return the accessory YK that is being held to its initial position. Next, in step 3320, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not it is currently the timing to execute the interrupt effect. In the case of Yes in step 3320, in step 3322, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the interrupt effect to be executed is an interrupt effect in a effect mode in which the accessory YK is activated. In addition, as an interruption performance in which the accessory YK is activated, for example, an interruption performance (first interruption performance), which is the performance mode when the accessory is not activated, is executed at the first interrupt timing, and a second interruption performance is executed. , the third interrupt effect is executed, and so on. In the case of Yes in step 3322, in step 3324, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory YK based on the effect mode of the interruption effect, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2999). Note that even in the case of No in step 3320 or step 3322, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2999).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, two decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are displayed in parallel on the effect display device. By configuring the lottery to be executable, making the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game side the first decorative pattern, and making the decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game side the second decorative pattern, the first main game side It is possible to configure the system so that the symbol fluctuations of the second main game side and the symbol fluctuations of the second main game side are displayed at the same time. Further, the first decorative pattern is mainly displayed in the main area, the second decorative pattern is mainly displayed in a sub-area having a smaller display area than the main area, and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-area. When the expectation of a jackpot is high due to symbol fluctuations, the system is configured to execute an interrupt effect and display the second decorative symbol in the main area, thereby displaying the fluctuating decorative symbol that the player wants to see. The main area can be made larger and the game becomes more interesting.

(Example 1 of change from the fifth embodiment)
Here, in the fifth embodiment, the first decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern is displayed in the main area, the second decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game pattern is displayed in the sub area, and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game pattern is displayed in the sub area. When the priority of the decorative pattern is high (for example, the expectation of jackpot is high), the interrupt effect is executed and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main area. The display mode is not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration will be referred to as modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are steps 2249-16 (fifth change 1) to step 2249-26 (fifth change 1), that is, in step 2249-3, the drawing display content determining means SM21n is suspended. If it is determined that there is no trigger pending within the period, in step 2249-16 (fifth change 1), the illustration display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the symbol change is a symbol change from the standby state. . If Yes in step 2249-16 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-17 (fifth change 1), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be the main area. Next, in step 2249-18 (fifth change 1), the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether the newly expired hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-18 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-19 (fifth change 1), the drawing display content determining means SM21n inputs information regarding the stop symbols and variation mode of the first main game symbol. Based on this, the first main area symbol table is referred to, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol are determined, and the process moves to step 2249-8. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2249-18 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-20 (fifth change 1), the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbols and variation modes of the second main game symbols. Based on the information, the second main area symbol table is referred to, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol are determined, and the process moves to step 2249-8.

Further, in the case of No in step 2249-16 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-21 (fifth change 1), the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines that the newly expired hold is on the first main game side. It is determined whether or not the request is on hold. If Yes in step 2249-21 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-22 (fifth change 1), the design display content determining means SM21n changes the display area of the decorative pattern to the previous first decorative pattern. Decide on the same display area as the variation. Next, in step 2249-23 (fifth change 1), the design display content determining means SM21n selects the first main area symbol table or the first sub With reference to the area pattern table, the stop pattern and variation mode of the first decorative pattern are determined, and the process moves to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1). Further, in the case of No in step 2249-21 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-24 (fifth change 1), the drawing display content determining means SM21n changes the display area of the decorative pattern to the previous second decorative pattern. The display area is determined to be the same as the symbol variation. Next, in step 2249-25 (fifth change 1), the design display content determining means SM21n selects the second main area symbol table or the second sub With reference to the area pattern table, the stop pattern and variation mode of the second decorative pattern are determined, and the process moves to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1). Next, in step 2249-26 (fifth change 1), the design display content determining means SM21n determines whether the display area of the decorative pattern related to the pattern variation is a sub-area. If Yes in step 2249-26 (fifth change 1), the process moves to step 3100 (fifth), and if No, the process moves to step 2249-15. In this way, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the decorative pattern starts changing when it is not in the standby state, the previous pattern is used for both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. It is configured to be changed in the area (either the main area or the sub area) that was displayed in a changing manner. In addition, when the decorative pattern starts changing while in the standby state, regardless of whether the decorative pattern that newly starts changing is the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern, the new decorative pattern will be changed from the standby state. The decorative patterns that started changing later are displayed in a changing manner in the main area, and the decorative patterns that started changing later are displayed in a changing manner in the sub area.

Next, FIG. 121 is an example of the second decorative pattern presentation content determination table in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. In the first modification from the fifth embodiment, since it is not fixedly determined which of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is mainly displayed in the main area, the first decorative pattern also appears in the second decorative pattern. Similar to the decorative pattern, the first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements that determine whether or not to execute the interrupt performance, are determined based on the determined performance content. Note that the priority is relatively higher when the result is a jackpot than when it is a loss. Furthermore, when the variation time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the variation time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority for the period before the start of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in symbol fluctuation, and the second half priority is the priority for the period after the start of the SP reach effect. In the symbol variation (performance content) in which the SP ready-to-reach performance is not executed, it is configured such that it has the first half priority but does not have the second half priority. Note that the priority is a number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A related to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) in FIG. 120 in modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3112 (fifth change 1), step 3102 (fifth change 1), step 3104 (fifth change 1), step 3114 (fifth change 1), and step 3116 (fifth change 1). 5 Variation 1), that is, in Step 3112 (Fifth Variation 1), the preview effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the sub-area is the second decorative pattern. judge. In the case of Yes in step 3112 (fifth change 1), in step 3102 (fifth change 1), the preview effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the first half priority of the second decorative symbol related to the symbol change. Next, in step 3104 (fifth change 1), the preview effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether the first half priority of the confirmed second decorative pattern is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (in this example, 2). judge. If Yes in step 3104 (fifth change 1), the process moves to step 3106, and if No, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2249-15). Further, in the case of No in step 3112 (fifth change 1), in step 3114 (fifth change 1), the preview effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the first half priority of the first decorative pattern related to the symbol change. . If Yes in step 3114 (fifth change 1), in step 3116 (fifth change 1), the preview effect display content determining means SM24n determines that the priority of the first half of the confirmed first decorative pattern is a predetermined value (in this example, , 2) Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 3116 (fifth change 1), the process moves to step 3106, and if No, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2249-15). In this way, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, both the case where the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the sub-area and the case where the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the sub-area. Since the present invention is configured to be able to perform an interrupt performance even in the event of an interruption, it is determined whether the variation in the decorative pattern currently displayed in the sub-area is such that the interrupt performance can be executed. In addition, since the timing to execute the process is before the start of SP reach (timing before the start of symbol variation), the first half priority is checked as the priority.

Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the first decorative pattern display control process related to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. 96 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The change from the fifth embodiment is step 3200 (fifth variation 1), that is, after the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative pattern in step 2316, the decorative pattern is displayed in step 2324. After the symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative symbol, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328, or after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2326, When the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines that the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-reach image has not been reached, in step 3200 (fifth variation 1), the decorative pattern display control means SM21 executes main area interrupt processing, which will be described later. B is executed and the process moves to step 2344 (fifth).

Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B related to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth variation 1) in FIG. 123 in modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3236, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing decorative pattern is changing in the sub-region. In addition, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the main area interrupt process B in the same figure is executed in the first decorative pattern display control process, the determination is made for the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern is determined. When executed in the decorative pattern display control process, the determination is made for the second decorative pattern. If Yes in step 3236, in step 3237 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the decorative pattern displayed in the sub-area has arrived. In addition, in this example, the first interrupt timing is the timing 5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner in the sub area can execute the interrupt effect at the first interrupt timing. It is configured to determine whether the If Yes in step 3237, in step 3238 the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the interrupt enable flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3238, in step 3239, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the fluctuation status of the decorative pattern being changed in the main area is in the first half. In addition, in this example, in the variation of the decorative pattern, the part before the start of SP reach is the first half, and the part after the start of SP reach is the second half, and in the variation where SP reach is not executed, only the first half is included. It is said that

If Yes in step 3239, in step 3240, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 compares the first half priority of the decorative pattern that is changing in the main area and the first half priority of the decorative pattern that is changing in the sub area. , proceed to step 3242-1. On the other hand, in step 3239 N
In the case of o, in step 3241, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 compares the second half priority of the decorative pattern that is changing in the main area with the first half priority of the decorative pattern that is changing in the sub area, and in step 3242 -Move to 1. Next, in step 3242-1, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the sub-area is greater than the priority of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the main area. Determine whether It should be noted that the priority of the decorative symbols displayed in a variable manner in the main area is the priority compared in step 3240 or step 3241. In the case of Yes in step 3242-1, in step 3242-2, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK has stopped at the initial position. If Yes in step 3242-2, in step 3242-3, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the performance mode of the interrupt performance to the performance mode when the accessory is not activated (the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position). In this state, the mode of execution of the interruption effect when the execution is started) is determined, a command for executing the determined interruption effect is set, and the process moves to step 3242-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3242-2, in step 3242-4, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the performance mode of the interrupt performance to the performance mode when the role object is activated (the role object YK is activated when triggered by something other than the interruption effect). 3242-5, a command for executing the determined interruption effect is set, and the process moves to step 3242-5. In this way, when the first half priority of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the sub area is higher than the first half priority or the second half priority of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the main area, an interrupt effect is executed. However, the mode of presentation of the interruption effect differs depending on whether or not the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position.

Next, in step 3242-5, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command for exchanging the display of decorative patterns between the main area and the sub-area, and proceeds to step 3242-6. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 3237, step 3238, or step 3242-1, the process moves to step 3242-6.

Next, in step 3242-6, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the variation of the decorative pattern is being displayed in the sub-area. In the case of Yes in step 3242-6, in step 3242-7, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3242-7, in step 3242-8, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the decorative symbol being fluctuated in the sub-area is a symbol fluctuation that will result in a jackpot. If Yes in step 3242-8, in step 3242-9 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the second half priority of the decorative pattern being changed in the sub-area is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). (Since the second interrupt timing is later than the SP reach start timing, the second half priority is determined.) If Yes in step 3242-9, in step 3243-1, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is in operation as a fluctuating presentation of the decorative pattern that is fluctuating in the main area. do. In the case of Yes in step 3243-1, in step 3243-2, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command to execute the second interrupt effect. Next, in step 3243-3, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command to exchange the display of decorative patterns between the main area and the sub area, and performs the next process {step 2344 (fifth) process }. Note that if No in step 3242-6, step 3242-7, step 3242-8, step 3242-9, or step 3243-1, the process moves to the next process {step 2344 (fifth) process}. In addition, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when an interrupt effect is executed and the display of decorative patterns between the main area and the sub area is exchanged, the decorative patterns newly displayed in the main area Regardless of whether or not the symbol fluctuations result in a jackpot, the display area for subsequent decorative symbols is configured to be the display area after execution of the interrupt performance. Specifically, when the first decorative pattern is displayed in the main area and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub area, the interrupt effect is executed and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main area. Therefore, even if the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub area and the result of the pattern change of the second decorative pattern is a loss as a result of execution of the interrupt effect, the second decoration will be displayed in the main area in the next pattern change. The pattern will be displayed, and the first decorative pattern will be displayed in the sub-area. The third interrupt timing illustrated in the same figure (FIG. 124) may be the symbol fluctuation end timing = symbol fluctuation stop timing, or the timing immediately before the temporary stop of the symbol fluctuation or the timing immediately before the final stop of the symbol fluctuation. You can also use it as Furthermore, if it is the last timing of a plurality of interrupt timings that exist in one symbol variation period, it may be during symbol variation.

Next, FIG. 125 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C related to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) in FIG. 123 in modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3260 (fifth change 1) and step 3262 (fifth change 1), that is, in step 3260 (fifth change 1), the preview effect display control means SM24, It is determined whether the pattern variation of the decorative pattern that is changing in the sub-area is a pattern variation that will result in a jackpot. In the case of Yes in step 3260 (fifth change 1), in step 3262 (fifth change 1), the preview effect display control means SM24 sets the second half priority of the pattern variation of the decorative pattern being changed in the sub area to a predetermined value. (In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3) (since the third interrupt timing is later than the SP reach start timing, the second half priority is determined). If Yes in step 3262 (fifth change 1), the process moves to step 3256, and if No, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2340).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment, two decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are displayed on the effect display device. As a configuration, by configuring the parallel lottery to be executable, making the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game side the first decorative pattern, and making the decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game side the second decorative pattern, It can be configured to display symbol variations on the first main game side and symbol variations on the second main game side at the same time. Also, among the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, the decorative pattern that first starts variable display in the standby state is displayed in the main area, and the decorative pattern that starts variable display after that is displayed in the sub area. By configuring this, it is possible to equalize the value of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. By frequently changing the display cases, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the symbol fluctuations on the first main game side and the symbol fluctuations on the second main game side.

(summary)
Note that the following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and it goes without saying that these listed concepts can be combined or separated (generated into higher-level concepts), and concepts based on the further structures shown in the above examples can be added to these concepts. You can.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a validity determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display manner of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), control is performed so that the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG). a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and it is configured such that both the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern can be displayed in a variable manner within one performance period,
The first performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and the first performance symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period. If it is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the first production symbol is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the first production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first production symbol is confirmed. A special stop display mode that is not displayed when the stop display is temporarily displayed is configured to be temporarily stop display,
A Pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period are configured such that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain performance period. be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1-2) is
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
A variable prize opening that can be opened and closed,
a first identification information display section capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a fluctuating display format of the first identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display section to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information in accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a fluctuating display format of the second identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determining means;
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting necessary game information to the sub-gaming section when displaying an effect executed by the sub-gaming section, and while the first identification information is being variably displayed, the second identification information is variably displayed. is configured such that the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner.
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the first performance symbol to be displayed in a static manner on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the second performance symbol to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
Both the first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured to
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display both fluctuations of
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display both fluctuations of
When the first identification information is stop-displayed in a certain stop-display mode, the stop-display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop-display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop-display mode It is configured to be able to perform both stop and display operations.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the first performance symbol corresponding to the stop display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the stop display mode are stopped. It is configured to be able to perform both stop and display operations.
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
The first performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and When the first performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo fluctuation in which the first performance symbol is temporarily displayed in a fixed state within a certain performance period. A special stop display mode that is not displayed when the symbol is definitively stopped and displayed is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped and displayed,
A pachinko game characterized in that the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period are configured such that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain performance period. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (2) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a validity determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display manner of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After a plurality of types of first performance symbols are variably displayed on a performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG), a first performance symbol of one type or a combination of multiple types is displayed on a performance display unit (for example, A first effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21) that controls the effect display device SG to stop display;
After a plurality of types of second effect symbols are variably displayed on the effect display section (e.g. effect display device SG), a second effect symbol of one type or a combination of multiple types is displayed on the effect display section (e.g. A second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21) that controls the effect display device SG to stop displaying,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, it is definitely stopped and displayed, and within the same performance period. It is configured to display the second performance symbol in a variable manner and then definitively stop and display it.
The first performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and the first performance symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period. When the first performance symbol is displayed, it is configured to be displayed again in a variable manner within a particular performance period, and when the first performance symbol is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed, at the time of the stop display, A special stop display mode indicating that the special game will not be executed, but indicating that there is a possibility that the special game will be executed after that, can be stopped and displayed as a first performance symbol that is a combination of one type or a plurality of types. It is configured,
The second performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period cannot be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, or Even if it is temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the period, the special stop display mode may be used as a second presentation symbol that is a combination of one or more types. Even when the second performance symbol cannot be stopped and displayed and the second performance symbol is definitively stopped and displayed, the special stop display mode is configured so that it is not stopped and displayed as the second performance symbol that is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a validity determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display manner of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), control is performed so that the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG). a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and it is configured such that both the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern can be displayed in a variable manner within one performance period,
The first performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and the first performance symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period. If it is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the first production symbol is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the first production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first production symbol is confirmed. A special stop display mode that is not displayed when the stop display is temporarily displayed is configured to be temporarily stop display,
The second performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period is configured such that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain performance period,
The display states of the first performance symbols within a certain performance period include a first display state in which the first performance symbols that are being variably displayed are visible to the player, and a first display state where the first performance symbols that are being variably displayed are visible to the player. The player is configured to adopt either a second display state in which the first performance symbol is hidden or a second display state in which the first performance symbol is more difficult for the player to see than the first display state, and the second display state within a certain performance period. The symbol for use is configured to be displayed at least in the second display state,
When the special stop display mode is temporarily stop-displayed as the first performance symbol within a certain performance period, the special stop display mode may not be included when the first performance symbol is definitively stopped and displayed. It is configured to be a first special stop display mode that includes a first production symbol of the type, or a second special stop display mode that does not include the first production symbol of the specific type,
When the first performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed within a certain performance period, the second special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed more than when the first special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the degree of expectation for execution of a special game after the end of a particular performance period is higher when the game is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (4) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
Variable winning openings that can take open and closed states (for example, 1st big winning opening C10, 2nd big winning opening C
20) and
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the condition for starting the variable display of identification information is satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, symbol holding means MJ32) that temporarily stores the obtained random number until the point in time and controls the holding so that holding occurs;
When the conditions for starting the fluctuating display of identification information regarding a certain hold are met, a validity determination is performed based on the random number regarding the particular hold, and a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display of the identification information are performed based on the result of the validity determination. a game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
A performance pattern that controls the performance pattern to be displayed in a static manner on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) after the performance design is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) Display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20),
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and the design is configured to be able to display the design in a variable manner within one performance period,
A performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period may be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and may be temporarily stopped and displayed. In this case, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain performance period, and when the performance symbol is permanently or provisionally stopped and displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the performance symbol is displayed in a fixed or provisional manner. The special stop display mode indicates that the special game will not be executed at the time it is displayed, but that the special game may be executed after the definite or provisional stop display. It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed in
If a predetermined condition is met after a certain hold occurs and before the conditions for starting to display changes in the identification information regarding the hold are met, the hold will be designated as a specific hold, and at the time the specific hold occurs. , if there is one or more preemptive holds that satisfy the identification information change display start condition before the specific hold, then the identification information change display start condition regarding the preemptive hold is set. Within one production period corresponding to the case where the performance is satisfied, the special stop display mode is definitely stopped and displayed as a production symbol only when the production symbol is definitively stopped and displayed, while the identification regarding the specific hold is Within one production period corresponding to the case where the variable display start condition of information is satisfied, the special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed as a production symbol only when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to play.

A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the condition for starting the variable display of identification information is satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, suspension control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the obtained random number until the time of suspension, and controls the suspension to occur;
When the conditions for starting the fluctuating display of identification information regarding a certain hold are met, a validity determination is performed based on the random number regarding the particular hold, and a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display of the identification information are performed based on the result of the validity determination. a game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
A performance pattern that controls the performance pattern to be displayed in a static manner on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) after the performance design is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) Display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and the design is configured to be able to display the design in a variable manner within one performance period,
A performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period may be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and may be temporarily stopped and displayed. In this case, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain performance period, and when the performance symbol is permanently or provisionally stopped and displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the performance symbol is displayed in a fixed or provisional manner. The special stop display mode indicates that the special game will not be executed at the time it is displayed, but that the special game may be executed after the definite or provisional stop display. It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed in
If the special stop display mode is stopped and displayed as a performance pattern when a performance pattern is permanently or provisionally stopped and displayed within a certain performance period, at least one special performance pattern and the special It is configured so that it can be combined with multiple normal performance symbols that are of a different type from the production symbols,
If a predetermined condition is met after a certain hold occurs and before the conditions for starting to display changes in the identification information regarding the hold are met, the hold will be designated as a specific hold, and at the time the specific hold occurs. , if there is one or more preemptive holds that satisfy the identification information change display start condition before the specific hold, then the identification information change display start condition regarding the preemptive hold is set. When the special stop display mode is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed within one performance period corresponding to the case where the plurality of normal performance symbols cannot be of the same type, the identification regarding the specific suspension When the special stop display mode is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed within one performance period corresponding to the case where the variable display start condition of information is satisfied, the plurality of normal performance symbols may be of the same type. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (6) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is displaced to the open state. A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or it is easier to enter the ball compared to the closed state, and when the game ball enters the closed state, the game ball enters the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be unable to enter the ball or to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state;
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
A first game content determining means (e.g., game content determination means MN);
After the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying one identification information;
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
A second game content determining means (e.g., game content determination means MN);
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), a second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the second identification information to be stopped and displayed;
After the decision result based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the decision result based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
A performance pattern that controls the performance pattern to be displayed in a static manner on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) after the performance design is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) Display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The period from the start of fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and the design is configured to be able to fluctuate display within a certain performance period. has been
A performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period may be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and may be temporarily stopped and displayed. In this case, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain performance period, and when the performance symbol is permanently or provisionally stopped and displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the performance symbol is displayed in a fixed or provisional manner. The special stop display mode indicates that the special game will not be executed at the time it is displayed, but that the special game may be executed after the definite or provisional stop display. It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed in
Within one performance period corresponding to the period from the start of fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display, and within one performance period corresponding to the period from the start of fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display, the special stop This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display mode is configured such that the rate at which the display mode is definitively or temporarily stopped and displayed is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (7) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the condition for starting the variable display of identification information is satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, suspension control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the obtained random number until the time of suspension, and controls the suspension to occur;
When the conditions for starting the fluctuating display of identification information regarding a certain hold are met, a validity determination is performed based on the random number regarding the particular hold, and a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display of the identification information are performed based on the result of the validity determination. a game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), control is performed so that the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG). a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and it is configured such that both the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern can be displayed in a variable manner within one performance period,
If a predetermined number of symbols are on hold at any timing within a certain presentation period, the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within the certain presentation period will be displayed within the certain presentation period. This is performed when the conditions for starting the variable display of the identification information related to any of the predetermined number of pending items are met after the display is not definitively stopped and displayed continuously even after the end of the certain performance period. Within one performance period, the first performance symbol that is continuously displayed in a variable manner is definitely stopped and displayed,
Even if a predetermined number of symbols are on hold at any timing within a certain performance period, the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within that one performance period will not be displayed within the same performance period. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the pachinko game machine is configured so that the pachinko game machine is configured to definitely stop and display the game at .

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (8) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a validity determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display manner of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), control is performed so that the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG). a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and it is configured such that both the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern can be displayed in a variable manner within one performance period,
When there are multiple types of first performance symbols and the result of the judgment is a win, when the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed, a combination of first performance symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the result of the validity determination is non-winning, the combination of the first performance symbols that are not of the same type is stopped and displayed,
When there are multiple types of second performance symbols and the result of the judgment is a win, when the second performance symbols are stopped and displayed, a combination of second performance symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the second performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the result of the validity determination is non-winning, the combination of the second performance symbols that are not of the same type is stopped and displayed,
The combination of second performance symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the win/fail determination is non-winning than the total number of combinations of first performance symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the win/fail determination is non-win. It is configured so that the total number is smaller,
It has multiple types of effect display modes as effect display modes depending on when controlling the effect display contents displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
When displaying a certain first performance symbol among the plurality of types of first performance symbols, display attributes related to the first performance symbol in a certain type of performance display mode, and the certain type. The display attributes related to the certain first production symbol in a production display mode of a different type from the production display mode of are different,
When displaying a certain second performance symbol among the plurality of types of second performance symbols, display attributes related to the second performance symbol in a certain type of performance display mode, and the certain type. The display attribute of the certain second performance symbol in a different type of performance display mode from the performance display mode is configured to be different,
If the result of the win/fail determination is a non-win, the probability that the certain first performance symbol is included in a combination of first performance symbols that can be stopped and displayed is higher than the probability that the certain first performance symbol is included in the combination This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured such that the probability that the certain second performance symbol is included in a combination of second performance symbols that can be stopped and displayed in a certain case is higher.

(Sixth embodiment)
Although some of the configurations have been partially explained in the embodiments described above, the sixth embodiment is an example of a configuration that can be further applied to the embodiments described above, and will be described in detail below. For example, in addition to the configuration including the first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol described in the first embodiment, and the configuration of an image display that overlaps with the first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol of the fourth embodiment, It is possible to provide one or more of the configurations described in the sixth embodiment as appropriate. Further, the configuration of the image display that overlaps with the hold display of the fourth embodiment may be changed to one or more configurations described in the sixth embodiment, or one or more configurations may be added as appropriate. As a supplementary note, the combinations are not limited to the above-mentioned examples, and any configurations described in this embodiment to the fifth embodiment may be combined with one or more of the configurations described in the sixth embodiment as appropriate. It may be changed or one or more configurations may be added as appropriate, including combinations with image display configurations that overlap with the preview effect of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 82.

<<Significance of terms>>
The meaning of each term in the sixth embodiment will be explained in detail below. It should be noted that configurations and effects related to the following terms are applicable to other embodiments and can be combined with other configurations.

<Decorative designs>
The decorative pattern is an image that is controlled by the sub-control board S and that suggests or informs the result of the lottery on the main game side. After the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, it temporarily stops, and then it finally stops. In addition, it is configured to be able to suggest or notify the result of the winning/failure lottery on the main game side by the stop display mode (stopped symbol) when the game is confirmed and stopped.
<Effect of decorative patterns>
(1) Decorative symbols can make it easier for the player to recognize that the game is changing, that it is on standby, and the results of the lottery.

<First decorative pattern>
The first decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that is displayed so that it is easily visible to the player.
<Effect of the first decorative pattern>
(1) The first decorative pattern can improve the interest of the changing performance.
(2) The first decorative pattern can notify the result of the game by displaying it as a fixed stop.

<Second decorative pattern>
The second decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that indicates that the second decorative pattern is changing at all times, when it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative pattern, or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative pattern.
<Effect of second decorative pattern>
(1) In the case of constant display: The second decorative pattern can notify the result of the game by displaying it in a fixed and stopped manner.
(2) When the first decorative pattern is difficult to see or cannot be seen 1: When the first decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop, the second decorative pattern may also be displayed as a fixed stop, but the second decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop. It is preferable to display (temporary stop) only when it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative pattern or when the first decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized without the temporary stop display. I can do it. .
(3) When the first decorative pattern is difficult to see or cannot be seen 2: When the second decorative pattern is displayed only in a variable manner without temporary stop display or confirmed stop display, and the first decorative pattern is difficult to see or cannot be seen. It is possible to clearly notify that a change is occurring even if the change is occurring.

<Main area>
The main area is a display area for displaying the first decorative pattern. The first decorative pattern is displayed variably or statically within the main area.
<Effects of main area>
(1) A first decorative pattern can be displayed.
(2) Variable display with rich performance can be performed.

<Sub area>
The sub-area is a display area for displaying the second decorative pattern. The second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner or in a stationary manner within the sub-region.
<Effect of sub-area>
(1) A second decorative pattern can be displayed.

<Waiting for change>
Waiting for fluctuation is a state in which the main game symbols and decorative symbols are not fluctuating. While the fluctuation is stopped, it is also referred to as the fluctuation stopped state.
<Effect while waiting for fluctuation>
(1) While waiting for fluctuation, it is possible to notify that the game is not in progress.

<Standby movie>
The standby movie is a display of a moving image that shows the player that no changes are being made.
<Standby movie effect>
(1) By displaying the waiting movie, it is possible to indicate that the machine is empty and can be played.

<Pending display>
The pending display is an image that is controlled by the sub-control board S and shows the number of variations that have not been executed on the main game side.
<Effect of pending display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the number that has not changed.

<1st pending display>
The first hold display is a hold display that is displayed to be easily visible to the player.
<Effect of first hold display>
(1) The player can recognize the number that has not changed.
(2) By changing the display mode of the first pending display, it is possible to suggest the possibility of winning.

<Second pending display>
The second hold display is a hold display that is displayed so that the player can see it all the time, when the first hold display is difficult for the player to see, or when the player cannot see the first hold display.
<Effect of second hold display>
(1) The player can recognize the number that has not changed.

<First hold display area>
The first hold display area is an area for displaying a first hold display. In some cases, a display indicating the upper limit number of first pending displays may be performed.
<Effect of the first hold display area>
(1) A first pending display can be displayed.
(2) A display indicating the upper limit number of first hold displays can be made.

<Second hold display area>
The second hold display area is an area for displaying a second hold display.
<Effect of second hold display area>
(1) A second pending display can be displayed.

<Shift display (shift animation)>
The shift display (shift animation) is the display of a moving image when the first pending display that is being displayed is moved when the number of pending items decreases.
<Effects of shift display (shift animation)>
(1) It can be made easier to recognize that the number of reservations has decreased.

<Pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation)>
The hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) is a display of a moving image when displaying a new first hold display when the number of holds increases.
<Effect of occurrence display (pending occurrence animation)>
(1) It is possible to easily recognize that the number of reservations has increased.

<Pending display for production of the relevant fluctuation (pending digestion transmission image, fluctuation corresponding image)>
The suspension display for effecting fluctuation is also referred to as a suspension extinguishment transmission image or a fluctuation corresponding image, and is an image that is displayed when a certain suspension is extinguished.
<Effects of the display of hold display for the production of the relevant fluctuations>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning regarding the current fluctuation.

<Hold display area for production of the change>
The variation effect holding display area is an area for displaying an image that will be displayed when a certain hold is exhausted.
<Effect of the holding display area for the production of the relevant fluctuation>
(1) It is possible to display a hold display for effecting the variation.
(2) It can be suggested that a suspension display for effecting the change will be displayed.

<Display priority>
The display priority indicates the priority of images and moving images to be displayed on the effect display device (the order in which they are displayed from the front side of the effect display device).
<Effect of display priority>
(1) When a plurality of images or moving images are displayed overlappingly, the configuration can be made so that the images or moving images can be easily viewed by the player.

<Volume adjustment screen display>
The volume adjustment screen display is a screen display that indicates that volume adjustment is possible, and displays an image showing the currently set volume, volume adjustment method, and the like.
<Effects of volume adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that the volume can be adjusted.
(2) The player can easily adjust the volume.

<Light intensity adjustment screen display>
The light amount adjustment screen display indicates that the light amount can be adjusted, and is a screen display that displays an image showing the currently set light amount, light amount adjustment method, etc.
<Effects of light intensity adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that the light amount can be adjusted.
(2) The player can easily adjust the amount of light.

<Stage (direction stage)>
The stage (production stage) is also referred to as a mode (production mode), and is a production mode shown by a background image.
<Effects of stage (production stage)>
(1) It is possible to display a display (first decorative pattern, preview, etc.) that corresponds to the stage.

<Hidden mode (hidden stage)>
The latent mode (latent stage) is a performance stage (performance mode) in which it is unclear whether it is a probability fluctuation game state or a non-probability fluctuation game state.
<Effects of hidden mode>
(1) It is possible to determine whether or not it is a probability variable gaming state.

<Tenpai>
Tenpai is also called reach or reach state, and among multiple symbol rows, the symbol rows other than the last symbol row scheduled to stop (temporary stop) have the same decorative pattern, and the last symbol row scheduled to stop (temporary stop) is the same. This is a state in which the symbol row is changing.
<Effect of Tenpai>
(1) If the same decorative pattern as the decorative pattern stopped in another pattern row stops in one more pattern row, it can indicate a win.

<Reach performance>
The reach performance is a performance that indicates the expected degree of winning of the fluctuation, and is a performance that mainly occurs after tenpai. The reach effects include normal reach (normal reach effect), super reach (super reach effect, SP reach, SP reach effect, first half of super reach, second half of super reach), and the like. Mainly, the period from after a reach is established until before it develops into a super reach is called a normal reach (or if it does not become a super reach, from after a reach is established until the entire symbol row stops (temporary stop)), and it develops after a reach is established. This performance is called super reach (also called post-reach development performance).
<Effect of reach performance>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the fluctuation will be a hit.

<Notice (notice display, performance)>
Preview (pre-announcement display, performance) is mainly used to suggest the degree of expectation of winning the change in question, but it can also be used to suggest that there is a hit within the hold (e.g. advance notice, pre-read performance, etc.) There is also.
<Effects of notice (notice display, performance)>
(1) It is possible to incite whether the fluctuation is a hit or not.
(2) You can check whether there is a hit in the hold or not.

<Temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
Temporary stop (temporary stop display) is when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, making it appear as if it has stopped for a while, but in reality, the decorative pattern is slightly moving (also called oscillation fluctuation). state).
<Effect of temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
(1) It can be made to appear as if the fluctuation is being executed multiple times.
(2) It is possible to determine whether or not there will be a definite stop (in other words, whether the game will fluctuate again without a definite stop, whether it will be a hit without a definite stop, etc.).

<Pseudo-connection>
Pseudo-run, which is sometimes referred to as re-fluctuation in a broad sense, is an effect that makes it appear as if the decorative pattern has fluctuated multiple times in one fluctuation.
<Effect of pseudo-association>
(1) It is possible to make it appear as if the decorative pattern is changing multiple times within one change.

<Pseudo-connection suggestive pattern>
The pseudo-coupled pattern is one of the special decorative patterns that are displayed to suggest whether or not a pseudo-coupled sequence will occur.
<Effect of pseudo-connection suggestive patterns>
(1) It is possible to incite whether pseudo-association occurs or not.

<Pseudo series (revariation) pattern>
The pseudo-continuation (re-variation) pattern is one of the special decorative patterns that indicate that a pseudo-continuation (re-variation) occurs.
<Effect of pseudo-recurrence (revariation) pattern>
(1) It is possible to definitively notify that a pseudo-continuation (re-variation) occurs.

<Development pattern>
The development symbol is one of the special decorative symbols that indicate that a reach effect will occur. <Effect of development pattern>
(1) It is possible to definitively notify that a reach effect will occur.

<Pre-reading performance>
The look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a hit in the hold. The prefetch effect is executed on the condition that the trigger hold occurs (when it is determined to execute the prefetch effect for the generated hold).
<Effect of look-ahead production>
(1) You can check whether there is a hit in the hold or not.

<Trigger hold>
The trigger hold is the hold that triggered the execution of the look-ahead effect (it was decided to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold that occurred).
<Effect of trigger hold>
(1) It becomes possible to execute a look-ahead effect.
(2) The possibility of winning can be suggested by fluctuations in trigger hold.

<Right-handed hitting instruction display>
The right-hand hitting instruction display is based on the premise that the second main game start opening or the big prize opening is provided on the right side of the board, but it is mainly displayed in the time-saving gaming state that indicates that you should execute the right-hand hitting. It is a display.
<Effect of right-handed hitting instruction display>
(1) In the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to prompt the player to play right-handed.

<Hitting style warning display (left-handed hitting warning display, right-handed hitting warning display)>
The playing style warning display is a display showing the recommended playing style when the playing style is different from the recommended playing style in the current gaming state.
(1) It is possible to prompt the player to play in a manner that corresponds to the game state.

<Default display>
The default display is a display mode determined in advance as an initial state.
<Effect of default display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the display is in the initial state.

<Effect display>
The effect display is a special effect that is displayed on the effect display device for the image itself, the movement of a character in a moving image, the movement of an accessory, or the like.
<Effects of effect display>
(1) It is possible to emphasize the target image itself, the movement of a character in a moving image, the movement of an accessory, etc.

<Full rotation performance>
Full rotation performance is a state in which the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern is scrolled at a low speed while remaining aligned.
<Effect of full rotation performance>
(1) It is possible to definitively notify that the fluctuation is a hit.

<Promotion performance>
A promotion effect is a production that stimulates whether or not a non-probability variable symbol is changed to a variable probability symbol, or a production that incites whether or not a low round per hit (for example, 4R per hit) is changed to a high round hit (for example, 16R per hit). It's a performance. Promotion effects can occur not only during fluctuations but also during jackpots. A promotion performance that incites whether or not to change from a non-probability variable symbol to a probability variable symbol is sometimes referred to as a probability variable promotion performance, and a promotion performance that incites whether or not to change from a low round hit to a high round hit is sometimes referred to as a round promotion performance.
<Effect of promotion performance>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not to change from a non-probability variable symbol to a probability variable symbol.
(2) It is possible to incite whether or not the low round hit rate is changed to the high round hit rate.

<Reach Voice>
The reach voice is a notice that indicates the expectation level of winning, etc. by means of a sound that is generated when a reach is established or after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the reach is established.
<Effect of Reach Voice>
(1) When it becomes a reach, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning by combining image display, movement of accessories, etc.

FIG. 126 shows the display screen and display priority displayed on the performance display device SG during the waiting period for fluctuation. The broken line in the figure indicates a situation where the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time saving gaming state will be explained. Currently, the fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (before transition to the standby movie described later), "437" is displayed as the first decorative symbol in a stopped state. , the second decorative symbol is also displayed in a stopped state at "437", the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", and the second pending display on the second main game side is "0". A pending display for the production of the fluctuation (This is displayed when the first pending display is erased when the fluctuation starts, and is displayed until the end or the middle of the fluctuation. Even after the display ends, when the next variation is started, a hold display for the effect of the change corresponding to the next change is displayed), a first hold display on the first main game side, and a second hold display on the second main game side. The first pending display is not displayed. The display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side is different from the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side, and the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side is as follows. The number indicating the number of reservations is hollowed out, and the display mode of the second reservation display on the second main game side is that the number indicating the number of reservations is not hollowed out. The display priority is second decorative pattern>second pending display>first decorative pattern. In addition, the display priority may be 2nd pending display > 2nd decorative pattern > 1st decorative pattern, and since the 2nd decorative pattern and the 2nd pending display do not overlap, the 2nd decorative pattern The pattern may be such that the pattern = second reservation display > first decorative pattern.

Next, the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time saving gaming state will be explained. Currently, there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, the fluctuation is stopped, and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation stopped, and the game is in a non-time reduction gaming state. In the variable standby screen display 1, the displayed first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, second pending display on the first main game side, and second pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. In addition, similar to the variation standby screen display 1 in the non-time reduction gaming state, the performance pending display of the variation, the first pending display on the first main game side, and the first pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. Not yet. Here, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation has stopped, a waiting movie is displayed indicating that the fluctuation is on standby (variation has stopped), and the waiting movie uses a part of the reach effect. ing.

In addition, in the variation standby screen display 1 in the non-time reduction gaming state or the variation standby screen display 2 in the non-time reduction gaming state, the effect holding display area for the variation (the place where the effect holding for the variation is displayed) Although a configuration has been described in which the first hold display area (display to indicate the place where the hold is displayed) and the first hold display area on the first main game side (display to show the place where the hold is displayed) are not displayed, a structure in which these are displayed may also be used. For example, each display area may be divided into a display area as a holding display area for the performance of the variation and a first holding display area on the first main game side. This makes it possible to suggest that a display indicating the upper limit number of the first pending display or a pending display for effecting the variation will be displayed even when the variation is on standby (variation is stopped). In addition, in the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time reduction gaming state, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display (the first The main game side, the second main game side) may be displayed, and the first decorative pattern and the first pending display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the unchanging number in the first pending display, but in addition to the waiting movie, the player can recognize that the number is not changing in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and the player can recognize that the number is not changing in the first pending display. The configuration may be such that the unchanged number can be recognized on the display.

Next, the variable standby screen display 1 in the time reduction gaming state will be explained. Currently, there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (before the transition to the standby movie) The first decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state at "437", the second decorative symbol is similarly displayed in a stopped state at "437", and the second pending display on the first main game side is "0". Display, the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and the right hit instruction display is "→→right hit →→", and the hold display for the production of the change, the first main game The first pending display on the side and the first pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. In addition, similar to the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time saving gaming state, the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side is different from the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side. , the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side is such that the number indicating the pending number is hollowed out, and the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side is such that the number indicating the pending number is hollow. It's not hollow. The display priority is as follows: right hit instruction display > second decorative symbol > second pending display > first decorative symbol. In addition, the display priority may be right-handed instruction display > second pending display > second decorative pattern > first decorative pattern, and the right-handed instruction display is different from the second decorative symbol and second pending display. Since they do not overlap, the following may be true: right hit instruction display>second decorative pattern=second pending display>first decorative pattern.

Next, the variable standby screen display 2 in the time reduction gaming state will be explained. Currently, the fluctuation is being stopped, and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation has stopped, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol that were displayed on the fluctuation waiting screen display 1 in the time reduction gaming state , the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are not displayed. In addition, similar to the variation standby screen display 1 in the non-time reduction gaming state, the performance pending display of the variation, the first pending display on the first main game side, and the first pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. Not yet. In addition, similar to the fluctuation standby screen display 2 in the non-time saving gaming state, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation has stopped, a waiting movie indicating that the fluctuation is on standby (fluctuation stopped) is displayed. The waiting movie is the same as the waiting movie displayed on the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-time reduction gaming state.

In addition, in the variation standby screen display 1 in the time-reduced gaming state or the variation standby screen display 2 in the time-reduced gaming state, there is a display area for holding the effect of the variation (to indicate the place where the holding for the effect of the variation is displayed). Although a configuration has been described in which the display) and the first reservation display area on the second main game side (display for indicating the location where reservations are displayed) are not displayed, a configuration in which these are displayed may also be used. For example, display may be performed in which each display area is divided into a holding display area for the performance of the variation and a first holding display area on the second main game side. Thereby, even during a time-reduced game, it is possible to suggest that the variable performance pending display is displayed, and to make it easier to recognize the number of first pending displays on the second main game side. Also, in the variable standby screen display 2 in the time reduction gaming state, the variable standby screen display 1 in the time reduction gaming state is displayed (in the same position).
, the second decorative pattern, and the second pending display (first main game side, second main game side) may be displayed, and the first decorative pattern and the first pending display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the unchanged number in the first pending display, but in addition to the waiting movie, the player can recognize that the number is not changing in the second decorative pattern, and the player can recognize the unchanged number in the second pending display. The configuration can be such that numbers can be recognized.

In addition, various screen display configurations other than the above-mentioned screen display configuration are possible. For example, variable standby screen display 1 in a non-time reduction gaming state and variable standby screen display in a time reduction gaming state. 1, the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are not displayed, and in the non-time saving game state, the hold on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are not displayed. If there is no hold on either side and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable standby screen display 1 may transition to the variable standby screen display 2. However, in the time reduction gaming state, the variable standby screen display 1 is displayed. , even if there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the screen display 1 is configured not to shift from the variable standby screen display 1 to the variable standby screen display 2. Good too.

Next, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display will be described using FIG. 127. The broken line in the figure indicates a situation where the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the volume adjustment in the non-time saving gaming state will be explained. In the non-time reduction gaming state, the volume can be adjusted during standby (variation stop) or variation. Volume adjustment is performed by operating the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2. In addition, while the volume adjustment screen (display indicating the volume, display of the cross button indicating the volume adjustment method, display of the sub-input button indicating to end the volume adjustment screen, display of the image that makes the screen translucent) is displayed. When the sub input button SB is operated, the display of the volume adjustment screen is ended. If in the non-time reduction gaming state, if the fluctuation is on standby (variation is stopped), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. The volume adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these displays, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen may be configured to overlap the first decorative pattern but not the second decorative pattern. As a result, it is possible to configure the volume adjustment screens to overlap, except for displays for which visibility is particularly desired. If it is changing in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold for effect of the change. If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the volume adjustment screen smaller during the change than when the change is on standby (change is stopped). For example, a simple scaled-down version of the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display showing volume, display of cross button SB-2 showing how to adjust volume, sub-input showing ending volume adjustment screen) The display of the button SB and the display of an image that makes the screen translucent may be reduced (respectively), or only the volume is displayed, or the volume is displayed and the cross button SB-2 is displayed to show how to adjust the volume. It is also possible to use only a combination of the two. If only the display shows the volume, or if there is only a combination of the display showing the volume and the display of the cross button SB-2 showing the volume adjustment method, the display format may be the same as that during fluctuation standby (variation stop). , may be made different (for example, the shapes may be different, or even if the shapes are the same, they may be reduced). Further, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the volume adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap with the first decorative pattern that is changing. Thereby, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative pattern. Note that the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during the fluctuation, but may be configured to be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priority is second decorative pattern > second pending display > volume adjustment screen > first decorative pattern > first pending display (and the pending display for effecting the variation). In addition, the display priority may be such that the second decorative pattern = the second pending display, the second decorative pattern < the second pending display, and the first decorative pattern < the first pending display (and the pending display for the production of the variation). good. Note that if a button operation related to volume adjustment (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed while the waiting movie is being displayed, the display of the waiting movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, the volume adjustment in the time reduction game state will be explained. In the time reduction game state, the volume can be adjusted during standby for fluctuation (stopping of fluctuation) or during fluctuation. If in the time reduction gaming state, if the fluctuation is on standby (variation is stopped), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, right hit The instruction display may be displayed, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen may be configured to overlap the first decorative pattern but not the second decorative pattern. As a result, it is possible to configure the volume adjustment screens to overlap, except for displays for which visibility is particularly desired. If it is changing in the time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the pending display for the effect of the change. , If there is a hold, the first hold display and right hit instruction display on the second main game side will be displayed, and although not shown, the volume adjustment screen will be displayed smaller during change standby (change stop) than during change standby (change stop). is preferable, and for example, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. For example, a simple scaled-down version of the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stopped) (display showing the volume, display of the cross button SB-2 showing the volume adjustment method, sub-input button showing to end the volume adjustment screen) It may be a reduced version of the SB display and the image display that makes the screen translucent), or it may be a display that only shows the volume, or a display that shows the volume and the cross button SB-2 that shows how to adjust the volume. It is also possible to use only a combination of the two. If only the display shows the volume, or if there is only a combination of the display showing the volume and the display of the cross button SB-2 showing the volume adjustment method, the display format may be the same as that during fluctuation standby (variation stop). , may be made different (for example, the shapes may be different, or even if the shapes are the same, they may be reduced). Further, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the volume adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap with the first decorative pattern that is changing. Thereby, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative pattern. Note that the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during the fluctuation, but may be configured to be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priority is as follows: right hit instruction display>second decorative pattern>second hold display>volume adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first hold display (and hold display for production of the variation). In addition, the display priority is as follows: Right-handed hitting instruction display > 2nd pending display > 2nd decorative pattern, 2nd decorative pattern > 2nd pending display > Right-handed instruction display, 2nd pending display > 2nd decorative symbol > Right-handed instruction display , and furthermore, the second decorative pattern may be equal to the second reserved display, and the first decorative symbol may be less than the first reserved display (and the reserved display for effecting the variation).

Next, the light amount adjustment in the non-time saving gaming state will be explained. In the non-time reduction gaming state, the light amount can be adjusted during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop). The light intensity adjustment is performed by operating the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2. In addition, while the light intensity adjustment screen (display showing the light intensity, display of the cross button indicating the light intensity adjustment method, display of the sub-input button indicating to end the light intensity adjustment screen, display of the image that makes the screen translucent) is displayed. When the sub input button SB is operated, the display of the light amount adjustment screen is ended. If in the non-time reduction gaming state, if the fluctuation is on standby (variation is stopped), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. The light amount adjustment screen may be displayed to overlap with all of these displays, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. If it is changing in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold for effect of the change. If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the light amount adjustment screen smaller during the change than during change standby (change stop). For example, a simple scaled-down version of the light intensity adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display showing the light intensity, display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the light intensity adjustment method, sub-input indicating to end the light intensity adjustment screen) The display of button SB and the display of an image that makes the screen translucent may be reduced (respectively), or only the display showing the amount of light, or the display showing the amount of light and the cross button SB-2 showing how to adjust the amount of light. It is also possible to use only a combination of the two. If the display only shows the amount of light, or the combination of the display showing the amount of light and the display of the cross button SB-2 showing the method of adjusting the amount of light, the display format may be the same as that during standby for fluctuation (stopping fluctuation). , may be made different (for example, the shapes may be different, or even if the shapes are the same, they may be reduced). Further, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the light amount adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap with the first decorative pattern that is changing. As a result, it is possible to have a configuration in which the light amount adjustment screens are overlapped, except for displays where visibility is particularly desired to be ensured. If it is changing in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold for effect of the change. If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed. Note that the configuration may be such that the light intensity can be adjusted even during fluctuation, and if the light intensity adjustment screen is not displayed during fluctuation and the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated, the light intensity will be adjusted. It may be configured to display an adjustment screen. The display priority is second decorative pattern > second pending display > light amount adjustment screen > first decorative pattern > first pending display (and the pending display for effecting the variation). In addition, the display priority may be such that the second decorative pattern = the second pending display, the second decorative pattern < the second pending display, and the first decorative pattern < the first pending display (and the pending display for the production of the variation). good. Note that if a button operation related to light amount adjustment (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed while the waiting movie is being displayed, the display of the waiting movie is ended and the light amount adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, the light amount adjustment in the time reduction gaming state will be explained. In the time reduction game state, the light amount can be adjusted during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop). If in the time reduction gaming state, if the fluctuation is on standby (variation is stopped), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, right hit The instruction display may be displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap all of them, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the light amount adjustment screen may be configured to overlap with the first decorative pattern but not with the second decorative pattern. For example, a simple scaled-down version of the light intensity adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display showing the light intensity, display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the light intensity adjustment method, sub-input button indicating to end the light intensity adjustment screen) It may be a reduced version of each of the SB display and the image display that makes the screen translucent), or it may be a display that only shows the light amount, or a display that shows the light amount and the cross button SB-2 display that shows how to adjust the light amount. It is also possible to use only a combination of the two. If the display only shows the amount of light, or the combination of the display showing the amount of light and the display of the cross button SB-2 showing the method of adjusting the amount of light, the display format may be the same as that during standby for fluctuation (stopping fluctuation). , may be made different (for example, the shapes may be different, or even if the shapes are the same, they may be reduced). Further, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured not to overlap. Furthermore, the light amount adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap with the first decorative pattern that is changing. As a result, it is possible to configure the light amount adjustment screens to overlap, except for displays where visibility is particularly desired to be ensured. If it is changing in the time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the pending display for the effect of the change. , if there is a hold, the first hold display and right hit instruction display on the second main game side are displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed. Note that the configuration may be such that the light intensity can be adjusted even during fluctuation, and if the light intensity adjustment screen is not displayed during fluctuation and the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated, the light intensity will be adjusted. It may be configured to display an adjustment screen. The display priority is as follows: right hit instruction display > second decorative pattern > second pending display > light intensity adjustment screen > first decorative pattern > first pending display (and the pending display for effecting the variation). In addition, the display priority is as follows: Right hit instruction display > 2nd pending display > 2nd decorative pattern, 2nd decorative pattern > 2nd pending display > Right hit instruction display, 2nd pending display > 2nd decorative symbol > Right hit instruction display , and furthermore, the second decorative pattern may be equal to the second reserved display, and the first decorative symbol may be less than the first reserved display (and the reserved display for producing the variation).

Next, screen display during normal fluctuation will be described using FIG. 128. The broken line in the figure indicates a situation where the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the normal fluctuation screen display in the non-time reduction gaming state will be explained. Currently, they are changing, including a variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area, a variable display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, a second pending display "2" on the first main game side, and a variable display of the second decorative symbol on the first main game side. 2 pending display "0", the pending display for the effect of the fluctuation, the 1st pending display (2 pieces) on the 1st main game side, and the 1st pending display on the 2nd main game side is not displayed. do not have. In addition, in the normal fluctuation screen display in the non-time saving game state, when a ball enters the second main game starting port B10, the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed, and the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed. When the hold display counts up (adds up) and the floating ball related to the hold on the second main game side starts, the first hold display on the second main game side decreases by one, and the second hold on the second main game side decreases by one. The display is configured to count down (subtract). Specifically, currently there are two pending on the first main game side, two first pending displays on the first main game side, "2" on the second pending display on the first main game side, The first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed, the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and a new ball enters the second main game start port B10. If so, one first pending display on the second main game side is displayed, and the second pending display on the second main game side is updated from "0" to "1". The display priority is sub-area (fluctuating display of the second decorative pattern) > second pending display > main area (fluctuating display of the first decorative pattern, temporary stop display of the first decorative pattern) > pending display for production of the relevant variation > The first hold display on the first main game side>the first hold display on the second main game side. In addition, the display priority may be sub area (fluctuating display of the second decorative pattern) < second pending display, sub area (fluctuating display of the second decorative pattern) = second pending display, or the main area The display priority of (fluctuating display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to the lowest among these, and the first pending display on the first main game side <the second main game side The first pending display on the side, and the first pending display on the first main game side may be equal to the first pending display on the second main game side.

Next, the normal fluctuation screen display in the time reduction gaming state will be explained. Currently, the first decorative symbol is being changed in the main area, the second decorative pattern is being displayed in the sub area, the second pending display is "0" on the first main game side, and the second on the second main game side is 2 hold display "2", the hold display for the effect of the fluctuation, the 1st hold display (2 pieces) on the 2nd main game side, the right hit instruction display, and the 1st hold display on the 1st main game side The display is not displayed. In addition, in the normal fluctuation screen display in the time reduction game state, even if a ball enters the first main game starting port A10, the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed, but the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed. The second pending display is configured to count up. The display priority is as follows: Right hit instruction display > Sub area (fluctuating display of the second decorative pattern) > Second pending display > Main area (fluctuating display of the first decorative pattern, temporary stop display of the first decorative pattern) > The variation in question. Performance hold display>first hold display on the second main game side. In addition, the display priority may be sub area (fluctuating display of the second decorative pattern) < second pending display, sub area (fluctuating display of the second decorative pattern) = second pending display, or the main area The display priority of (fluctuating display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to the lowest among these, and the configuration may be such that the first pending display on the first main game side is displayed. , Hold display for effect of the fluctuation>First hold display on the first main game side>First hold display on the second main game side, or Hold display for effect of the fluctuation>First hold on the second main game side Display>First pending display on the first main game side.

Here, we will supplement the characteristic configuration shown using FIG. 128.

In the non-time saving game state (state without electric support state), the first main game side hold display is displayed in the display mode of "●" as the first hold display. On the other hand, in the time reduction game state (a state accompanied by an electric support state), the second main game side hold display is displayed in a "heart (filled)" display mode as the first hold display. In addition, the second hold display is the same regardless of whether it is a non-time reduction gaming state or a time reduction gaming state, but the second hold display on the first main game side is a "hollowed number". The second pending display on the second main game side is a display mode of "filled numbers." Furthermore, the difference between the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side is indicated not only by hollowing out or filling, but also by different colors of numbers, etc. may be configured.

In addition, when the starting opening is configured such that the ball enters the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 alternately (see the fifth embodiment), the first holding on the first main game side The display mode of the display and the display mode of the first hold display on the second main game side may be the same, and the first hold and the first hold display on the first main game side may be the same in either the non-time reduction gaming state or the time reduction gaming state. It may be configured to display the first pending display on the second main game side. This makes it difficult to recognize which of the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 the ball has entered.

In the main area, the first decorative pattern is scrolled from top to bottom in the left, middle, and right columns using the entire effect display device SG (specifically, 1→2→...・→7→8→...1→... The first decorative patterns displayed in the main area are sequentially switched and displayed while scrolling in the order of →7→8→...1→..., and temporarily stop → final stop in the order of right and left middle. ), but in the sub-area, the second decorative pattern is displayed as if it were changing on the spot at the bottom right of the effect display device SG in the left, middle, and right columns (that is, the effect is The variable display is not displayed moving from top to bottom using the entire display device SG, but is displayed as if it is moving from top to bottom only in a part of the display area).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 128, in the non-time reduction game state, the performance hold display of the change and the first hold display on the first main game side are displayed at the lower left of the performance display device SG, and in the time reduction game state, The effect display device SG is configured to display a holding display for the effect and a first holding display on the second main game side at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and the player can currently play mainly using either starting port. (In the non-time reduction gaming state, the first main game starting opening A10 is the main one; in the time saving gaming state, the second main game starting opening B10 is the main one.) ” or “heart (filled)”), or the display position of the first pending display on the first main game side or the first pending display on the second main game side (in the non-time saving gaming state, the display position of the first pending display on the first main game side 1 pending display is displayed at the bottom left of the performance display device SG, and in the time reduction game state, the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed at the bottom left of the performance display device SG). ing. Furthermore, the display mode and display position of the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are the same regardless of whether the game is in a non-time reduction game state or a time reduction game state. It is.

Here, the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the second hold display on the first main game side that may be displayed during fluctuations in the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. The display patterns of the hold display and the second hold display on the second main game side will be described in detail below, including examples of changes.
(1) First pending display (1-1) In the non-time saving gaming state, only the first pending display on the first main game side is displayed (the first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed), reducing the time. In the gaming state, only the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed (the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-2) In the non-time reduction gaming state, the first reservation display on the first main game side and the first reservation display on the second main game side are displayed, and in the time reduction gaming state, the first reservation display on the second main game side is displayed. Only the first pending display is displayed (the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-3) In the non-time reduction gaming state, only the first reservation display on the first main game side is displayed (the first reservation display on the second main game side is not displayed); A first hold display on the gaming side and a first hold display on the second main game side are displayed.
(2) Second hold display In both the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state, the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. .

The area in which the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the hold display for the effect of the variation are displayed is collectively referred to as the first hold display area, and The area where the second hold display and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed may be collectively referred to as a second hold display area. As a supplementary note, unlike the first suspension display area, in the second suspension display area, a display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the fluctuation, such as a suspension display for effecting the fluctuation, is not performed. In other words, the second pending display to indicate that the number is changing is not additionally displayed, and only the number of pending items (the number of unchanged items) is displayed.

The effect pending display of the fluctuation is in the same display mode whether it is a fluctuation on the first main game side or a fluctuation on the second main game side. Specifically, in a non-time saving gaming state, whether the fluctuation on the first main game side or the fluctuation on the second main game side is larger than the first pending display on the first main game side. If it is displayed as "●" and is in the time reduction gaming state, even if it is a change on the first main game side or a change on the second main game side, the first pending display on the second main game side will be changed. Displayed as a large "heart (filled)". In addition, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the display for holding the effect of the variation can be displayed only in the variation on the first main game side (when the variation start condition on the first main game side is satisfied) {that is, It is configured so that it is not displayed when the fluctuation on the second main game side (when the fluctuation start condition on the second main game side is satisfied), and when it is in the time reduction game state, the fluctuation on the second main game side (when the fluctuation start condition on the second main game side is satisfied) is displayed. It is configured so that it can be displayed only when the fluctuation start condition on the game side is satisfied (in other words, it is not displayed when the fluctuation on the first main game side (when the fluctuation start condition on the first main game side is satisfied)) Good too. In addition, as a performance depending on the expectation level of the fluctuation, the display mode of the display for the performance of the fluctuation may be changed, for example, the color changes (default color (here, filled black) → red, etc.), or the shape may change (default shape (here, "circle" for the first main game, "heart" for the second main game) → ☆, etc.), and the number of patterns in the display mode may change. In the non-time saving game state, the number of patterns in the variation on the first main game side (for example, a total of six color patterns including the default color, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors.The expected degree of winning is The default color < blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow color. The expectation level is higher than the default color < red < rainbow color. It has patterns in a total of 6 colors: green, red, and rainbow colors.The probability of winning is as follows: default color < blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow color. For example, the pattern includes a total of three colors: the default color, red, and rainbow color.The probability of winning is higher than that of the default color < red < rainbow color. Incidentally, a similar pattern number relationship may be adopted for unused pending items (first pending display).

The display priority of the first pending display and the second pending display is 2nd pending display > 1st pending display, and if both pending displays are displayed even when the status is not normally changing, The display priority of the second hold display is set higher than the display priority of the first hold display. For example, when a preview image (displayed on the entire screen such as the next preview), SP reach, first decorative pattern, etc. is displayed, the second hold display > preview image (or SP reach, first decorative pattern, etc.) >The first pending display will be displayed.

Regarding whether or not the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can overlap, and whether or not the first pending display and the second pending display can overlap, including examples of changes, the following are as follows (see Fig. 126, Fig. 128, etc. as necessary). ).
(1) Whether the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can overlap (1-1) During the fluctuation standby (variation stop), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern overlap (depending on the display priority, the overlapping part is The stop display positions of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are determined so that the second decorative pattern is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern (not shown).
(1-2) During fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop), the first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern do not overlap, and during fluctuation, the first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern overlap (depending on the display priority, the first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern overlap). The stop display positions of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are determined such that the second decorative pattern is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern.
For example, if it is a non-time saving gaming state, it may be the configuration (1-1), if it is a time saving gaming state, it may be the structure (1-2), and if it is a non-time saving gaming state, it may be the configuration (1-2). The configuration of 2) may be used, and the configuration of (1-1) may also be used in the time-reduced gaming state.
(2) Whether or not the first hold display and the second hold display can overlap In both cases, during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation, the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, The first pending display and the second pending display (first pending display on the main game side) and second pending display (second pending display on the first main game side, second pending display on the second main game side) are The display position with the hold display is determined. Note that this can also be applied during a definite stop.

Whether the first decorative pattern and the first pending display can overlap, whether the second decorative pattern and the second pending display can overlap, whether the first decorative pattern and the second pending display can overlap, whether the second decorative pattern and the first pending display can overlap, The possibility of duplication is as follows.
(A) Non-time saving gaming state (1) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first pending display can overlap The first decorative symbol and the first pending display both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display positions of the first decorative pattern and the first pending display are determined so that they overlap (depending on the display priority, the first decorative pattern is displayed in front of the first pending display in the overlapping portion).
(1) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first pending display can overlap.The first decorative symbol and the first pending display overlap both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation (depending on the display priority, In the overlapping portion, the display positions of the first decorative pattern and the first pending display are determined such that the first pending display is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern.
(2) Whether or not the second decorative pattern and the second pending display can overlap.The second decorative pattern and the second pending display should be overlapped so that the second decorative pattern and the second pending display do not overlap, both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display position of the second hold display is determined.
(3) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second pending display can overlap.The first decorative symbol and the second pending display overlap both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation (depending on the display priority, the overlapping part The display positions of the first decorative symbol and the second pending display are determined such that the second pending display is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol.
(4) Whether or not the second decorative pattern and the first pending display can overlap The second decorative pattern and the first pending display should be overlapped so that the second decorative pattern and the first pending display do not overlap, both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display position of the first hold display is determined. In addition, in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol and the first pending display are set to overlap at least during fluctuation, and similarly, in the non-time saving gaming state, the first decorative symbol and the second pending display are They are determined to overlap at least during fluctuations, and may be determined to overlap or not overlap during game standby.
(B) Time reduction game state (1) Whether the first decorative symbol and the first pending display can overlap or not The first decorative symbol and the first pending display overlap both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display positions of the first decorative pattern and the first pending display are determined so as to prevent the above-mentioned situation from occurring. It should be noted that during fluctuations, it may be configured to overlap rarely (less frequently than in the non-time saving gaming state).
(2) Whether or not the second decorative pattern and the second pending display can overlap.The second decorative pattern and the second pending display should be overlapped so that the second decorative pattern and the second pending display do not overlap, both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display position of the second hold display is determined.
(3) Whether or not the first decorative pattern and the second pending display can overlap The first decorative pattern and the second pending display are designed to prevent overlap between the first decorative pattern and the second pending display, both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display position of the second hold display is determined. It should be noted that during fluctuations, it may be configured to overlap rarely (less frequently than in the non-time saving gaming state).
(4) Whether or not the second decorative pattern and the first pending display can overlap The second decorative pattern and the first pending display should be overlapped so that the second decorative pattern and the first pending display do not overlap, both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display position of the first hold display is determined.

Next, screen display during SP reach will be described using FIG. 129. First, the SP reach screen display 1 in the non-time reduction gaming state will be explained. Currently, SP reach is in progress, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub-area, the second pending display is "2" on the first main game side, the second pending display is "0" on the second main game side, The production hold display is displayed, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side are not displayed. Needless to say, when a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, the second hold display on the first main game side is updated (up to hold 4), and the second main game starting port B10 When a game ball enters the ball, the second hold display on the second main game side is updated (up to hold 4). The first pending display can be displayed when returning to the normal stage screen (flat stage screen, etc.) which is in a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time reducing gaming state after the SP reach ends, but at this time, the SP The first pending display will be displayed, including the ball that entered during the reach. Specifically, if the number of pending items increases from 2 to 3 during SP reach, the first pending display will not be displayed during SP reach, but when you return to the normal stage screen, three first pending displays will be displayed. It is. The display priority is sub-area (fluctuating display of second decorative symbol)>second hold display>hold display for effect of the variation>SP ready-to-reach effect.

Next, the SP reach screen display 2 in the non-time reduction gaming state will be explained. Currently, SP reach is in progress, the accessory YK has moved to the front of the production display device SG, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub-area, the second pending display is "2" on the first main game side, The second hold display "0" on the second main game side and the hold display for the effect of the fluctuation are displayed, and the change display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side are displayed. It has not been. Incidentally, the suspension display for effecting the variation may be configured so as not to be displayed.

In this way, under certain circumstances {during SP reach, when a role model is activated, promotion effect (effect that stimulates whether or not to be promoted from an even numbered symbol that is a non-probable variable pattern to an odd numbered symbol that is a variable variable pattern), an error screen display, etc. }, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the SP reach by configuring a configuration in which the fluctuating display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first pending display on the first main game side are not displayed. In addition, even during SP reach, it may be configured to display a fluctuating display of the first decorative pattern in the main area or a first pending display on the first main game side. In this case, the first decoration in the main area It is preferable that the fluctuating display of the symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper right corner of the effect display device SG (approximately the same size as the fluctuating display of the second decorative symbol, or slightly larger than the fluctuating display of the first decorative symbol), and in the main area. By displaying a variable display of the first decorative pattern in the , it is possible to show the player the reach mode (for example, "4↓4") and the reach pattern (for example, displaying only one "4"). Become. The display priority is sub-area (fluctuating display of the second decorative pattern) > second pending display > pending display for the effect of the variation > liquid crystal display {effect display (in Figure 129, the star-shaped accessory YK has fallen. Sometimes, it is an effect on the effect display device SG that makes it appear as if the falling position is shining brightly on the upper side).

Next, updating of the first hold display and the second hold display will be described using FIG. 130. First, the fluctuation has ended and the fluctuation has stopped in a state where there are two pending games on the first main game side. Next, a new change on the first main game side has just started, and the first pending display on the first main game side has begun to shift its display position (shift animation has started), and the second The pending display is subtracted from "2" to "1" immediately after the fluctuation starts. Next, before the shift of the first hold display on the first main game side is completed, a new game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, and in response to the new ball entering, the first A hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) is performed in which the first hold display on the main game side increases by one, and the second hold display on the first main game side changes from "1" to "immediately after a new ball enters."2".

Here, we will supplement the characteristic configuration shown using FIG. 130.

When a new hold occurs (when a game ball newly enters the starting port), the execution time of the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) of the first hold display (for example, 1000 ms) {from the bottom of the effect display device SG It is an effect in which the holds gradually appear and are displayed at a fixed position (the place where the Nth hold is displayed), and the time from the start of appearance to the completion of display is 1000 ms} is the update time of the second hold display ( The addition time and subtraction time are configured to be longer than 100 ms, for example. Also, the execution time of the shift display (shift animation) of the first hold display (for example, 1500 ms) {the hold displayed at the place where the Nth hold is displayed moves, and the This is a performance that moves to the place where the hold is displayed and then settles in the fixed position (the place where the N-1th hold is displayed) and displays it, and the time from the start of movement to the completion of display (movement completion) is 1500 ms} is configured to be longer than the update time of the second pending display. Furthermore, the update time of the second pending display is shorter than the fixed variation time (for example, the fixed variation time of the first main game symbol is 500 ms, the fixed variation time of the second main game symbol is 300 ms), and It is configured to be shorter than the time (3000 ms in this embodiment).

Immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the first pending display can simultaneously (duplicately) display a shift display (shift animation) and a pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation) {that is, the first pending display If the shift display (shift animation) is started while the occurrence display (pending occurrence animation) is being executed, the pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation) can be changed without interrupting the pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation). If the shift display (shift animation) can be executed at the same time, and the execution of the pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation) is started while the shift display (shift animation) is being executed, the shift display (shift animation) that is being executed ) The shift display (shift animation) and the pending occurrence display (the pending occurrence animation) can be executed simultaneously. } However, it is impossible for the second hold display to display subtraction and addition at the same time, and after displaying subtraction (due to the start of fluctuation), displaying addition (due to the ball entering the starting hole). It happens. If the number of reservations increases just before the start of fluctuation and the fluctuation starts, the second reservation display will display an addition (due to the start of fluctuation) and then a subtraction (due to the start of fluctuation). For both subtraction and addition, the time required for this update display (for example, updating from "2" to "1" or from "1" to "2") (for the number display to change) The required time) is 100 ms.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the relationship between the look-ahead effect (retention change effect) and the probability that the first decorative pattern will be in a predetermined display mode will be explained. First, the case of "(1) Blue hold change" will be explained. First, there are four pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, and the number of pending balls is now four due to the new ball entering, and furthermore, the display mode of the first holding display corresponding to the new ball entering is blue pending. Next, the fluctuation immediately before the blue hold is completed, and the fluctuation immediately before is a loss ("861") and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, a variation corresponding to the blue hold is started, and the blue hold is displayed as the effect hold display (blue) of the change. In addition, when the variation starts when the blue is held, a shorter variation time is likely to be selected than when the variation starts when the red is held (in other words, a variation time with a low probability of winning is more likely to be selected). Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach pattern (here, 7 reaches, and 7 reaches has a higher jackpot expectation than other reaches (e.g. 2 reaches)). 2 Decorative symbols do not have a specific reach mode and continue to display fluctuations), but if the variation starts with blue hold, the reach mode will be more specific than when the change starts with red hold, which will be described later. The probability of this happening is low. Next, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a specific final display mode (in this case, a set of 7) that is a hit, but if the fluctuation starts with blue hold, the fluctuation starts with red hold. The probability of a specific final display mode is lower than when the display starts. Next, the case of "(2) Red reservation change" will be explained. The basic flow is the same as "(1) Blue pending change", but the display mode of the look-ahead effect (pending change effect) is different. First, there are four pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, and the number of pending balls is now four due to the new ball entering, and furthermore, the display mode of the first holding display corresponding to the new ball entering is red pending. Next, the fluctuation immediately before the red hold is completed, and the fluctuation immediately before is a loss ("861") and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, a variation corresponding to the red hold is started, and the red hold is displayed as the effect hold display (red) of the change. In addition, when the fluctuation starts with red hold, a longer fluctuation time is likely to be selected than when the fluctuation starts with blue hold (in other words, a fluctuation time with a high expectation of winning is likely to be selected). Next, the first decorative symbol has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative symbol does not have a specific reach mode and continues to display fluctuations), but it is red pending. When the fluctuation starts, the probability of a specific reach pattern is higher than when the fluctuation starts with blue hold. Next, a specific final display mode in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are a hit (in this case, a set of 7) is displayed, but if the fluctuation starts with red hold, the fluctuation starts with blue hold. The probability of a specific final display mode is higher than when the display starts. As an example, the probability of becoming a reach with a blue hold is 90% of the variation related to a blue hold, and the probability of becoming a reach with a red hold is 99% of the variation related to a red hold, and the difference is 9% It is. In addition, the probability of a specific reach pattern (for example, 7 reach) with blue hold is 5% of the probability of reaching a reach due to fluctuations related to blue hold, and a specific reach pattern (for example, 7 reach) with red hold. The probability of this is 30% when it becomes a reach due to fluctuations related to red hold. The difference is 25%. In this way, the probability of a reach in both blue hold and red hold is set high, and the difference between them is set not to be large, and the probability of a specific reach pattern (for example, 7 reach) is set not to be that high. Moreover, it is desirable that the difference be made relatively large. As a result, while the degree of expectation for reach is guaranteed to some extent by changing the hold, by creating a difference in the degree of expectation for subsequent developments (which number will become reach), the first hold display is The content suggested by the difference in display mode can be made more complex. Note that these numerical values (percentages) are just examples, and can be changed as appropriate, but it is desirable to have such a magnitude relationship.

Note that when the first decorative pattern is in the ready-to-reach mode, the second decorative pattern may also be in the ready-to-reach mode.

Next, using FIG. 132, the relationship between the number of reservations and the probability that the first decorative pattern will be in a predetermined display mode will be explained. First, the case where "(1) number of reservations is 1" will be explained. First, there is one pending state and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, fluctuations have begun. Note that when the variation starts when the number of reservations is 1, a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than when the variation starts when the number of reservations is 4, which will be described later. Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern does not have a specific reach mode and continues to be displayed fluctuating), The probability of this mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations. Next, a specific final display mode (here, a set of 7) in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are a hit is displayed, but the probability of achieving the specific final display mode is regardless of the number of reservations. Identical or slightly different. Next, the case of "(2) number of reservations 4" will be explained. The flow at the time of fluctuation is the same as "(1) Number of reservations 1", so it will be omitted, but if the fluctuation starts when the number of reservations is 4, a shorter fluctuation time is selected than when the fluctuation starts when the number of reservations is 1. easy to be In addition, as described in the explanation of "(1) Number of reservations 1", the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reaches) (the second decorative pattern has a specific reach mode and However, the probability of achieving a specific reach mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations, and furthermore, the probability that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol will be a hit is Although the final display mode (here, a set of 7) is displayed, the probability of a specific final display mode is also the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations.

Note that when the first decorative pattern is in the ready-to-reach mode, the second decorative pattern may also be in the ready-to-reach mode.

Next, the relationship between the gaming state and the final display mode will be explained using FIG. 133. First, the non-time saving gaming state will be explained. First, there is one pending state and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, variation is started, and the first decorative pattern becomes a reach mode (here, 7 reach mode) (the second decorative pattern does not become a reach mode, but continues to display the variation), and finally, the first decoration The final display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is the final display mode that indicates the winning mode. The configuration is such that a mode transition symbol (for example, a "hidden" symbol) indicating a transition to mode can be displayed. Next, the time reduction game state will be explained. A description of the flow of fluctuations will be omitted since it is the same as in the non-time saving gaming state. In the time reduction game state, the final display mode indicating the winning mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is only the symbol alignment (for example, "777"), and the mode transition symbol indicating the transition to the hidden mode. is configured so that it is not displayed. In other words, the number of candidates for the final display mode is greater for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the non-time reducing game state than in the time reducing game state. By configuring this way, when winning from a non-time saving gaming state, a transition to the latent mode is included, resulting in diverse gameplay, and when winning from a time saving gaming state, the transition to the latent mode is not included. The game state can be recognized by the player, that is, the game can be played in a simple and clear manner during consecutive games. Furthermore, after a specific reach mode (again, a highly expected 7 reach is desirable), there are "767", "787", and "777" in the non-time saving game state, and as an example, 1/3 of each appears. On the other hand, in the time reduction game state, there are "787" and "777", and as an example, it is configured such that each appears by 1/2, and in the time reduction game state, by lowering the probability of losing, it becomes 7 reach. In this case, it is possible to restrict the middle symbol from falling out without reaching 7, and to increase the level of expectation compared to a non-time saving game state.

In addition, in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative pattern may display a mode transition pattern indicating transition to the latent mode as the final display mode indicating the winning mode, but the second decorative pattern may display the mode transition pattern indicating the transition to the hidden mode. The mode transition pattern displayed on the pattern may not be displayed, but may be configured to indicate the transition to the latent mode in a different final display mode. For example, the second decorative pattern may be "357" or "246". In addition, it may be configured to display combinations of odd numbered symbols and combinations of even numbered symbols, and furthermore, it may be configured such that the combination of odd numbered symbols has a higher probability of being in the probability fluctuation state in the latent mode than the combination of even numbered symbols. .

Next, using FIG. 134, the relationship between the game state and the hitting style warning display (left-handed hitting warning display, right-handed hitting warning display) will be explained. First, a warning display on how to play in a non-time saving gaming state will be explained. First, the fluctuation is stopped in a state where there is one pending game on the first main game side. Here, there is no display showing the player how to play. Next, when a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10, the first hold display on the second main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are updated, and furthermore, a left-handed hit warning is issued. The display continues until the end conditions are met (for example, 10 seconds, the ball enters the first main game starting port A10, etc.), and an audio warning is also given along with the left-handed hitting warning display (for example, "Left-handed hitting"). please” x 3 times). The left-handed hit warning display may be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed in a position where the player can easily recognize it, but it may be displayed overlapping with the second decorative symbol, the first pending display, and the second pending display. It is configured so that it is not displayed. In addition, even if the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 in the non-time saving game state and the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side are updated, the left-handed ball will not be played. No warning is displayed. next,
A warning display on how to play in the time reduction game state will be explained. First, there is one hold on the second main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped. Here, a right-hitting instruction display ("→→right-handed hitting→→"), which is a display indicating to the player how to play, is displayed. The right-hand hit instruction display ("→→right-hand hit→→") is displayed in the time reduction gaming state, and does not depend on the update display of the number of reservations (for example, addition of the second reservation display). If it is in a gaming state, it will continue to be displayed. Next, when a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, the second hold display on the first main game side is updated (the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed), and further , the right-handed hit warning display is continued until the termination condition (for example, the ball enters the second main game starting port B10, etc.), and an audio warning is also given along with the right-handed hit warning display (for example, "right-handed hit"). please"). The right hit warning display may be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed in a position where the player can easily recognize it, but it may be displayed overlapping with the second decorative symbol, the first pending display, and the second pending display. It is configured so that it is not displayed. In addition, even if a ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in the time reduction game state and the first hold display on the second main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are updated, the right hit warning will not be issued. No display is performed. In addition, an audio warning (``Please hit right'', ``Please hit left'') is output without displaying a hitting warning display (left hitting warning display, right hitting warning display) on the performance display device SG. The configuration may be such that

Next, using FIG. 135, the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability that a pseudo-continuous pattern will be displayed (revariation probability) will be explained. First, the flow of the production will be explained using the case of "blue hold change → re-change (pseudo-reunion)". First, there are three holds on the first main game side, and the first hold is in a state where the first hold is displayed in blue and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, a change due to blue hold is started (blue is displayed as the hold display for the effect of the change), and with "6" displayed in the left column and "7" in the right column, a pseudo linked As a preview, a pseudo-suggestive pattern (here, a semi-transparent "NEXT") in which a pseudo-series pattern (here, a non-transparent "NEXT"), which will be described later, is semi-transparent will be displayed from the top to the bottom of the production display device SG. is displayed scrolling to. Next, the pseudo-coupling suggestive pattern is scrolled to the approximate center of the performance display device SG, and the pseudo-coupling pattern indicating that a pseudo-coupling occurs is displayed at the approximate center of the performance display device SG. Since the pseudo-continuous symbol has stopped, next, a re-fluctuation will be performed in which the symbols will be in a fluctuating state in all symbol rows, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column. ing. It should be noted that, as the first decorative pattern, a pseudo-connection suggestive pattern and a pseudo-connection pattern may be displayed, but as the second decorative pattern, the pseudo-connection-suggestive pattern and the pseudo-connection pattern are configured not to be displayed. Next, the display mode of the look-ahead performance (holding change performance) (in this example, the blue holding change and the red holding change) and the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed will be explained. As mentioned above, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed, a pseudo-continuous pattern that changes again occurs, but the probability that the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed is configured to differ depending on the display mode of the look-ahead performance (holding change performance). For example, in a blue hold with a low expectation of winning, the probability of re-fluctuation (probability of pseudo-run occurring) is low, and in a red hold with a high expectation of winning, the probability of re-fluctuation is high (i.e. The probability of re-fluctuation may be configured as follows (red hold > blue hold). In addition, above, we have explained the case where the pseudo-connection suggestive pattern and the pseudo-connection pattern are displayed from a display where the left pattern and the right pattern are not the same (not reach), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left pattern and the right pattern are Not only is the configuration in which a pseudo-connection suggestion pattern and a pseudo-connection pattern are displayed from the same reach display, the first decorative pattern can be changed again (pseudo-connection), but the second decorative pattern can also be changed again (pseudo-connection). ) Possible configuration, the pseudo-connection pattern may be a specific pattern (for example, "7"), and the pattern row in which the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern and the pseudo-connection pattern are displayed may be in the left column or the right column. There may be. Furthermore, the pseudo-link suggestion symbols are displayed at a predetermined position (for example, in the center of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.) without being scrolled. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-continuation symbol is configured to scroll and fluctuate and be displayed in the center part of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG). You may do so.

Next, using FIG. 136, the probability that a pseudo-connection pattern is displayed during the look-ahead effect display (re-fluctuation probability) and the change in the trigger variation (the variation related to the hold that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect), The relationship between the probability of symbol display (revariation probability) will be explained. First, there are two pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, and the background is displayed in translucent black, which is a highly anticipated display mode of the look-ahead effect. In this way, when a display mode with a high expectation level of look-ahead performance is displayed, the pseudo-association suggesting pattern and the pseudo-association pattern may be configured not to be displayed. may be displayed, but with a low probability. Next, the background continues to be displayed in semi-transparent black and the fluctuation is stopped. Then the trigger variation is started and the background is the normal background (not translucent black). Next, with "6" being displayed in the left column and "7" being displayed in the right column, pseudo-association suggesting symbols are scrolled from top to bottom on the performance display device SG. Next, the pseudo-coupling suggestive pattern is scrolled to approximately the center of the effect display device SG, and the pseudo-coupling pattern is displayed approximately at the center of the presentation display device SG. Since the pseudo-continuous symbol has stopped, next, a re-fluctuation will be performed in which the symbols will be in a fluctuating state in all symbol rows, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column. ing. In this way, for the change related to the hold that is before the change related to the hold that triggered the generation of the look-ahead effect (so-called trigger change), the display mode with a high expectation level (here, a translucent display) is used as the display mode of the look-ahead effect. A black background) may be displayed, but the pseudo-continuation pattern is not displayed, and re-variation (pseudo-continuation) does not occur. The display mode may be configured so that the probability that a pseudo-continuation pattern will be displayed and a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) will occur is lower than when the expectation level is low. Since the display mode of the degree cannot be displayed and the pseudo-connection suggestion symbol and the pseudo-connection symbol can be displayed, a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) may occur, or a pseudo-coupling is more likely than the fluctuation related to the hold before the trigger variation. It may be configured such that the symbol is displayed to increase the probability that a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) will occur. Furthermore, the pseudo-link suggestion symbols are displayed at a predetermined position (for example, in the center of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.) without being scrolled. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-continuation pattern is configured to scroll and fluctuate and be displayed in the center part of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG). You may do so.

Next, using FIG. 137, the decorative pattern after power off and recovery from power off (when RAM is not cleared; in other words, when S1002→S1008→S1010→S1012→S1014→... in FIG. 5) Explain the relationship between First, (A) will be explained. First, since it is staying in stage A (fluctuation is stopped), the characters of the first decorative pattern are animals or people, and are displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". . The second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, after the power is restored, stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed, and "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" are displayed as before the power was shut off. There is. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before or after power-off, etc., and in this case, "861" is displayed. Next, (B) will be explained. First, since it is staying in stage B (fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and it is displayed as "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)". . The second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, after the power is restored, stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed, and unlike before the power was turned off, "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed. There is. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Next, (C), which is a modification of (A), will be explained. First, it is staying at stage A (fluctuation is stopped), and the first decorative patterns are displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". The second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, after the power is restored, Stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed, and the first decorative pattern is different from before the power is turned off. , 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)" are displayed. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Note that here, only the first decorative pattern has been changed, but if a power outage occurs during the stay in stage B and the power is restored, the default stage, stage A, and the first decoration at the time of power outage recovery will be changed. It returns with the default display of the symbols "2 (ally), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)".

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the relationship between decorative patterns after a power outage and after a power outage recovery (in the case of RAM clearing, in the case of S1002→S1004→S1006→... in FIG. 5) will be explained. First, (A) will be explained. First, since it is staying in stage A (fluctuation is stopped), the characters of the first decorative pattern are animals or people, and are displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". . The second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, the RAM is cleared to recover from the power outage, and stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. , 3 (penguin), 1 (chick)". The display mode of the second decorative pattern is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before or after power-off, etc., and in this case, "331" is displayed. Next, (B) will be explained. First, since it is staying in stage B (fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and it is displayed as "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)". . The second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, the RAM is cleared to recover from the power outage, and stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. ), 3 (penguin), and 1 (chick).” The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "331".

In this way, when the RAM is cleared (RAM cleared and the power is restored), the predetermined display mode (here, stage A , the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern are both "331"), making it easy for players, game store clerks, etc. to understand that the RAM has been cleared.

In addition, the default display of the first decorative pattern when the RAM is cleared, "3 (penguin), 3 (penguin), 1 (chick)", may be displayed in a display mode that can only be displayed when the RAM is cleared, or during normal play. However, for example, it may be configured to be displayed as a premiere performance in which a jackpot is almost guaranteed. In addition, the display mode when the RAM is cleared is the same as the default display mode when the power is restored from a power failure (the same display mode as (C) in FIG. 137), and when the RAM is cleared, the first decorative pattern is "2 ( ally), 4 (enemy), and 6 (giraffe)", and the second decorative pattern may be displayed as a number "246".

Next, using Figure 139, reach voice (a sound that is generated when a reach is established that indicates the expectation of winning) and the probability that a pseudo-continuous symbol will be displayed (revariation probability) Explain the relationship between Furthermore, the expected success rate of Reach Voice is as follows: Reach < Opportunity < Development < Super Hot. In addition, it should be noted in advance that this figure explains the probability of re-fluctuation due to the reach voice at the time of the reach formation in the variation that develops into a predetermined SP reach after the reach formation. First, (A) will be explained. First, there are three pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, fluctuation is started, reach is established, and the voice "reach" is generated as a reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the effect display device SG (middle row of the first decorative symbol), and becomes a re-variation (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "reach" is generated when reach is established, the re-change probability is set to be high. Next, (B) will be explained. First, there are three pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "chance" is generated as the reach voice. Next, the pseudo consecutive pattern “NE
XT” is displayed approximately in the center of the effect display device SG (in the middle row of the first decorative pattern), and it is a re-variation (pseudo series). In this way, when the reach voice of "chance" occurs when reach is established, the re-variation probability is set to medium. Next, (C) will be explained. First, there are three pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, fluctuation is started, reach is established, and the voice of "development" is generated as a reach voice. Next, the pseudo consecutive symbol "NEXT" is not displayed on the effect display device SG, but the super reach effect is developed, and the super reach effect is displayed. In this way, when the reach voice of "development" is generated when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is 0, and the system is configured to directly develop into the super reach performance without re-variation. Next, (D) will be explained. First, there are three pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, fluctuations start, reach is established, and a "super hot" voice is generated as a reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the effect display device SG (middle row of the first decorative symbol), and becomes a re-variation (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when a reach is established and a "super hot" reach voice is generated, the re-change probability is set to be low.

In this way, the system is configured such that the higher the probability of reaching a hit is generated, the lower the re-variation (pseudo-relationship) probability is. In this case (here, the reach voice of "development"), the configuration is such that re-variation (pseudo-association) does not occur. In addition, even if some reach voices (e.g. "development" reach voice) occur among the reach voices with high expectation of winning, the configuration is configured so that re-variation (pseudo-connection) occurs, and the relevant When some Reach Voices (for example, "Development" Reach Voices) occur, the re-variation probability is set to be high (for example, the re-variation probability is higher than that for "Chance"). It's okay.

In other words, the expectation of winning due to reach voice is reach < chance < development < super hot, and the probability of re-variation (pseudo-run) due to reach voice is:
(1) Development (including non-occurrence) < super hot < chance < reach (2) super hot < chance < development ≦ reach, and it is possible to configure it in a different order from the expected hit level.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the display mode of decorative symbols in full rotation performance will be described. First, there are three pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Then the fluctuations start and become reach. Next, the words "Full rotation" are displayed approximately in the center of the effect display device SG, and the symbols are aligned in the left, middle, and right rows of the first decorative symbols (for example, "777" or "888"). ", etc.), and the display is scrolled at a slower speed than normal fluctuations (for example, the state in the second figure). As described above, the first decorative pattern may be scroll-displayed with the patterns aligned, but even when the first decorative pattern is scroll-displayed with the patterns aligned, the second decorative pattern The symbols are not aligned in the left column, middle column, and right column and are displayed individually in a fluctuating manner, and the speed does not slow down (= it maintains a constant speed). Next, at approximately the same time as the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a state where only numbers are aligned. It should be noted that the second decorative pattern may also be configured to be displayed variably in a state where the patterns are aligned (for example, "777", "888", etc.) so as to be synchronized with the first decorative pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the manner in which the decorative patterns change for each stage will be explained. First, stage A will be explained. In stage A, when the fluctuation starts, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a scrolling manner that moves the display area of the effect display device SG from top to bottom, and the second decorative pattern is displayed at that point (the second A variable display is performed in a scroll display that appears to be moving from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display area). Next, stage B will be explained. In stage B, when the fluctuation starts, the first decorative pattern is rotated horizontally on the spot to change the design, and the second decorative symbol is displayed on the spot (the second A variable display is performed in a scroll display that appears to be moving from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display area). In this way, since the first decorative pattern is a pattern that is easy for the player to visually recognize, the variation mode is changed depending on the stage so that the player does not get bored, and the second decorative pattern is a pattern that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Since it is a symbol, it is displayed in the same variation mode without changing the variation mode depending on the stage.

Next, using FIG. 142, details of the display contents of the decorative pattern during fluctuation will be explained. First, (A) will be explained. (A) is a diagram regarding the display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in a variable pattern that becomes a reach. First, at stage B, the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, and in each of the left, middle, and right rows of the first decorative design, the symbols are rotated horizontally and changed, and the second decorative design is changed. In each symbol column of the left column, middle column, and right column, the symbols change in a vertical scrolling manner on the spot. In each pattern row of the first decorative pattern, the pattern is changed in regular order as "1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → ...", and in the second decorative pattern, Regardless of the variation in the first decorative pattern, a predetermined pattern variation is uniformly performed, and the pattern changes from "275" to "864" to "387" to "641" to "728" to "413". → "156" → "532" → "275" → ... The symbols are scrolled and displayed in the order of switching the symbols. Next, at the timing when the reach is established with "7" in the first decorative symbol, and at the same time, at the timing when the fluctuating "6" is located in the center part of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG) The second decorative pattern that is changing is "275" located within the sub-region, and as described above, the display modes of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern at a predetermined timing when a reach is established are different. In addition, in the second decorative pattern, the symbols in the left column and the right column are different, and the reach is not established.

Next, (B) will be explained. (B) is a diagram regarding the display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in a variation pattern that does not result in a reach but a loss. First, at stage B, the fluctuation is stopped. Next, variation is started, and in each symbol row of the left row, middle row, and right row of the first decorative pattern, the symbols are rotated horizontally and changed (high-speed variation). 2. In each of the left row, middle row, and right row of decorative symbols, the symbols are varied in a vertically scrolling manner on the spot. Next, the timing is just before the left column stops, the left column of the first decorative pattern is in low-speed fluctuation, and "8" is displayed, and the middle and right columns are in high-speed fluctuation, At this time (albeit momentarily), "868" is displayed (however, the symbol on the right is not a reach because it is changing at high speed). The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at a normal speed (the second decorative pattern fluctuates almost only at a normal speed. It may be configured to fluctuate at a low speed during a full rotation performance), and at this time (momentarily) ), "864" is displayed. Next, it is the stop timing for the left row. The left row of the first decorative pattern is stopped (temporarily stopped), and the middle and right rows of the first decorative pattern are fluctuating at high speed. ), "168" will be displayed. The second decorative pattern is changing at a normal speed, and at this time (albeit momentarily), "387" is displayed. Next, it is the timing just before the right column stops, and in the left column of the first decorative pattern, "1" is stopped (temporarily stopped), and in the right column, "5" is displayed during low speed fluctuation. Yes, the middle row is changing at high speed, and at this time (albeit momentarily), "165" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is changing at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "641" is displayed. Next, it is the stop timing of the right pattern. In the left column of the first decorative pattern, "1" is stopped (temporary stop), and in the right column, "6" is stopped (temporary stop). The middle row is changing at high speed, and at this time (albeit momentarily), "166" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is changing at a normal speed, and at this time (albeit momentarily), "728" is displayed. Next, at the timing just before the end of the variable time, "1" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left column of the first decorative pattern, "6" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the right column, The middle row is changing at a low speed, and "116" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is changing at a normal speed, and "413" is displayed. Next, it is the timing when the fluctuation time ends, and a fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the fluctuation time (also for stopping and displaying the fluctuation of the decorative pattern) is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern both stop varying (definitely stop) at "126".

In the first decorative pattern, from just before the left and right rows stop (temporary stop) until the stop (temporary stop), or from just before the variable stop (determined stop) until the variable stop (determined stop), The symbols are changed in the order that they have been arranged consecutively in advance, resulting in a fluctuation stop (determined stop), but in the second decorative pattern, from just before the fluctuation stop (determined stop) until the fluctuation stop (determined stop), the fluctuation stop occurs. The symbol displayed immediately before the stop (determined stop) is instantly changed to the final stop symbol, resulting in a variable stop (determined stop). In this example, in the first decorative pattern, from just before the left column stops (temporary stop) until the left column stops (temporarily stops), the left column changes from "8 to 1", and the right column stops (temporarily stops). The right column changes from "5 to 6" from just before the stop (temporary stop) to the right column's stop (temporary stop), and from just before the fluctuation stop (determined stop) to the time of the fluctuation stop (determined stop). The column has been changed from "1 to 2". The second decorative symbol continues to fluctuate at the normal speed until the fluctuation stops, so the symbol displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (determined stop) changes instantly to the final stop symbol "126". , the left column is changed to "3→1", the middle column is changed to "6→2", and the right column is changed to "2→6". However, while the second decorative pattern is fluctuating, the symbols are displayed randomly, so the symbol displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (determined stop) and the final stop symbol may coincidentally be consecutive.

Further, the pattern arrangement pattern of the second decorative pattern may be regularly continuous, for example, like the first decorative pattern, "1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → ...・" may be displayed, but in this case, the symbols displayed in the left column, middle column, and right column are displayed differently. Specifically, if the specifications are such that the display is shifted by one, the left column will start from "1" and will be "1→2→3→...", and the middle column will start from "2" and will be "2→3→4". →...'', the right column starts from ``3'' and is changed as ``3→4→5→...'', and is changed to the final stop symbol when the fluctuation stops (determined stop).

In this way, in the first decorative pattern, the pattern displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the variable time and the pattern displayed at the time of the variable stop (determined stop) (final stop pattern) are continuous or continuous. Often, in the second decorative pattern, the symbol displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the symbol displayed at the time of fluctuation stop (determined stop) (final stop symbol) are not consecutive or are not consecutive. It's happening more often.

Next, the relationship between the pseudo continuous pattern, the developed pattern, and the pseudo continuous pattern and the developed pattern will be explained. In the following explanation, a configuration is shown in which the first decorative symbol, the first pending display, etc. are displayed during super reach, etc., but as mentioned above, the first decorative symbol, the first pending display, etc. are displayed during super reach, etc. A configuration in which the information is not displayed may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern when the re-variation is executed. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed at "861". The first decorative pattern is made up of characters and number patterns, and the second decoration pattern is made up of only number patterns. Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern variation. Next, "6" is displayed on the left and right symbols of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol to form a reach, and furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display area (main area), re-fluctuation (e.g. A translucent "NEXT" pattern ("re-variation suggestion pattern", "pseudo-continuation suggestion pattern (pseudo-continuation suggestion effect)") that suggests whether or not a pseudo-continuous variation) will be executed is displayed from the top of the LCD screen to the bottom. It is displayed moving. Next, when re-variation is executed, the non-transparent "NEXT" symbol (also referred to as "re-variation symbol" or "pseudo-continuous symbol") is placed approximately in the center of the LCD screen, instead of the translucent "NEXT" symbol. Is displayed. At this time, a pattern suggesting re-variation is not displayed in the second decorative pattern display area (sub-area). After the non-transparent "NEXT" symbol is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start to fluctuate again (the first decorative symbol before the symbol fluctuation starts again). 1. The stopping situation of a decorative pattern is also called "temporary stopping"). At this time, since the number of pending symbols remains 3, it can be seen that one symbol variation is made to appear as if the symbol has varied multiple times. Next, in the symbol variation that was performed again, a reach was formed again with "7" by the left symbol and the right symbol, and after that, a super reach effect was executed, and since the fluctuation was a loss, the first decorative symbol, the second Both decorative symbols are fixed and stopped at the reach loss symbol ("717") that is not a double. In addition, during the super reach effect, the battle effect between friendly characters and enemy characters is displayed in the center of the LCD screen, so even if it is the first decorative pattern, only the number pattern is displayed in a small size at the top right of the screen ( (Also referred to as ``retreat display mode''), the player is made to pay attention to the battle performance, and after the battle performance ends, a decorative pattern consisting of characters and numerical patterns is displayed in the same way as at the start of the variation. In addition, the pseudo-connection suggesting symbols are displayed at a predetermined position (for example, in the center of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.) without being scrolled. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-continuation pattern is configured to scroll and fluctuate and be displayed in the center part of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG). You may do so.

Next, FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a specific symbol is displayed to create a super reach effect. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern variation. Next, "6" is displayed on both the first and second decorative symbols on the left and right symbols to form a reach, and furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display area, it is indicated that it will develop into a super reach effect. After the specific symbol (also referred to as development symbol) "Development" or "Development!!!" is displayed, the super reach effect is executed. Note that when a specific symbol is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area, a symbol indicating that a super reach effect will develop is not displayed in the second decorative symbol display area. Further, although "Development" and "Development!!!" are different symbols, regardless of which one is displayed, a super reach effect with the same development destination can be executed. Furthermore, the expectations for winning are different for "Development" and "Development!!!", and when "Development!!!" is displayed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when "Development" is displayed. The level is getting higher. In addition, there are multiple types of super reach effects, such as super reach effects with different characters and different expectations for winning, and super reach effects with multiple stages such as the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach. As a development pattern for Super Reach production, there is not only a pattern in which the second half of Super Reach is displayed via the first half of Super Reach, but also a pattern in which the second half of Super Reach is displayed without going through the first half of Super Reach. Good too. Therefore, when "Development" or "Development!!!" is displayed, for example, it is only necessary that the super reach effect A (character A) be displayed together with the super reach effect A. It is possible to configure the system so that the jackpot expectation level is different between "development" → super reach performance A and "development!!!" → super reach performance A. In addition, if the first half of Super Reach is composed of the first half of Super Reach and the second half of Super Reach, when "Development" is displayed and when "Development!!!" is displayed, the same first half of Super Reach is displayed. However, it is also possible to configure the ratio to be in the latter half of the super reach to be different. Of course, the possibility of developing into a super reach with a high expectation of a jackpot among multiple types of super reaches may be configured to differ depending on the type of development symbol (such as "development" or "development!!!"). In addition, there are low-expectation super reach where the expectation of jackpot is relatively low (for example, the super reach performance by Kirin, which will be described later), and high expectation super reach where the expectation of jackpot is relatively high (for example, battle performance that is super reach performance). ) may be configured to include a plurality of each.

As a supplement, here, the first decorative pattern is composed of the first element (e.g., number) and the third element (e.g., character, etc.) at the start of fluctuation, at the time of stop of fluctuation, and before the development of super reach. However, in certain situations that occur depending on the production pattern (for example, during super reach, when moving a role, during a fixed promotion performance, while an error screen is displayed. In this case, super reach), only the first element (number) is used. It is configured.

Next, FIG. 145 is an image diagram showing a display transition when development symbols are displayed corresponding to the preview type and a super reach effect is created. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Here, while the symbol is changing, a notice is displayed (a "comment notice" that indicates the level of jackpot expectation with text in an oval frame, and a "timer" that displays the time until the effect indicating the level of jackpot expectation is displayed). A "next notice" will be given indicating that the change will result in a super reach. First, when a ``chance'' which is a ``comment notice'' is displayed, then a specific symbol ``development'' indicating that the game will develop into a super reach effect is displayed, and the super reach effect is executed. On the other hand, if the "timer notice" "00:10:00" (a display indicating that some kind of effect will occur in 10 seconds) is displayed, this is a specific symbol indicating that a super reach effect will develop. After "Development!!!" is displayed, the super reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when "next SP reach" which is a "next notice" is displayed, the specific symbol is not displayed and the super reach effect is executed. In this way, "development" is displayed after "comment notice", "development!!!" is displayed after "timer notice", and specific symbols are not displayed after "next notice", so they are associated with each other. is being done. In addition, here it is assumed that "Development" is displayed after "Comment Notice" and "Development!!!" is displayed after "Timer Notice", but this is not limited to this. The system is configured so that "Development!!!" can be displayed after "comment notice" and "development" can be displayed after "timer notice", and "development!!!" can be displayed after "comment notice". The percentage of "Development!!!" displayed after "timer notice" may be higher than the percentage of "development" displayed after "timer notice," and the percentage of "comment notice" displayed after "timer notice" ``Development'' may be displayed more often after ``Development''. In addition, there is a difference in the jackpot expectation level between "Development" and "Development!!!" as mentioned above (Jackpot expectation level: Development < Development!!!), and there is also a difference between "Comment Preview", "Timer Preview" and "Next Preview". There is also a difference in the expectation of jackpot, and the expectation of jackpot is comment preview < timer notice < next notice.

Next, FIG. 146 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super reach effect occurs when different display modes are used for the same preview type. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Here, while the symbol is changing, a notice is displayed {a "comment notice" in which the expected level of jackpot is indicated by text within an oval frame (both "chance" and "fierce heat!!" are comment notices)}. be exposed. First, when "chance" is displayed, next, a specific symbol "development" indicating that the game will develop into a super reach performance is displayed, and the super reach performance is executed. On the other hand, when "Very hot!!" is displayed, "Development!!!", which is a specific symbol indicating that the super reach effect will develop, is displayed, and then the super reach effect is executed. In this way, the correspondence is made such that "development" is displayed after "opportunity" and "development!!!" is displayed after "extreme heat!!". In addition, here it is assumed that the correspondence is made so that "development" is displayed after "opportunity" and "development!!!" is displayed after "extreme heat!!". It is not limited to this, but it is configured so that "Development!!!" can be displayed after "chance", "development" can be displayed after "fierce heat!!", and "development!!!" can be displayed after "chance". The percentage of "Development!!!" displayed after "Very hot!!" may be higher than the percentage of "Development" displayed after "Very hot!!" The percentage of "development" displayed after "opportunity" may be higher than that of "opportunity". As mentioned above, just as there is a difference in the level of jackpot expectation between "Development" and "Development!!!", there is also a difference in the level of jackpot expectation between "Chance" and "Gekatsu!!". !” has a higher expectation of jackpot than “chance.”

Next, FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a different look-ahead effect is performed and a super reach effect is achieved. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, the first pending display changes to blue and the decorative pattern is stopped at "861". Next, in the pattern variation related to trigger hold (hold that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect; here, blue hold display), "development" is displayed, and a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, if a continuous number (here, "123") occurs in which the symbol combination of the decorative symbols at the time of the fluctuation stop is a chance prediction, "Development!!!" is displayed in the symbol fluctuation related to the trigger hold. , a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. In addition, when a chance look-ahead occurs, a special effect will occur around the first decorative symbol that has been fixed and stopped, making it easier to recognize that a chance look-ahead has occurred, and for the second decorative symbol, that special effect will occur. It may be configured so that there is no need to do so. In this way, after a pending change effect is displayed as a look-ahead effect, "Development" is displayed, and after a chance is displayed as a look-ahead effect, "Development!!!" is displayed. There is. In addition, here, it is assumed that the correspondence is made such that "development" is displayed after the pending change effect, and "development!!!" is displayed after the chance reading, but this is not limited to this. "Development!!!" is displayed even after a pending change effect, and the percentage of "Development!!!" displayed after a chance reading is higher than the percentage of "Development!!!" displayed after a pending change effect. may be higher, and in this case, "Development" may be displayed after the chance reading, and "Development" may be displayed after the chance reading is higher than the rate at which "development" is displayed after the chance reading. ``Development'' may be displayed at a higher rate. As mentioned above, just as there is a difference in jackpot expectation between "Development" and "Development!!!", there is also a difference in jackpot expectation between pending change presentations and chance predictions, and chance predictions are more likely than reservation change presentations. Expectations for winning the jackpot are high. In addition, in this example, we explained using the correspondence relationship between the pending change effect and the development pattern ("Development", ``Development!!!'') in the chance reading, but other effects can also be used as long as it is a look-ahead effect. For example, it can be applied to the background change effects "Angel Zone" and "True Angel Zone". In addition, in this example, the explanation was made using the difference in the jackpot expectation level in one look-ahead performance (pending change performance or chance look-ahead), but it is also important to note whether multiple types of look-ahead performances were being executed at the same time, or whether they were being executed at the same time. It may be configured such that the correspondence with development symbols (“Development”, “Development!!!”) differs depending on the number of pre-read effects (composite number of pre-read effects). For example, when a hold change effect and a chance look-ahead effect (two types of look-ahead effects) are executed than when only a hold change effect is executed (one type of look-ahead effect), the development pattern in the trigger change is better. is more likely to be displayed, or when only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the proportion of "Development!!!" It may be configured so that the ratio of "Development!!!" is displayed is higher when "Development!!!" is executed.In this case, there are two types of "DEVELOPMENT!!!" ) is being executed, the percentage of "Development" being displayed is higher than the percentage of "Development" being displayed when only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is being executed. good. In addition, similar to developed symbols, pseudo-continuous patterns can also be changed depending on whether multiple types of pre-reading effects are being executed at the same time or the number of pre-reading effects being executed at the same time (composite number of pre-reading effects). ``NEXT!!!'') may be configured to have a different correspondence relationship. For example, it is better to have a pseudo-coupled relationship in trigger fluctuations when a pending change effect and a chance look-ahead effect (two types of look-ahead effects) are executed than when only a hold change effect is executed (one type of look-ahead effect). If the symbol is more likely to be displayed, or if only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the percentage of "NEXT!!!" It may be configured so that the proportion of "NEXT!!!" displayed is higher when "NEXT!!!" is executed. The percentage of "NEXT" displayed when only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) was executed was higher than the proportion of "NEXT" displayed when the previous type) was executed. Good too.

Next, FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition when different display modes of the same look-ahead effect type are performed to become a super reach effect. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Here, when a new ball enters the first main game starting port A10 while the symbols are changing and the winning lottery is won (this suspension is also referred to as "trigger suspension"), a new suspension display ("trigger suspension") is displayed. (also referred to as "display") is displayed in blue (that is, blue is determined in the pending change performance, which is one of the look-ahead performances). Next, if the trigger hold display remains blue and does not change, "development" is displayed in the symbol variation related to the trigger hold, and a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when the trigger hold display changes from blue to red, "Development!!!" is displayed in the symbol variation related to the trigger hold, and a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. In this way, after the blue color is displayed in the pending change performance, "Development" is displayed, and after the red color is displayed in the pending change performance, "Development!!!" is displayed. . In addition, here it is assumed that the correspondence is made so that "Development" is displayed after the blue color and "Development!!!" is displayed after the red color, but this is not limited to this. "Development!!!" is displayed, and the percentage of "Development!!!" displayed after the red color may be higher than the percentage of "Development!!!" displayed after the blue color. In this case, , "Development" may be displayed after a red color, and the percentage of "Development" displayed after a blue color may be higher than the percentage of "Development" displayed after a red color. It should be noted that there is also a difference in jackpot expectation between blue and red, which are the display modes of the pending change performance, with red having a higher jackpot expectation than blue. In addition, in this example, the explanation was made using the correspondence between the display mode in the hold change performance and the development symbol ("Development", "Development!!!"), but if it is a look-ahead performance, it does not need to be a hold change performance, For example, it can be applied to background change effects such as "Angel Zone" and "True Angel Zone."

Next, FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the same super reach effect develops through different displays. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, after a specific symbol “Development” or “Development!!!” is displayed that indicates the development into a super reach effect, a low expectation level super reach effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation level (the first half of the super reach effect) is displayed. ), a production in which the giraffe destroys the middle symbol is executed, and a symbol combination (“656”) that loses the reach is displayed in a low-expectation super reach production. It should be noted that during the low expectation level super reach, the first decorative pattern is displayed only as a numeric pattern, but the first decorative pattern may be composed of a numeric pattern and a character pattern. Next, a high-expectation super reach performance (second half of super reach) in which the expectation of jackpot is relatively high is executed. Here, regardless of whether "Development" or "Development!!!" is displayed, it is possible to develop into a super reach effect, but "Development" and "Development!!!" !”, the rate at which the high-expectation level super reach performance develops is different, and when “development” is displayed, the high-expectation level super reach performance will be executed at a rate of 10%, and “development!!!” ” is displayed, the high expectation level super reach performance is executed at a rate of 50%. In addition, 90% of the cases when "Development" is displayed and 50% of the cases when "Development!!!" It will return to the normal screen without developing into a reach effect.

Next, FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the button effect progresses to the super reach effect. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are changing. Next, a button effect is executed in which the decorative symbols form a reach and the player can operate the sub-input button SB. At the time of the button performance, the first decorative pattern will be only numbers, the left pattern will be displayed on the left edge of the LCD screen, the right symbol will be displayed on the right edge of the LCD screen, and a plurality of symbols will be displayed in the center of the LCD screen that can be selected by operating the player sub input button SB. The pattern is displayed in a circle. The multiple symbols include "6" which is a winning symbol, "Development" and "Development!!!" which indicate a super reach effect, "5" which is a loss symbol, and "NEXT" which is a pseudo continuous symbol. Displayed. When the multiple symbols rotate in a circle and the sub-input button SB can be operated, a button image with "PUSH" written on it is displayed approximately in the center of the LCD screen, and the sub-input button SB is operated. Taking this as an opportunity, a single symbol will be displayed. Here, a predetermined "development" is displayed, and after that, although not shown, a super reach effect is executed. Note that if the sub-input button SB is not operated, "development" is displayed after the validity period of the sub-input button SB has elapsed, and a super reach effect is executed. It should be noted that the symbol displayed upon operation of the sub-input button SB is determined in advance by a preview lottery of the sub-control board S performed at the start of the variation.

Note that the presentation in this example may be changed as follows.
(1) Before it develops into a super reach effect (= up to the stage where the developed pattern shown in the diagram is displayed), the first decorative pattern is not displayed only as a numerical pattern, but is composed of a numerical pattern and a character pattern. The configuration may be such that the first decorative pattern is displayed.
(2) Depending on the type of button image (for example, large button image, small button image, default color, red, rainbow color, etc.), the proportion of the symbols that stop may be configured to differ; for example, large button images When is displayed, the percentage of symbols other than losing symbols, such as "NEXT", "Development", "Development!!!", and winning symbols, being displayed is higher than when a small button image is displayed. You can.
(3) Depending on the type of button image (for example, large button image, small button image, default color, red, rainbow color, etc.), the proportion of the displayed developed pattern or pseudo-continuous pattern may be configured to differ. For example, when a large button image is displayed, the proportion of development patterns is higher than when a small button image is displayed, the proportion of "Development!!!" It may be possible to have a high percentage of symbols being displayed, a high percentage of "NEXT!!!" being displayed, etc.
(4) Any image may be displayed at a predetermined timing without displaying the button image. Additionally, a configuration may be adopted in which there is a pattern in which a button image is displayed (a pattern in which the player can operate the button) and a pattern in which an effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (a pattern in which the player cannot operate the button). In this case, the pattern in which the button image is displayed is often configured to have a higher jackpot expectation than the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing, or the pattern in which the button image is displayed is configured to have a higher jackpot expectation than the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing. "Development", "Development!!!", winning symbols, etc.) may be displayed at a higher rate. Furthermore, even if the ratio of the developed symbols to be displayed is different between the pattern in which the button image is displayed and the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, the pattern in which the button image is displayed is You may also increase the rate at which "Development!!!" is displayed.
(5) Pseudo-continuous patterns may include not only "NEXT" but also multiple types such as "NEXT!!!", etc. If multiple types are provided, "NEXT!!" is more important than "NEXT". !” may be configured so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher, “NEXT!!!” may be displayed in an array pattern in which multiple symbols are displayed in a circle, and “NEXT” may be displayed. It may also include an arrangement pattern in which "NEXT!!!" is displayed at the same time.
(6) Multiple types of arrangement patterns in which multiple symbols are displayed in a circle may be provided, and if multiple types are provided, variations with high expectations for jackpots (for example, jackpot variations, super reach effects) fluctuations, etc.), the arrangement may be configured so that the percentage of sequence patterns with high jackpot expectations being displayed is higher than when the fluctuations are low jackpot expectations (for example, no-reach fluctuations, etc.). good. For example, an arrangement pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot is an arrangement pattern with no losing symbols (for example, "6 (jackpot symbol), development, development, NEXT, development!!!"
”), or a sequence pattern where “Development!!!” is displayed without “Development” (for example, “6・Development!!!・5・NEXT・Development!!!”), “6・Development!!!・5・NEXT・Development!!!”・Development!!!・Development!!!・NEXT・Development!!!” is displayed), etc.

As in (3), the rate at which the development symbols are displayed may be configured to differ depending on the display mode of the notice of the change (button effect, comment notice, timer notice, etc.), or the display mode of the notice of the change may be changed. By configuring the display ratio of the pseudo-continuous symbols to be different depending on the change, if the display mode of the notice of the change is highly anticipated, the probability that the development symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol will be displayed increases, and the player can be configured so that it is easy to understand the expected level of jackpot.

Next, FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super reach effect is achieved in a different effect stage (also referred to as a effect mode). First, production stage A will be explained in detail. At presentation stage A, a first decorative pattern consisting of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, a specific symbol "development" indicating that a reach is formed and a super reach effect is displayed is displayed, and then a super reach effect is executed. Next, production stage B will be explained in detail. In production stage B, a first decorative pattern consisting of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, after forming a reach, the super reach effect is executed as is (in other words, the specific symbol "development" indicating that it will develop into a super reach effect is not displayed), or when the reach is formed, the production stage After displaying "development (a mode in which the inside of a kanji character is hollowed out as shown)" which is different from A, a super reach effect is executed. In other words, in this example, the display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the production stage, but the display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ (is the same), and the display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the production stage. Although a developed pattern may be displayed as a symbol, the second decorative pattern is configured such that a developed pattern is not displayed.

Next, FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing a display transition when re-variation is executed in a different performance stage. First, production stage A will be explained in detail. At presentation stage A, a first decorative pattern consisting of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, after a reach is formed and a "NEXT" symbol indicating that re-fluctuation is to be executed is displayed, symbol fluctuation is started again. Next, production stage B will be explained in detail. In production stage B, a first decorative pattern consisting of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, after "678" (order), which is a symbol combination indicating that re-variation is to be executed in the first decorative symbol, is displayed (temporarily stopped), symbol variation is started again or reach When forming, after displaying the "NEXT (a mode in which the inside of the alphabet is hollowed out as shown)" which is different from the production stage A, the symbol variation is started again. In addition, depending on which production stage the re-variation is executed, if the re-variation is executed twice {variation start → temporary stop → re-variation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re-variation) variation)} and when re-variation is executed 3 times {variation start → temporary stop → re-variation → temporary stop → re-variation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re-variation)} The difference from the jackpot expectation level may be different. For example, in production stage A (e.g., daytime stage or non-look-ahead stage other than the angel zone), the average jackpot expectation is 5% when re-variation is executed twice, and when re-variation is executed three times. The average jackpot expectation is 25%, and the difference is 20% (5 times difference), but it changes again in production stage B (for example, night stage or look-ahead stage such as angel zone). The average jackpot expectation when the is executed twice is 40%, and the jackpot expectation when the re-change is executed three times is 50%, and the difference is 10% (1.25 times difference). ). The difference in jackpot expectation level (execution expectation level of a special game) is calculated by subtracting a percentage value, dividing the jackpot expectation level (1/N), or the like. In addition, although the display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the production stage (production stage A, production stage B), the display mode of the second decorative pattern is the same, and the "NEXT" symbol is the first decorative symbol. However, the second decorative pattern may be configured so that the "NEXT" pattern is not displayed. In addition, although it has been mainly explained that both production stage A and production stage B are non-look-ahead stages in a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state (the same gaming state as the above-mentioned daytime stage), the present invention is not limited to this. , production stage A is a non-pre-reading stage in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state (for example, the above-mentioned daytime stage), and production stage B is a pre-reading stage in a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state (for example, Both production stage A and production stage B are configured as a look-ahead stage in a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state, and production stage A and production stage B are both in a probability variation gaming state and It is also possible to configure the stage as a non-prefetch stage in a time-reduced game state, and if a plurality of performance stages are provided, the performance form shown in this example can be applied regardless of the game state.

Next, FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a pseudo consecutive symbol and a specific symbol are displayed and a super reach effect is executed. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, a semi-transparent "NEXT" symbol, which is a re-variation suggestion symbol, is displayed to form a reach and to suggest that re-variation will be executed. A semi-transparent "NEXT" symbol is displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the liquid crystal screen, and when re-variation is executed, the symbol variation is started again after the non-transparent "NEXT" symbol is displayed. The symbol variation is performed again, a reach is formed again, and this time, instead of a pseudo-continuous pattern, "development" is displayed indicating that a super reach effect is executed. Thereafter, a super reach performance is executed, and since the fluctuation was a loss, the game is fixed and stopped at the reach loss symbol ("717"). As shown in this figure, while it is possible to display a specific pattern (e.g., "Development") after displaying a pseudo-continuous pattern (e.g., "NEXT"), it is also possible to display a pseudo-continuous pattern after displaying a specific pattern. The configuration may be such that it is impossible to display the information. In addition, the rate at which a specific symbol is displayed depends on whether the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed (=whether re-variation is executed or not), the number of times the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed (=number of re-variation), etc. may be different. For example, it may be configured such that the greater the number of re-variations, the more likely a specific symbol will be displayed (= the higher the rate of displaying a specific symbol without a losing symbol); Even if a specific symbol is displayed, it may be configured such that "Development!!!", which has a high expectation of a jackpot, is displayed at a high rate.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 154, even when the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (when a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed, when a developed pattern is displayed), the second decorative pattern is displayed in the left column, middle column, and right column. The variable display is continued in all of them, and furthermore, the second decorative pattern may continue to be displayed in a variable manner in all of the left column, middle column, and right column even during super reach.

Next, FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the first decorative patterns are displayed in an overlapping manner. First, the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "861", but the left pattern (elephant) and middle pattern (giraffe), and the middle pattern (giraffe) and right pattern (chick) are displayed overlappingly. At this time, the middle symbol (giraffe) is placed behind the LCD screen (with the player side in front) than the left symbol (elephant) and right symbol (chick), and a portion of the middle symbol (giraffe) is placed behind the left symbol (elephant) and right symbol (chick). It's hidden. Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, a reach is formed, and the middle symbol becomes a slow fluctuating display. At this time, the middle symbol is placed in front of the liquid crystal screen than the left symbol and right symbol that form the reach. In this figure, the middle pattern is a chick (“1
") is displayed in a low-speed fluctuating manner and does not stop, and then a pseudo-continuous pattern ("NEXT" symbol) is fluctuated and displayed at a low speed and stops at approximately the center of the liquid crystal screen. After that, although not shown, after a re-variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is executed, a super reach effect is executed, and since the variation was a loss, it is fixed and stopped at the reach loss symbol ("717"). When displaying the reach-loss symbol, the middle symbol (chick) is placed behind the left symbol (lion) and the right symbol (lion) on the LCD screen, as before the start of fluctuation, and part of the middle symbol (chick) is hidden. In addition, as for the second decorative pattern, the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern are not displayed in duplicate at any timing. Furthermore, even if a developed pattern ("Development" or "Development!!!") is displayed instead of a pseudo continuous pattern, the relationship between the display of the left and right symbols and the middle pattern is such that the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed. This can be done in the same way as when Note that the display mode may be a display mode in stage C, or a display mode that can be displayed in a specific variation (a variation with a high probability of winning). In other words, the display mode in this figure may be a display mode that is not displayed at stage A or stage B but can be displayed at stage C, or a display mode that can be displayed at stage C, or a normal variation (comparison where reaching is not performed and the game stops due to a loss). The display mode may be such that the information can be displayed in a specific variation (a variation with high expectations for reach) rather than a short-term variation.

Next, FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation speed of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern variation. At this time, the speed of the first decorative pattern gradually increases from low speed to high speed pattern fluctuation (low speed → medium speed → high speed). On the other hand, for the second decorative pattern, the speed of pattern variation is constant, and the pattern variation is always fast. Next, when the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern both become high speed and a reach is formed with the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, the medium pattern becomes a slow pattern fluctuation in the first decorative pattern, and In the 2 decorative patterns, the medium pattern is a high-speed pattern change. After that, during the execution of the super reach effect, the left and right symbols, where both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol form the reach, are stopped (or temporarily stopped), and only the middle symbol is at high speed. The pattern is changing. After the super reach effect ends, since the variation was a loss, it is fixed and stopped at the reach loss symbol (“686”). In addition, in this figure, while the super reach effect is being executed, only the middle symbol is changed while forming the reach in the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, but this is not limited to the execution of the super reach effect. During the middle or during execution of a specific super reach performance, all the first decorative symbols and all the second decorative symbols may be changed in design. In addition, the second decorative pattern may also have a plurality of varying speeds, and in this case, it is preferable that the second decorative pattern is made less likely to change the varying speed than the first decorative pattern. For example, the second decorative pattern does not use low speed but uses medium speed (the first decorative pattern uses low speed, medium speed, and high speed). In addition, it is possible to configure the second decorative pattern so that it does not temporarily stop on the way. Specifically, it can be configured to always be at high speed or stop (determined stop), or it can be configured to be at high speed, medium speed, and stop (determined stop). This is the configuration etc.

Here, we will supplement the pseudo-continuous symbols and developed symbols in the time reduction gaming state. In the time reduction game state, the configuration may be such that pseudo-continuous symbols and developed symbols can be displayed, but it is more preferable to configure such that pseudo-continuous symbols and developed symbols cannot be displayed. This is because in the time-reduction gaming state, the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than in the normal state (non-time-reduction gaming state), and there are fewer performances that suggest a jackpot within one fluctuation. When displaying a pseudo continuous pattern or a developed pattern, you are selecting one with a relatively long fluctuation time, so the period between jackpots (the period from the end of one jackpot to the start of the next jackpot) will be longer. As a result, the speed at which the number of balls increases during consecutive games becomes slower. In addition, in this way, in the time-saving game state, a short variation time is easily selected and the amount of production is small, so the first decorative symbol itself and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol may be simple, and the first element It is preferable that it consists only of (numbers).

As a supplementary note, in the sixth embodiment, an example was shown in which the second decorative pattern is always displayed during the fluctuating display and is always fixed, but as described above, the second decorative pattern is visible when the first decorative pattern is visible. It may be configured to be displayed when it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize, and in this case, the second decorative pattern does not always come to a fixed stop.

In FIGS. 143 to 156, the explanation was given using an example in which the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the first main game side were displayed, but the first pending display on the second main game side It may also be configured to display a second hold display on the second main game side.

In addition, in FIGS. 143 to 156, the explanation has been given using an example in which the second decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-reach mode, but a configuration may also be adopted in which the second decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-reach mode (it is always fluctuating until it stops fixed). .

Based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments, the following concepts can be extracted (listed). However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and it goes without saying that these listed concepts can be combined or separated (high-level conceptualization), and concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments can be added to these concepts. You can.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (9) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
The first presentation pattern and the second presentation pattern are configured to be displayed on the presentation display section in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the first pending number image and the second pending number image are displayed on the effect display section,
A pachinko game characterized in that the effect display section is configured so that the first pending image and the second pending image are not displayed in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (10) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
Equipped with
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image, which is the number of reservations of the first reservation, can be displayed on the production display section,
A second pending number image, which is the pending number of the second pending, can be displayed on the production display section,
Even if the number of reservations in the first reservation and the number of reservations in the second reservation are the same, the first reservation image and the second reservation image are configured to have different display modes,
Even if the number of reservations in the first reservation and the number of reservations in the second reservation are the same, the first reservation number image and the second reservation number image are configured to have different display modes. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (11) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
Equipped with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
In the normal gaming state, it is possible to display on the performance display section a number of first pending images corresponding to the number of first pending reservations and a number of second pending images corresponding to the number of second pending reservations;
In a specific gaming state, the number of first pending images corresponding to the number of holds in the first hold is not displayed on the effect display section, and the number of second pending images corresponding to the number of holds in the second pending is displayed on the effect display section. It is possible to display
This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured such that a first reserved number image and a second reserved number image can be displayed on an effect display section in both a normal game state and a specific game state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (12) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
Equipped with
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
Performed when the number of pending images corresponding to the number of pending images that do not satisfy the conditions for starting the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information and the conditions for starting the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied. A variation-compatible image corresponding to the variation display of identification information is displayed,
In the normal gaming state, it is possible to display a variable-compatible image when the first identification information variable display start condition is met, while a variable-compatible image is displayed when the second identification information variable display start condition is satisfied. This is a pachinko machine that is characterized by the fact that

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (13) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player;
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The second identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
In the normal gaming state, the first performance symbol and the first pending image are configured to be displayed overlappingly in the performance display section,
In the normal gaming state, the first performance symbol and the first reserved number image are configured to be displayed overlappingly in the performance display section,
In the performance display section, the second performance symbol and the first pending image are configured so as not to be displayed overlappingly,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second performance symbol and the first reserved number image are configured not to be displayed overlappingly in the performance display section.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (14) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
An operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
A speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
The first pending number indicating the first pending number can be displayed on the production display section,
A second pending number indicating the second pending number can be displayed on the production display section,
The volume level of the performance sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operating state of the operating member while the variable display is stopped or while the variable display is stopped,
A volume adjustment image can be displayed on the production display section when the volume level can be adjusted,
The volume adjustment image, the first presentation pattern, and the second presentation pattern can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first presentation pattern, and the display priority of the second presentation pattern is higher than the display priority of the first presentation pattern,
The volume adjustment image, the first pending image or the second pending image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first held image or the second held image, and the display priority of the first held number image or the second held number image is higher than the first held image or the second held image. is configured to have a higher display priority than the
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first production pattern can be displayed overlappingly,
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first production pattern can be displayed overlappingly,
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second presentation pattern do not overlap,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the volume adjustment image and the second performance symbol are configured not to overlap even during variable display.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (15) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stopped display, a new variable display is not started for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means) controls the effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display section (for example, the effect display device SG). , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image, which is the number of reservations of the first reservation, can be displayed on the production display section,
A second pending number image, which is the pending number of the second pending, can be displayed on the production display section,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
The display of the first pending number can be updated when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second pending number when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a held image movement effect for moving the first held image or the second held image when a new variable display starts,
The display update time of the first number of pending images or the second number of pending images is configured to be shorter than the pending image generation presentation time and shorter than the pending image movement presentation time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first pending number image or the second pending number image is configured to be shorter than the variation stop time of the first identification information or the variation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (16) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
In normal gaming mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is changed to the first pending image immediately before the start of the variable display. It is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image when the image display mode is the second display mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is the first pending image immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is more likely to become the specific display mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is changed to the first pending display mode immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is easier to become a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image changes to the first pending number immediately before the start of the variable display. It is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved number image when the image is in a specific display mode,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the specific display mode will be used as the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image is determined by the variable display. It is the same as the probability that the specific display mode will be the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the special display mode will be used as the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image is determined by the variable display. When the first pending number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start, the probability of the special display mode being the same as the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image This is a pachinko game machine with special features.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (17) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first performance symbol that can be displayed after becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first performance symbol in the normal gaming state is the reach of the first performance symbol in the specific game state. This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that the number of combination patterns of first performance symbols that can be displayed after becoming a special display mode is larger than the total number of combination patterns in a final display mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (18) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; Equipped with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
When a new ball enters the first starting port, a first update display can be executed as a display update of the first pending number image,
When a new ball enters the second starting port, a first update display can be executed as a display update of the second pending number image,
When a new variable display starts, a second update display can be executed as a display update of the first pending number image or the second pending number image,
It is possible to execute a held image movement effect for moving the first held image or the second held image when a new variable display starts,
When the execution of the held image movement effect is started while the held image generation effect is being executed, the held image generation effect and the held image movement effect can be executed simultaneously without interrupting the held image generation effect that is being executed, and , when the execution of the held image generation effect is started while the held image movement effect is being executed, the held image movement effect and the held image generation effect can be executed simultaneously without interrupting the held image movement effect that is being executed;
When a new variable display starts while the first update display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image is being executed, the first updated display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image After the execution is completed, execute a second update display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image,
When a new ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port during the execution of the second update display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first updated display of the first reserved number image or the second reserved number image is executed after the execution of the second updated display of the two reserved number images is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (19) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The second identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo variation in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production pattern It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
The first presentation pattern and the second presentation pattern are configured to be displayed on the presentation display section in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the first pending number image and the second pending number image are displayed on the effect display section,
A pachinko game characterized in that the effect display section is configured so that the first pending image and the second pending image are not displayed in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (20) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stopped display, a new variable display is not started for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
Equipped with
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
Even if the number of reservations in the first reservation and the number of reservations in the second reservation are the same, the first reservation image and the second reservation image are configured to have different display modes,
Even if the number of reservations in the first reservation and the number of reservations in the second reservation are the same, the first reservation number image and the second reservation number image are configured to have different display modes,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
The display of the first pending number image can be updated when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second pending number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a held image movement effect for moving the first held image or the second held image when a new variable display starts,
The display update time of the first number of pending images or the second number of pending images is configured to be shorter than the pending image generation presentation time and shorter than the pending image movement presentation time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first pending number image or the second pending number image is configured to be shorter than the variation stop time of the first identification information or the variation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (21) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stopped display, a new variable display is not started for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
Equipped with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
In the normal gaming state, while it is possible to display a number of first pending images corresponding to the number of first pending reservations and a number of second pending images corresponding to the number of second pending reservations on the performance display section,
In a specific gaming state, the number of first pending images corresponding to the number of holds in the first hold is not displayed on the effect display section, and the number of second pending images corresponding to the number of holds in the second pending is displayed on the effect display section. It is possible to display
In both the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state, the first pending number image and the second pending number image are configured to be displayable on the effect display section,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
The display of the first pending number image can be updated when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second pending number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a held image movement effect for moving the first held image or the second held image when a new variable display starts,
The display update time of the first number of pending images or the second number of pending images is configured to be shorter than the pending image generation presentation time and shorter than the pending image movement presentation time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first pending number image or the second pending number image is configured to be shorter than the variation stop time of the first identification information or the variation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (22) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
It has a first area and a second area different from the first area as a game area where the game ball can flow down,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
Performed when the number of pending images corresponding to the number of pending images that do not satisfy the conditions for starting the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information and the conditions for starting the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied. A variation-compatible image corresponding to the variation display of identification information is displayed,
In the normal gaming state, it is possible to display a variable-compatible image when the first identification information variable display start condition is met, while a variable-compatible image is displayed when the second identification information variable display start condition is satisfied. It is configured so that
A first notification image that informs that the game ball should be fired towards the first area can be displayed on the production display section,
A second notification image can be displayed on the performance display unit to notify that the game ball should be fired toward the second area,
When the first pending number image is updated in a specific gaming state, it is configured to display a second notification image,
The second notification image can be displayed overlappingly with the first presentation symbol, and on the other hand, the second presentation symbol, the first reservation image, the second reservation image, the first reservation number image, and the second reservation number image. are configured so that they are not displayed twice,
Regardless of whether or not the first pending number image has been updated in the specific gaming state, it is a different image from the first notification image and the second notification image, and the game ball should be fired toward the second area side. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to display a special notification image on an effect display section.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (23) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). First effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21) that controls the
and,
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo variation in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production pattern It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
In the normal gaming state, the first performance symbol and the first pending image are configured to be displayed overlappingly in the performance display section,
In the normal gaming state, the first performance symbol and the first reserved number image are configured to be displayed overlappingly in the performance display section,
In the performance display section, the second performance symbol and the first pending image are configured so as not to be displayed overlappingly,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second performance symbol and the first reserved number image are configured not to be displayed overlappingly in the performance display section.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (24) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
An operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
A speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
Equipped with
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
The volume level of the performance sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operating state of the operating member while the variable display is stopped or while the variable display is stopped,
A volume adjustment image can be displayed on the production display section when the volume level can be adjusted,
The volume adjustment image, the first presentation pattern, and the second presentation pattern can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first presentation symbol, and the display priority of the second presentation symbol is configured to be higher than the display priority of the first presentation symbol,
The volume adjustment image, the first pending image or the second pending image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first held image or the second held image, and the display priority of the first held number image or the second held number image is higher than the first held image or the second held image. is configured to have a higher display priority than the
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first production pattern can be displayed overlappingly,
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first production pattern can be displayed overlappingly,
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second presentation pattern do not overlap,
Even during variable display, the volume adjustment image and the second presentation pattern are configured so as not to overlap.
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first performance symbols in the normal gaming state is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the second performance symbols in the normal gaming state. It's a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (25) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The second identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stopped display, a new variable display is not started for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
It has multiple types of effect display formats, any of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display section, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured so that it can display the
While the first identification information is being displayed as a change, the display mode of the first hold image that is displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is one of the remaining first holds, is changed. It is possible to perform a pending change production that suggests that
The hold change effect is executed during the variable display of the first identification information in a situation where the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and a plurality of first holds remain. In this case, the display mode of the first pending image displayed corresponding to the change target pending can be changed, while the display mode of the first pending number image is not changed,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
The display of the first pending number image can be updated when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second pending number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a held image movement effect for moving the first held image or the second held image when a new variable display starts,
The display update time of the first number of pending images or the second number of pending images is configured to be shorter than the pending image generation presentation time and shorter than the pending image movement presentation time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first pending number image or the second pending number image is configured to be shorter than the variation stop time of the first identification information or the variation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (26) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
In normal gaming mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is changed to the first pending image immediately before the start of the variable display. It is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image when the image display mode is the second display mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is the first pending image immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is more likely to become the specific display mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is changed to the first pending display mode immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is easier to become a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image changes to the first pending number immediately before the start of the variable display. It is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved number image when the image is in a specific display mode,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the specific display mode will be used as the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image is determined by the variable display. It is the same as the probability that the specific display mode will be the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the special display mode will be used as the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image is determined by the variable display. It is the same as the probability that the special display mode will be used as the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first performance symbols in the normal gaming state is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the second performance symbols in the normal gaming state. It's a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (27) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. The first identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP
11-C) and
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first performance symbol that can be displayed after becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first performance symbol in the normal gaming state is the reach of the first performance symbol in the specific game state. The display mode is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first presentation symbol that can be displayed after becoming the special display mode,
It has at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode as a performance mode that depends on determining the performance display content to be displayed on the performance display section,
The first display mode, which is the display mode of the specific first production symbol corresponding to the first production mode, is different from the second display mode, which is the display format of the specific first production symbol, which corresponds to the second production mode. It is configured so that the display mode is
Whether it is a variable display of the first identification information in the first production mode or a variable display of the second identification information in the first production mode, the specific first production symbol that is the first display mode can be displayed in a variable manner. It is composed of
Whether it is a variable display of the first identification information in the second production mode or a variable display of the second identification information in the second production mode, the specific first production symbol, which is the second display mode, can be displayed in a variable manner. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (28) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variation display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed in a first pending image display area in the effect display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed in a second pending image display area in the effect display section,
The first reservation number, which is the number of remaining first reservations, can be displayed in the first reservation number display area in the production display section,
The second reservation number, which is the number of remaining second reservations, can be displayed in the second reservation number display area in the performance display section,
It has multiple types of effect display formats, any of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display section, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured so that it can display the
While the first identification information is being displayed as a change, the display mode of the first hold image that is displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is one of the remaining first holds, is changed. It is possible to perform a pending change production that suggests that
The hold change effect is executed during the variable display of the first identification information in a situation where the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and a plurality of first holds remain. In this case, the display mode of the first pending image displayed corresponding to the change target pending can be changed, while the display mode of the first pending number image is configured not to be changed,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
When a new ball enters the first starting port, a first update display can be executed as a display update of the first pending number image,
When a new ball enters the second starting port, a first update display can be executed as a display update of the second pending number image,
When a new variable display starts, a second update display can be executed as a display update of the first pending number image or the second pending number image,
It is possible to execute a held image movement effect for moving the first held image or the second held image when a new variable display starts,
When the execution of the held image movement effect is started while the held image generation effect is being executed, the held image generation effect and the held image movement effect can be executed simultaneously without interrupting the held image generation effect that is being executed, and , when the execution of the held image generation effect is started while the held image movement effect is being executed, the held image movement effect and the held image generation effect can be executed simultaneously without interrupting the held image movement effect that is being executed;
When a new variable display starts while the first update display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image is being executed, the first updated display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image After the execution is completed, execute a second update display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image,
When a new ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port during the execution of the second update display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first updated display of the first reserved number image or the second reserved number image is executed after the execution of the second updated display of the two reserved number images is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (29) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
The types of the specific display modes include a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of types of specific display modes is a temporary display mode of the first presentation symbol. The execution expectation degree of the special game is configured to differ depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol,
When the specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol or the plurality of types The probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as a provisional display mode of the first production symbol among the specific display modes of the type is determined by the preview effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently depending on the content.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (30) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
The types of the specific display modes include a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of types of specific display modes is a temporary display mode of the first presentation symbol. The execution expectation degree of the special game is configured to differ depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
When the specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, or The probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as a temporary display mode of the first effect symbol among the types of specific display modes is determined by the pre-reading effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the type is configured to differ depending on whether the type is a pre-read performance A or a pre-read performance B.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (31) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
In the case where N (N>0) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, and in the case where M (M>N) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, multiple types of look-ahead effects are executed. Among the types of look-ahead effects, when M types of look-ahead effects are executed, the probability that a specific display mode will be displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the look-ahead effect is relatively higher. This is a pachinko machine that is characterized by:

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (32) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
In a situation where there is a specific hold that is a first hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the degree of expectation for execution of a special game related to the specific hold,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
In the case where N (N>0) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, and in the case where M (M>N) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, multiple types of look-ahead effects are executed. The configuration is such that when M types of lookahead effects are executed among the types of lookahead effects, the probability that the special display mode will be displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the lookahead effect is relatively higher. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:

The Pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (33) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
An operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is being displayed, it is possible to support multiple types of operations. It is configured to be able to display any of the performances,
The probability that the specific display mode will be displayed at a timing later than the timing when the first operation promotion effect is displayed when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, and the probability that the specific display mode will be displayed at a timing later than the timing when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, and This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability of displaying the specific display mode at a timing later than the timing at which the two-operation promotion effect is displayed is different from that of the pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (34) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
An operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is being displayed, it is possible to support multiple types of operations. It is configured to be able to display any of the performances,
The types of operation promotion effects include at least a first operation promotion effect and a second operation promotion effect, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the timing is later than the timing at which the first operation promotion effect is displayed. The probability that the special display mode is displayed is the probability that the special display mode is displayed in the case where the second operation promotion effect is displayed, and the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing that the second operation promotion effect is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (35) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It has multiple types of development performances that are performances that are performed after the reach is established, and has multiple types of post-reach performances that can occur after the reach is established and before the execution of the development performance,
The pachinko machine is characterized in that the probability that the special display mode is displayed after the after-reach performance is generated differs depending on which performance type among the plurality of types of after-reach effects has occurred. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (36) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
It has at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode as a performance mode that depends on determining the performance display content to be displayed on the performance display section,
The switching display mode in which the symbol type of the first production symbol in the first production mode is switched and displayed is different from the switching display mode in which the symbol type of the first production symbol in the second production mode is switched and displayed. ,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second production symbol in the first production mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second production symbol in the second production mode are configured to be the same. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (37) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
Variable winning openings that can take open and closed states (for example, 1st big winning opening C10, 2nd big winning opening C
20) and
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
The types of the specific display modes include a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of types of specific display modes is a temporary display mode of the first presentation symbol. The execution expectation degree of the special game is configured to differ depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol,
When the specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, or The probability that specific display mode B will be displayed as a temporary display mode of the first production symbol among the specific display modes of the type is determined by the preview effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is structured differently depending on the content of
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period, or whether the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed within a certain performance period is different depending on the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (38) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
The types of the specific display modes include a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of types of specific display modes is a temporary display mode of the first presentation symbol. The execution expectation degree of the special game is configured to differ depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
When the specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is selected as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, or The probability that the specific display mode B will be selected as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol among the types of specific display modes is determined by the pre-reading effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured differently depending on the type of
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period, or whether the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed within a certain performance period is different depending on the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (39) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display section that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
In the case where N (N>0) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, and in the case where M (M>N) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, multiple types of look-ahead effects are executed. The structure is configured such that when M types of lookahead effects are executed among the types of lookahead effects, the probability that a specific display mode is displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the lookahead effect is relatively higher. and
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period, or whether the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed within a certain performance period is different depending on the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (40) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It has multiple types of performance display formats, and when displaying a performance on the performance display section, it is configured to be able to display one that corresponds to the set performance display format,
Depending on which effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is set, whether or not the special display mode is displayed when re-variation is executed, or whether re-variation is executed. The display mode of the special display mode displayed when the special display mode is displayed is different,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
In the case where N (N>0) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, and in the case where M (M>N) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, multiple types of look-ahead effects are executed. The configuration is such that when M types of lookahead effects are executed among the types of lookahead effects, the probability that the special display mode will be displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the lookahead effect is relatively higher. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (41) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period, or whether the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period. The display mode is configured such that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed within a certain presentation period varies depending on the number of times the mode is displayed,
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is being displayed, it is possible to support multiple types of operations. It is configured to be able to display any of the performances,
The types of operation promotion effects include at least a first operation promotion effect and a second operation promotion effect, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the timing is later than the timing at which the first operation promotion effect is displayed. , the probability that the specific display mode is displayed, and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing when the second operation promotion effect is displayed when the second operation promotion effect is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (42) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
An operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It has multiple types of performance display formats, and when displaying a performance on the performance display section, it is configured to be able to display one that corresponds to the set performance display format,
Depending on which effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is set, whether or not the special display mode is displayed when re-variation is executed, or whether re-variation is executed. The display mode of the special display mode displayed when the special display mode is displayed is different,
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is being displayed, it is possible to support multiple types of operations. It is configured to be able to display any of the performances,
The types of operation promotion effects include at least a first operation promotion effect and a second operation promotion effect, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the timing is later than the timing at which the first operation promotion effect is displayed. The probability that the special display mode is displayed is the probability that the special display mode is displayed in the case where the second operation promotion effect is displayed, and the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing that the second operation promotion effect is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (43) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After displaying the first performance symbol in a variable manner on the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG),
A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on a performance display section (for example, a performance display device SG);
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It has at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode as a performance mode that depends on determining the performance display content to be displayed on the performance display section,
Execution expectation level of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N (N>0) times within a certain performance period in the first performance mode and the special display mode within a certain performance period in the first performance mode The difference in the expected execution of the special game when is displayed N+1 times is the difference in the execution expectation of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N (N>0) times within a certain performance period in the second performance mode. It is configured to be smaller than the difference between the expectation level and the execution expectation level of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N+1 times within a certain performance period in the second performance mode,
It has multiple types of development performances that are performances that are performed after the reach is established, and has multiple types of post-reach performances that can occur after the reach is established and before the execution of the development performance,
Depending on which type of performance among the plurality of types of post-reach effects has occurred, whether or not the special display mode will be displayed after the post-reach effect has occurred, or the probability that the special display mode will be displayed. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured such that the characters are different from each other.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (44) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
When the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether special display mode A among the plurality of types of special display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol or the plurality of special display modes. The probability that special display mode B will be displayed as a temporary display mode of the first effect symbol among the types of special display modes is the pre-reading effect that will be displayed before the special display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type is pre-reading effect A or pre-reading effect B,
It has at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode as a performance mode that depends on determining the performance display content to be displayed on the performance display section,
A switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first production symbol in the first production mode is different from a switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first production symbol in the second production mode,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second production symbol in the first production mode is the same as the switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second production symbol in the second production mode. It is a pachinko game machine.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball entry determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game starting opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B 2nd main game starting opening ball entry determination means, MJ11-H Auxiliary game entry opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 1st big prize opening ball entry determination Means, MJ11-C20 Second grand prize opening ball entry determination means MJ20 Random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-A First main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-H Auxiliary Game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ30 Suspension control means, MJ31 Suspension extinguishment control means MJ31j Fluctuation start condition sufficiency determination means, MJ32 Symbol reservation means MJ32-A First main game symbol reservation means, MJ32b-A First main game symbol reservation information temporary Storage means MJ32-B Second main game symbol retention means, MJ32b-B Second main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol retention means, MJ32b-H Auxiliary game symbol retention information temporary storage means MN Game content determination Means, MN10 Win/fail lottery means MN11-A First main game win/fail lottery means, MN11ta-A First main game win/fail lottery table MN11-B Second main game win/fail lottery means, MN11ta-B Second main game win/fail lottery table MN11-H Auxiliary game win/fail lottery means, MN11ta-H Auxiliary game win/fail lottery table MN20 Special game transition determination means, MN40 Symbol content determination means MN41-A First main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination Lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determining means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determining lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determining means, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determining lottery table MN50 Fluctuation mode determining means , MN51-A First main game fluctuation mode determining means MN51ta-A First main game fluctuation mode determining lottery table, MN51-B Second main game fluctuation mode determining means MN51ta-B Second main game fluctuation mode determining lottery table , MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP Game proceeding means MP10 Display control means, MP11-C First and second main game symbol control means MP11t-C First and second main game symbol control means MP11-C Second main game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP20-B Second main game starting opening electric accessory opening/closing control means MP21-B Second main Game starting opening electric accessory opening/closing condition determining means, MP22t-B Second main game starting opening electric accessory opening timer MP30 Special game control means, MP31 Condition determining means MP32 Special game content determining means, MP32ta Special game content reference table MP33 Special Game execution means, MP33-C 1st and 2nd big prize opening electric accessory opening/closing control means MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34 Special game time management means MP34t Special game timer, MP50 Specific game control means MP51 Variable end condition determination means, MP52 Time saving end condition determining means MP52c Time saving number counter, MB Game state temporary storage means MB10-C First and second main game state temporary storage means, MB11b-C First and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H Auxiliary game state temporary storage means, MB11b-H Auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b Special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b Specific game related information temporary storage means MT Information transmission control means MT10 Command transmission buffer, MH Prize ball payout decision Means A First main game peripheral device, A10 First main game starting port A11s First main game starting port ball entry detection device, A20 First main game symbol display device A21g First main game symbol display section, A21h First main game Symbol holding display section B Second main game peripheral device, B10 Second main game starting opening B11s Second main game starting opening ball entry detection device, B11d Second main game starting opening electric accessory B20 Second main game symbol display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display section B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display section, C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device C10 1st big prize opening, C11s 1st big prize mouth prize detection device C11d 1st big prize Mouth electric accessory, C20 2nd big winning hole C21s 2nd big winning hole winning detection device, C21d 2nd big winning hole electric accessory H Auxiliary game peripheral equipment, H10 Auxiliary game starting hole H11s Auxiliary game starting hole entry ball detection device , H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display section, H21h Auxiliary game symbol holding display section S Sub-control board, SM Effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SM10 Display information receiving means, SM11b Main side information temporary storage means SM20 Effect display control means, SM21 Decorative pattern display control means SM21n Drawing display content determining means, SM21ta Lottery table for drawing variation content determination SM21ta-2 Decorative pattern effect table, SM21b Drawing related information temporary storage means SM21t-1 First drawing fluctuation time management timer, SM22 Drawing pending information display control means, SM22b Drawing pending information temporary storage means, SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination Means, SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM24 Preview effect display control means, SM24n Preview effect display content determining means SM24b Preview effect related information temporary storage means, SM25 Reach effect display control means SM25n Reach effect display content determination means, SM25b Reach effect display content determination means Related information temporary storage means SM27 Right-handed display control means SM40 Information transmission and reception control means SS Production display means (sub-sub control unit), SS10 Sub-information transmission and reception control means SS20 Image display control means, SS21b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Production display device , SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative pattern display area, SG12 First reservation display section SG13 Second reservation display section KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
A variable prize opening that can be opened and closed,
a first identification information display section capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, a validity determination is performed based on the acquired first random number, and based on the result of the validity determination, the stop display mode of the first identification information and the first identification information are determined. a first game content determining means for determining a variable display mode;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display section to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information in accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a validity determination is performed based on the acquired second random number, and based on the result of the validity determination, the stop display mode of the second identification information and the second identification information are determined. a second game content determining means for determining a variable display mode;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determining means;
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
With respect to the first performance symbol that is displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the first performance symbol is configured to be displayable within the one performance period. and after the specific display mode is displayed, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed,
Regarding the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
The predetermined preview effect has a plurality of display modes, and the specific display mode is displayed depending on which of the plurality of display modes the predetermined preview effect is displayed. It is structured so that the probabilities are different,
The display mode of the second effect symbol immediately before the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the final display mode of the second effect symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display, The display mode of the second presentation symbol after the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is regardless of the final display mode of the second presentation symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display. After displaying a specific type of specified display mode among the plurality of predetermined types of display modes, the display mode can be switched to a predetermined type of specified display mode that is different from the specific type of specified display mode. It is configured,
The number of types of the plurality of prescribed display modes is configured to be smaller than the number of types of final display modes of the first presentation symbol,
The final display mode of the first production symbol when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, and the first identification information or the second identification information in the stop display mode A pachinko game machine characterized in that the final display mode of the first presentation symbol can be displayed in a different mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first performance symbol is stopped and displayed.

Images